The good Uchiha Brothers

by Itachfanboy

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages and a better villain version of Danzo trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei.

Chapter 1: Chapter 1 Killing the Uchia

The good Uchia Brothers
What can Itachi and Sasuke accomplish together?
What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei
Disclaimer I do not own Naruto or the characters in the Naruto series. I also do not own Itatchi, so that's awkward.
Ch1
Itachi had just walked into and entered the designated area to meet Danzo Shimura. I am about to meet Danzo. I know that my clan is planning to throw a coup d'état to overthrow the village hidden in the leaves, Konoha. I have been spying on my clan to give information to Konoha because I believe in this village. I hope my clan can still be saved from committing a grave mistake.
Danzo Shimura enters the room; he is otherwise known as the "Darkness of Konoha." He has black spiky hair with a patch over his right eye with a cane in his left hand. He walked to Itachi. He was thinking about how Hiruzen was too nice in his ways and how he did things that contradicted those perfect-looking values. Hiruzen let Orochimaru, who was experimenting with human beings, while not wanting to believe the rumors of what he was doing. Hiruzen also let the son of the yondaime hokage, Naruto, become an orphan, and now he is forcing him to live on his own with barely any money. I personally don’t care about the demon brat, but watching Hiruzen give his grandfather act while not telling him that he is the son of the Yondaime, giving him a tiny amount of money, and seeing him once a month and not telling him about his 9-tailed friend in his stomach infuriates me. Watching him act like such a good and sweet, caring old man with a smile on his face while treating that same person like that is such a Hiruzen thing to do. That is what infuriates me so much about him and why I will find a way to become the next hokage to save the roots of this great village. That is why I must do what that sweet figurehead Hiruzen cannot do and send that traitorous Uchiha clan to the depths of hell for this great village. This genius Itachi Uchiha, who Hiruzen thinks so highly of and thinks he can become the next Hokage, what an absolutely hilarious thought process. Manipulating the good, loyal shinobi Itachi Uchiha will not be hard. I will kill two birds with one stone: the Uchiha clan will die, and the Hokage of the next generation will become a traitor. How easy this is. Itachi Uchiha, you must be what this village needs at this time, something only you can do. You, Itachi Uchiha, are a great shinobi, very loyal to this village, and you must do what Hiruzen cannot because he cannot come out to the village about what your clan is doing because there will be unrest. You must kill your clan and, for our great village, then leave and become a spy for this village. This will be an SS class mission. You will be branded as a traitor to the village, but we will not send hunter ninjas to try to kill you. If you are the great and loyal ninja that you say you are, you will accept this mission. Yes, I will do this mission only if I do not kill Sasuke. Okay, you will do this tonight, and Sasuke will not be touched. Itatchi was as easy to manipulate as I thought. I am one step closer to becoming Hokage. Yes, I will keep our promise: no Hunter Nin will attack you, but I never said anything about ROOT ANBU. Oh, how naive you are. I will do what Danzo said because it is right for the village. Is what I am supposed to do really right?
Itachi I’m so happy you’re home. Big brother, can you train me? Sasuke, come here. Itachi pokes him on the forehead and says, Maybe next time, Sasuke. Itachi then walked into his father's room to talk to him about his spying efforts on Konoha. Hi Father, I am here to report on the village. Yes, my son, thank you for helping spy on that corrupt village, Itachi. What did you find? It is the same father they know about our negative feelings about the village, and Hiruzen is still trying to find a way to fix the troubled relationship. Yes, Itachi, good work. Yes, sir. When Itachi walks, he can't help but think how his father has walked down the wrong path. Killing one’s village for any reason is a traitorous act no matter how you look at it. Itachi took a walk into the beautiful green forests of Konoha to think about his issues. This is something that I must do for Konoha. I must do it for my village. I will protect Sasuke from far away, and he will hate me, but I will do it to protect him and so the Uchiha can rise again. Wait, is this right?
I have never once questioned my village. I have known for a long time that there is darkness in the shinobi world because of my Anbu experiences. What I have never thought about is Konoha actually dark? I feel like there’s something wrong here. My best friend Shisui Uchiha just got killed by Danzo. How do you know if what you’re doing is good? When I think about a good village, it would be one where there is no deceit, where the people can trust their government in the ninja world of lies. Shisui would’ve wanted me to try to achieve those types of things in Konoha. The more I think about this mission, the more I think I should do this one last mission and then try to build a village that Shisui could grow old and happy in. It does not need to be perfect. Being a good village is harder than it seems, but I will achieve it for Shisui.
As Itachi is heading back to his house, he senses somebody a few feet behind him. I know you’re there. Who are you? Hi, my name is Madara Uchiha. I was stabbed in the back by my own people when I told them to leave Konoha, and I wish to help you exterminate them as the rats they are. What will you do? I will kill all of the police force. Okay, that sounds agreeable. Okay, Young Uchiha child, this will be the end of our clan. While Itachi was walking away, Madara said something to somebody that Itachi didn't know was there. Zetsu, make sure that Itachi does not get killed by Hunter ninja, and if anything happens, tell me where to go so I can talk to him. We should persuade him to join our plans for the future for the moon I plan. Yes, master.
While Itatchi was walking back home, he was thinking about if he could really kill all the people that he grew up with. All the times that he has good memories from his childhood, could he really kill them with all of his good memories? He knew that it was what you had to do for the good of Konoha. Then he started thinking about Sasuke and how much he loved his younger brother and how sad he was that he would not be able to give him the life that he wants to build in his new world. The life Shisui Uchiha should’ve had. How could he tell his brother that he was about to massacre his whole family and the whole entire clan, and he thought more and more about this. He then realized that he was being just like Hiruzen was, acting nice for being too nice to avoid tough situations and tough conversations that could have allowed the Uchiha clan to not hate Konoha. If that did not happen, then I would not have to kill his entire clan. How could I build my New World if I cannot have my brother with me. What would Shisui do? Shisui would not lie to me. I know what I must do. I must talk to Sasuke.
End of chapter one. How will Sasuke react to what Itachi has to tell him?

Chapter 2: Chapter 2 The letter of truth

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch2

Sasuke, will you come outside with me? I want to show you something. Yes, big brother, where are we going? You will find out when we go there. How am I supposed to explain to a 6-year-old that I am about to murder our clan? Sorry, Sasuke. I have to kill them to test my power; like, who would believe that? Man, this is going to be tough. Sasuke, this is the cliff that Shisui jumped off. I think that his death really gave me the power to write my own destiny. It is amazing how impactful one good friendship can be. Yeah, brother, I am sorry about Shisui’s death, Itachi. Thank you, Sasuke. I actually brought you out here for a reason: just like Shisui’s death, there are going to be more people to die. DIE? Itachi, I’m so glad that you want me to help you kill someone on a mission in the village. I will be a good ninja brother! I wonder what our nicknames will be; maybe the Sharingan Brothers, the scary 4 red-eyed duo, or ohh, what about the dual shinigami?? Itachi, I really like that one. Can we pleasssseee. No, Sasuke, it is much more serious than that. Sasuke, have you noticed that our father has been very angry lately? Yes, he has been; he talks about needing to change things, but I do not understand. Well, yes, he is trying to change things in a bad way. Sasuke Wait until I am done talking to reply. This is complex, and I do not want to miss any steps. There is tension between the Uchiha clan and Konoha. After the 9-tails attack, people think that an Uchiha controlled the 9-tailed fox because Madara Uchiha could do that. After that, the Uchiha clan started planning a coup d'état to overthrow the village. I was spying on the village for the Uchia clan and spying on the Uchia clan for the village. I have received instructions to kill the Uchiha clan for the village's safety. Brother! Why are you doing this? You can't kill Mom and Dad. I will be sad. My mom wakes up and cooks for me, and then she teaches me shuriken practice. Whenever I’m sad, Mom will come over to me and hold me tight and tell me that everything is okay. When I was 3, I thought there were monsters in my closet, and my mom said that she put them under a genjutsu to make them my friends. My mom also takes me to the store, and she always makes me laugh. I have so much fun with Mommy. And Dad may not love me as much as he loves you, but I know he just wants me to be like you. Itachi, please don’t kill our family and our clan. I would be so sad. I am so sorry that you have to hear about this, but they are going to die no matter if I kill them or someone else will. I understand why you are crying, Sasuke, but you have to understand that there is a reason why I am telling you this. I am telling you this because I said I would not do it if you had to die. Me? Why Itachi? Why me? You will always be my little brother, and I will always be with you. I love you too, big brother. There is one more thing I will tell you: I will either give you 2 options. You will either be put into a genjutsu now that will wear off in 4 hours, which will not allow you to move and live in this village as the lone Uchiha. Option two is when I get back, and you will come with me to try to build a better world. You must know that this option will be much harder, and you have to give up your childish ways to reach our goals. Which one will you choose? I will choose to go with you brother. Also, congratulations Sasuke on awakening your sharingan.

This is the last family I have to kill before my own family. Each time I do this, I feel like a little bit of my humanity goes away with me. When he walked inside his family's house, he saw both of his mother and father on their knees with her back turned to the door. Itachi, we understand what you’re doing, and even though we disagree with you, we are proud of your resolve. Please take care of Sasuke. Yes, father, I will. Your deaths will not be meaningless. I promise that I will build a better world for Sasuke and one that Shisui would be proud of. Your death will not be in vain! In my world this type of thing will never happen. Nobody will ever have to kill their own family. He pierced both of his parents' hearts, killing them both. He was crying at the memories of his parents. He then walked out of the house sad and a different man than when he walked in. All around him was death, but he would make all of their deaths meaningful.

Sasuke was watching what his brother was doing on one of the nearby hills. He felt extremely sad that all of his family was gone. That his clan was gone, that everybody that he grew up around was dead. And it was his brother who killed them all. Watching every single one of them die struck a chord in him that demoralized him and made him feel sadder than he’s ever felt in his whole life. Then as he watched his brother enter his parents house, he felt his heart hitch, and his chest tightened. He kept thinking about his mother dying and how much he loved his mother and how he would never see her again.When he heard screaming inside the room, it saddened him more. When Itachi walked outside of the house, he felt his eyes start to hurt immensely. As Itachi got closer to his brother, he saw the pinwheel shape in his eye, and he was stunned. His brother had just awakened the Mangekyō Sharingan. Sasuke, we will talk about your eyes later. We must figure out what our next step is.

Itachi and Sasuke were In a tree. Itachi was thinking about what the next step should be. Itachi was thinking about how to get Sasuke out of the village with him and what to do with him. Without Sasuke, he would have been able to travel and move to wherever sounded best to him because he is an S-class ninja who can handle himself. Sasuke is 6 years old and may be gifted, but a genin would kill him because he does not even know how to use his eyes yet. So his next step must be a place that can protect his brother. To do that he needed to go to a new village with his brother. The tough part is that he will be branded as a traitor, and he did just murder his whole clan. He could imagine it now. Hi, my name is Itachi Uchia. I just murdered 150 people, but I promise all I want is peace. Can I join your village? That would not work at all; he needed a drastic perception change and to think strategically about this. So a small village may be too risky for Sasuke because he needs protection at his young age, so he is going to have to go to one of the big 5 nations. The Land of Earth was just in a war with Konoha, so that will not work. The sand village has a treaty with the leaf village, so they would just give him back to the leaf village. The land of lighting would just force him and Sasuke to breed and make red-eyed babies. The mist village is going through bloodline purges, but they would have some advantages. You have to pass through water to get there, which makes it harder for them to be tracked. The bloodline purges could give them the ability to side with people with bloodline limits that are being attacked, so 2 more people joining them would not hurt. He could use his ANBU skills to find the rebels camp. And there is no other place that he would rather join because fighting those purges would align with his goals to help make a better world. So now that he made the decision on where to go, he needed a way to fix his image issue. He then had a brilliant idea at the perfect time that would always be remembered as the letter of truth worldwide for years. The best part was he was going to deliver these letters around the world using his raven summons; he could deliver hundreds of letters during a week. This is the letter that he wrote.

My name is Itachi Uchiha. I am writing this to give a message to the world. I was ordered by Danzo Shimura to murder my clan, the Uchiha clan, tonight. The reason why is because my clan wanted to have a coup d'état in my village. I am writing this because I am choosing to no longer accept the world of lies we shinobi die in. My clan and the village system are full of depictions and lies. How many times have fathers, mothers, and siblings been killed during an ANBU mission and not come home for a proper burial to fit the world of lies? Governments lie every day to their citizens, and all it leads to is hatred and despair. I will be working to build a shinobi world where there is complete honesty about everything that is done. This will lead to a much greater sense of trust and understanding because the other villages will know what the real issues are. When one country goes to war with another, that is a result of an action from problems that have not been settled. The root cause of war is problems, and we have not structured our villages to solve these root problems. I am not saying that this will fix every issue, but we give too much as shinobi to our villages to be lied to by the people that we die for. I will be summoning hundreds of crows and flying them across the elemental nations. If you see one of my crows with an Uchiha symbol on it, call it to you, and it will give you my coordinates. I cannot promise anything to the people who join, but you will always know you fought for something that you thought was right.

ITACHI, UCHIHA

Summoning Jutsu! Then there was a puff of smoke. Take these to every village immediately. Sasuke I figured out where we are going to go. We are going to head to the Mist village because it is the best place to go. Yes brother, that sounds good with me. Okay, Sasuke It will be dangerous until we get to the Mist village, so no matter what I say. Promise me, okay? Yes, big brother.

Danzo-sama, yes, what do you have to report? Danzo Sama I have a letter to give you that has been passed and dispersed throughout the village and we think in other villages as well. Once Danzo saw the letter, he immediately was extremely upset. He trusted Itachi to protect the roots of Konoha, but now he was completely destroying Konoha. Everything that he had worked for his goals and his ambitions to become the Hokage all went down the drain. He was extremely upset, and he knew how bad of a situation he was in. Because it was so widely distributed, he knew that Hiruzen was going to put him in jail. And all of his schemes and plans were not options anymore. The first thing he has to do is send his top 25 Root agents to kill Itachi. And then with the rest of his root agents, he was going to have to escape Konoha.

Thank you for coming to this emergency meeting. All route agents will be escaping the village with me.Konoha has stabbed us in the back for the very last time. This village that we have protected from the shadows has betrayed us. Every single one of you will be coming with me. Anybody that is on missions will be sent back immediately. If anybody sees you, Itachi, kill him immediately. Also in the folder that you’ve been given, there’s a list of 25 people to go find and kill that traitor.

Oh, Itachi You may have led to me having to leave Konoha. But there will be a day that this village will be in ashes. There will be a day when you all would’ve wished that you would’ve kept me in the shadows. As Danzo was getting ready to leave his base and escape, a white and green humanoid-looking character emerged from the ground. My master wishes to speak with you.

It was nighttime, and Itachi was running through the trees with Sasuke on his back. They had made it halfway to the land of water, and then Itachi sensed it; he sensed 25 people gaining on him. Itachi activated his Sharingan to gauge the chakra levels of the people that were chasing him, and he realized that five of them were low Jonin level, and 20 of them were Chunin level. He immediately started to think. He thought about the strategies to deal with the newcomers. He knew that if he went all out in a normal situation, he would be able to handle all of these enemies. But this was the worst possible situation because he had to protect his six-year-old brother. If they were able to grab a hold of his little brother and use him as leverage to not attack them, then it would be over. His usual tactic would be to take the time to find his enemies weaknesses and exploit them and use his strategic mind to do it very efficiently. But in this situation he needed to protect Sasuke. And to do that, yeah, to end the fight immediately, as soon as possible, so that they cannot come up with a counterplan to him. He then knew as they approached that he was going to have to go all out and overpower them from the beginning. Sasuke, do you remember what I said? You must listen to my every word. You must stay right behind me; wherever I move, you must go and stay right behind me. If you do not stay behind me, we will both die.

End of chapter two. How does Itachi deal with these ninjas?

Chapter 3: Chapter 3 Going to Wave

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

CH3

Itachi was thinking about the best plan to handle these ninjas. Now that I look at it, there are eight support ninjas and 17 short-range fighter-type ninjas all spaced out to surround me. I will take out the long-range fighters first. Fireball Jutsu, a massive, wide, flaming fireball, was shot out of Itachi's mouth. This fireball was much wider than it was long, and it killed five of the front line ninja. The rest defended with either defensive water Jutsu or earth-style Jutsu. Amataru's extremely hot flames came out of Itachi’s eyes, which were bleeding, and shot out as Itachi’s eyes moved to each of the support ninjas. These Mangekyō Sharingan-specific flames are the strongest flame jutsu in the world, and it burned each of the eight support ninjas. All that's left is 12 close-range fighters. Itachi activated the first level of his Susanoo, which looked like an orange rib cage. Then a multitude of C-Rank Ninjutsu that was shot at him. Susanoo could take much more than a low-level ninja could throw at him, so now it was his chance to try to kill them all. He took out 12 shuriken and called out Phoenix Nail Sage Fire Jutsu. These shuriken shot out at these ninjas with the fire increasing its speed and damage. This attack was much too strong for these ninjas without their support, and it killed all of them.

Itachi immediately turned off his Susano and grabbed his eye in pain. Then a white and green creature came out of the ground. The creature said to him, Madara Uchiha is my master. Madara Uchiha wants you to join his group to try to end the cycle of hatred in the world. You guys both have similar goals; it would only make sense that you would work together. And you can bring Sasuke with you, and he will be safe. How will you achieve ending the cycle of hatred? We will put everybody in the world in a genjutsu that will allow everybody to live their favorite fantasies and never fight with each other. So dreamworld is basically what you’re saying? Yes, a dream world where everybody gets what they want, which can never happen in the real world. Well, I think you may have misinterpreted a few things because I am going to try to fight for honesty and truth in this world. Living in a world of dreams would still not achieve true truth from the governments. You should’ve known by my letter that I would say no. Madara will not like this answer, and our paths will cross again, the last Uchiha.

After the fight, Itachi was feeling very, very sick; his eyes and his body hurt after doing what he did. Itachi! You look so sick; you’re coughing so much. Why? Well, Sasuke The Mangekyō Sharingan puts a strain on your eyes. I might as well tell you about yours and explain to you your eyes. The sharingan has five phases. It has the one tomoe, sharingan, two tomoe, three tomoe, Mangekyo, and then the eternal Mangekyo sharingan. So the first stage, the one tomoe, is where the sharingan starts to become useful and activates for users. It usually allows your opponents to slow down in your mind and slow down the time of the opponents moves so you can predict their movements, and once you see their movements, react to their movements. Each level from there becomes more and more strong with that individual ability. It grants the user the ability to cast strong eye genjutsu on your opponents. Those are its main abilities. And then the next step up from that is something that is extremely rare. The Mangekyō is a huge jump in power from the normal Sharingan. The Mangekyō Sharingan allows the user to have three extremely powerful abilities that are specific to that user. Mine are Amaterasu, which are black flames that come out of my eyes that will never stop burning for seven days and seven nights. My other Mangekyō Sharingan ability is Tsukuyomi, which allows me to place the other person in a genjutsu where I am basically God. I can control time and inflict pain at such a slow rate that it can torture people to death or into an extremely exhausted state. The last thing that every Mangekyou Sharingan-wielding person can use if they have them in both eyes is the Susanoo. Susanoo makes you physically much stronger to an extreme degree, and then it provides a skill that gives you great defenses, which is called the Susanoo. As you develop your Susanoo, it can become stronger and have more abilities you need to become stronger. When our parents passed away, you went through an emotionally traumatizing state. This state allowed you to activate your mangekyou sharingan. My Mangekyō Sharingan got activated when Shisui Uchiha died right in front of me. That’s the eye you have right now. I will train you how to use those eyes of yours and will make you extremely strong.

But you must promise me to not use them in life or death situations until I give you permission to. Your body is not ready for the extreme power that is showing on stage grants you. The negative of the Mangekyō Sharingan is that as the user uses it, the user will become blind. This blindness comes from the extreme power it has without the ability to go to the next stage. The next stage is the eternal Mangekyō Sharingan. This gives the user a boost, and it’s a lot of power. There has only been one man to master this power, and it is Madara Uchiha. The only way to achieve this is to switch your Mangekyo Sharingan eyes with a sibling. Since we both have Mangekyō Sharingan, we can switch our eyes. But we will wait until 2 to 3 years inside the mist village to do this. You must never use these eyes until the age of 13, even after you get your EMS, because your body is not ready for the power unless you’re in a life or death situation. Also, people would send thousands of shinobi to try to kill you if they found out that you had those eyes. Be very careful who you show them to. I’m sure you know that Shisui Uchiha died because Danzō Shimura wanted his Mangekyō Sharingan eyes. Learn from that lesson, Sasuke.

Danzo Shimura was walking inside a very dark cave following the white and green humanoid figure that was in front of him. As he walked into the room, he saw an orange-haired man floating in the air with spiraling purple eyes. Then he saw the man with an orange swirl mask with a sharingan in his eye socket. Immediately, Danzo was confused. I thought he died? Hi Danzo! You must recognize me; my name is Pain. This is now my vessel to help teach the world true pain. I will never trust you because all you do is backstab people, just like you did in the Hidden Rain Village. If you wish to show the world true pain, I will allow you to join this organization. Danzo was a very seasoned ninja. He had seen Tobirama; he had seen him, and he had seen Minato, all great leaders. And he was always next to them, working with them but not really the leader. The more he looked at the way the Sharingan user and the purple-eyed person from his past interacted, he realized something odd about the dynamic. The purple-eyed man was trying to act like he was the leader. He saw the way that his body and his eyes moved very subtly to the man with the sharingan. As if he was waiting for approval for what he was saying. He then realized that if a man could be so much more powerful than the man whose power absolutely amazed him with those purple eyes who he saw in the past, then this man must be by far the strongest shinobi in the world. All of his attempts to manipulate things, and Konaha would’ve never accomplished anything with a man like this around. But then he was extremely confused because the strongest Sharingan users in the past 20 years are all either dead or could never have the power like this. The more he thought about it, only one absolutely crazy idea came through his head. Either this man is the son of Madara Uchiha, or it is Madara Uchiha. He then remembered his goals and about how he wanted to stop Itachi Uchiha from accomplishing his dreams and his goals, and then he knew that it may not be today, it may not be tomorrow, it may not be five years from now, it may not be 10 years from now, but there will be a day that he will use these great, powerful shinobi as tools. All he had to do was play his role. Yes, I do remember you; your eyes are pretty impressive. And yes, my village gave up on me, so I will help you inflict pain on this world. After that he walked out of there with a black coat with red clouds on it. As the man that Danzo thought he was either the son of Madara Uchiha or Madara Uchiha, that man walked out to watch Danzo walk away. He knew that this man would eventually try to manipulate things to his advantage. But there is nothing that that man could ever do to him because of his strength.

Itachi had Sasuke on his back, and they were jumping through the trees, getting close to the mist village. Itachi put a shinobi that they passed by under a genjutsu to tell them where the rebel base was at. Itatch was thinking about the best way to introduce him and Sasuke to them. He could easily sneak into the rebel base, but it would make him look like somebody who was trying to break in and do damage to the camp. So he decided the best option would be to walk slowly to the gate. If anybody tried to kill them, it would be an easy escape. This way they could all see him, and he could tell them why he wanted to join them. Inside the leaders building of the rebels base was a woman with red hair and very voluptuous curves who is the leader of the rebels in the hidden mist. Miss, we have a situation at our gate. What is it? There is a man and a young boy who are walking slowly to our gate, but they have the chakra levels of a kage, and the other one has the chakra levels of a chunin. What should I do now? I will go out there with you to grab Ao and three of my personal guards. Yes, ma'am, as Itachi got closer to the gate, he was able to see a red-haired woman who walked outside of the gate, and she asked, Who are you, and what do you want with us? My name is Itachi Uchiha, and I wish to join your rebellion, and I have my younger brother here with me, Sasuke Uchiha, who will come with me. And there were gasps; everybody who was at their camp was shocked because they all heard about the man that wrote that letter.

End of chapter 3. How does Itachi’s letter impact the world??

Chapter 4: Chapter 4 The result of Itachi's letter

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch4

Itachi’s letter had a grand impact on the Shinobi world that we know. The least affected by far was the land of earth. When Ohnoki saw the letter, he made an announcement that what Itatchi said was from a liar and a traitor. Because of the fact that they were just in a war with Konoha, it was easy to build negative sentiment there about Itachi. Ohnoki did not view it as a negative. Because it was not something he really had to be worried about.He did think that it incited the natural rebellious side of people. What he did was figure out the amount of people that he had on surveillance and guard duty to act as people to stop people from escaping as well as stop people from invading and other normal guard duty jobs. There was nobody that took a lot of feeling and impact from the letter because they were enemies.

In the land of lightning there is a different reaction. The fourth Raikage had dealt with an image problem for the land of lightning. With all the bloodline hunting and attempting to steal the Hyuga child. Using other bloodlines and using them between shinobi to make children was not a good look and representation for the village. He wanted to be different from the previous leader on those aspects. Raikage-sama I have a letter for you. Give it to me. The Raikage read the letter, and he was impressed by the guts of the person that wrote the letter. It is very impressive to write a letter like that knowing that your village might try to kill you. Is this only sent to us? No sir, it looks like this has been given to hundreds of people. And our scouts say that it has been given to more places than just our village. Really, that’s impressive. I do think that if this guy needed to come to our village, I would let him in. Why do you say that, Raikage-sama? The land of lightning is a place to prioritize his power and honor. A man willing to stand up and fight for the things that he wants is honorable. I would like you to do something. Yes, sir. Take down his location, and whenever he stops moving from place to place, I want you to send him a letter. Understood? Yes, sir.

In Suna There was a mixed reaction to Itachi's letter. Some people detested Itachi because they felt like he was betraying their ally. But they also detested the way that their ally was running their village. Leader sama I have a letter for you. All right, give it to me. Thank you. Suna Kage was extremely surprised. Because he really felt uniquely conflicted on this issue. On one hand, a downward movement in and losing a powerful S-class ninja like that could really hurt the village. But he also thought that there could be something there. He had been thinking for a while since they started the alliance that they got the bad end of the stick. They weren’t getting as many missions, which was leading to less pay. So on the other end, economically speaking, this will help them because Konoha will not get as many missions for the lack of trust in the government. He also would love to thank Itachi. The reason why is because it would make it easier for him to try to invade Konoha. Without Itachi or the last Uchiha, they will become less strong. And on top of that, the government structure will lose its bite and strength without Danzo protecting it from the shadows. With Itachi gone and Sasuke gone, it just put Konoha in a really weak spot. Honestly, the more he thought about it, the more he wanted to walk over to where Itachi was and hug and kiss him for helping him so much. He then realized when his son became Chunin exam age, he would send him to the Chunin exams in the great village with their will of fire. He thought more about his six-year-old son named Gara, who has the one-tailed Shikoku inside of him. His son only knew murder; his son only knew anger; his son was beyond crazy, and he knew that he had pushed his son to be like that. But now he could see a realistic chance of a day coming where there will be only four great nations. And to achieve this goal, the attempted murders, the sending of assassins after his son, will have to change; he will have to breed even more fear and anger and hatred in his son. And when he was done and Konoha was slain, there will be a golden era in the sand known as the area led by the Demon of the Sand, and nobody will ever mess with their village ever again.

The smaller nations that were allied with Konoha felt their trust in Konoha slipping because they allied with them because of the image of the good-hearted village of the land of fire. And that’s the reason why they wanted to ally with them, because they felt like it was a good village, honest and something you could trust. But because of that, they signed the offers that were not as financially advantageous. So after that, these villages were up in the air and could be swayed to a different village if the offer was better.

Itachi's letter did have more of an impact in Konoha. When Hiruzen, the Hokage of Konoha, read the letter, he was amazed and sad. He was amazed that Danzo had gone so much more dark than he thought. He always knew that he had darkness in him but could never see him doing that type of thing. They were teammates, and both learned from Tobirama, the second Hokage, and he thought they had a tighter bond than that. It made him sad. He was sad at the loss of Itachi Uchiha, who he saw so much potential in. He really wanted the Uchiha clan to have a place in Konoha forever. But then the fact that Itachi left the village and wanted to make a village of honesty really hurt him. Because he was the longest-tenured Hokage ever, and he had made many mistakes. With Orochimaru, he regretted those things. It made him feel like he might be doing things wrong in Konoha. The mountains of regrets that were growing within him just got larger. They also had a major issue; there was no place that the letter hit home more. He could tell that people were tempted to leave. Konoha was supposed to be the place with the land of fire. That represented the heart and passion that resides with each citizen. Because of that, he saw the way that the villagers did not always want to come up to him. It had been the way that the government had been run since the beginning of the village; he could see them thinking about leaving. He saw the way that the villagers did not always want to come up to him. He saw the way the villagers would not stare at him for very long. People’s hearts were changing to distrust, and it was very troubling for their future as a village. He was very deep in thought about what he should do. Hi Shikaku, I'm glad you came into the office for a meeting today about the letter. Anything for you, leader llama. What do you think about the letter and how we should handle it? I think we should handle it with respect and authority at the same time. What I mean by that is we should not publicly denounce Itachi because it’s just going to force more resentment toward the village. But while doing that, we should have shinobi making rounds around the village to make sure that nobody escapes. Yes, I think that’s a good idea. As the Jonnin and commander, you may implement your steps. Thank you, leader Sama. You can leave now.

In Konoha there was an academy with some very important students who just recently started going to school as six-year-olds. This class was buzzing with so much chatter and talking before the class started because of what happened recently in the letter of truth. Sakura I can’t believe Sasuke left. I’m so sad. How about you? I know, yeah, I am so sad, and I can’t believe the boy I loved was supposed to be my soulmate. He would’ve chosen me over you, Baka. What are we supposed to do now? We both had a crush on Sasuke, and now he is gone. Naruto is a Baka, Shikamaru never moves, Choji is always eating, Shino is so quiet, and Kiba is loud. Yeah, we have nobody to crush on now. Did you hear about Itachi’s letter? No, tell me. Well, Itachi wrote a letter saying that he was ordered to kill his clan by a guy named Danzo; my dad said he was a bad guy. And basically he regrets killing them and wants to try to change the world to a truthful government. Ino, that man killed his whole family and took my Sasuke away. I don’t care what he is fighting for. That man is a bad man. Well, I miss Sasuke too, but the more I read the letter, the more I see the point. Oh yeah, and what is that Ino pig? It’s that he is standing up to try to change the world; at least that is honorable. No way, Ino, you cannot say you want honor after killing your whole clan. Hi guys, the top dog is here now. Since Sasuke left, you all can have the alpha male you have been wanting all to yourself. Shut up, dog. Brain, nobody likes a boy like you, Baka. Hey Choji, have you seen how sad everyone is? Those fangirls look like they lost a million dollars. Yeah, Shika. I can see that. What do you think about that letter? It is troublesome, but there were some things in it that were right. What do you mean? Well, the village system that we have right now could be better, and when you try to build an honest society, it could lead to more peace. Shika You are not going to leave me, are you? No, of course not, Choji. I just think that this is something that our clans may think about, don't you? Well, my clan teaches honor and the glory of battle, and Itatchi’s goal is very honorable. This could lead to a very troublesome situation. Hey Shino, what did you think of the letter? It was very interesting. Why? Because of its social dynamics. Man, it is so hard getting you to explain what you think, Shino. My clan is all about loyalty. Anyone who kills his clan will always be disloyal. The only person who was sitting alone was Naruto. Naruto was an orphan, someone who was very alone and tried to cover up his sadness and loneliness with pranks. Why am I the only one here who does not have a family and is lonely? If Sasuke had been here, at least when I looked around the room, I could have seen someone in the same situation as me. I have been beaten and treated badly by the villagers, and I am always alone. My world changed when I saw that letter. An honest world sounds amazing to me because I don't even know why all of these people hate me. I don't even know why these people beat me. The truth would change my whole world. I want to go where the letter tells me to go so badly, but I cannot travel on my own yet and make it there. I will use my pranking skills to try to follow my schoolmates to see if they want to leave and then go with them. That’s the only thing I can think of. I just wish that I had more friends. Hinata, who was in the corner of the room trying to be as invisible as humanly possible, was also conflicted. My clan, the Hyuga clan, is the complete opposite of Itachi. We hide behind lies to control the branch members. It is all just political movement and controlling that has led to a clan that I am not proud to be the princess of. I wish I could just run away. If Naruto runs away, then I would run away with him. His confidence and work ethic give me courage, and without that, I would be alone.

Shikamaru, Choji, Glad to see you guys are back from school. Don’t forget that you guys have to come to the meeting today. It sounds troublesome, but I will go. Later that day, around sunset, there was an extremely large meeting in the Narra main compound.

Even though it is troublesome, we have gathered here to talk about Itachi’s letter. Choza, Yes, we have been with Konoha for a very long time. Our clan really tries to celebrate the honor of death and battle and the honor that comes with being a good human being. And we have decided that even though it will be hard, we cannot ignore Itachi’s letter. We feel Itatchi’s emotions when it comes to this world he wants to build and the way that it can change, and we think we should follow him. There were gasps among many groups of people at this meeting because they were so surprised. I know you guys are very surprised, but when Hashirama wanted to build our village, we joined because we believed in his vision. That vision did improve the world, but we are in a situation again where there is someone to follow that can change the world for the better. We respect our forefathers very much in our clan, and it would be a disgrace to them for us to not have the courage that they had. We have accepted the possibility of failure, but we know that we will never forgive ourselves for not trying. I would like to say that you guys should not put our friendship before your clans before making this decision. Inochi, what do you think? We know what Danzo has done is wrong. And I cannot help but worry about the fact that it could have been any of us. If any of us had had negative feelings, they could have sent one of our own clansmen to kill us all. Think about that. This village took the clan's faith that we gave to the village that we would serve this village, and they just showed that we are in danger. They can kill any of us; that is why I want to leave. Our clan no longer feels safe. We must leave, but I just cannot do it until my child is older. Now there are shinobi that will be patrolling outside of the village. We also must leave this village in a planned fashion. We would like to join. Everyone’s heads turned to the entrance to Shibi Aburame, who had just walked into the room. We will join you guys for the safety of our clan’s future. All heads turned to Shikaku, who was the head of the Nara clan, who were not overly physically strong but might be the smartest people in the shinobi world. It is troublesome, but it would be more troublesome if you all died. We will do what the Akimichi and the Yamanaka said. We will leave after 2 years of being here. We will act like everything is normal to make sure that we do not draw any suspicion. The one issue is if we all leave at the same time, it will draw a lot of attention to us. We must be extremely careful about not telling anyone about our plans. I will think about what is the best course of action to get us out of the village. I will say that one step will include shadow clones of us going in the opposite direction as us as a distraction. So as many of our clansmen as possible must learn that jutsu. Does that make sense? Yes, it does. Okay, remember, nobody act like this conversation ever happened.

On an A-ranked mission, Kakashi and Anko Mitarishi were heading back to Konoha. Kakashi, did you see the letter that Itachi wrote? Yes, I did. In our briefing with Hiruzen, I have to say that Itachi will never achieve his dream. He will never achieve his dream because this world is too dark for him to achieve his society. Anko was actually moved by the paper Itatchi wrote and was thinking about leaving. Based on Kakashi’s answer to her question, it was best to change the subject so she did not raise any suspicions. Kakashi, all you do is read those books. Why do you read them so much?. Ma Ma, I read these books because they are the best literature ever created!!! Okay, okay, I get it, but name one thing you do that is not related to that book and being a shinobi. Ummm, well, I was told I could cook pretty well when I was younger. Anko was not the type of person to beat around the bush on a topic, so she did something that most people did not do. Why do you answer most questions like the best part of your life is the past? Do you have any hopes for the future? Immediately, Kakashi went on the defensive: Oh no, that is not something I want to talk about. Well, I know you do not want to, but not having someone to talk about it with must be extremely hard on you. I know from experience that talking to Kurenai really helped me get over my issues with Orochimaru. Guy doesn't really seem like the emotionally developed type, so I do not think that you would talk to him about it. I mean, I am not trying to understand every bad thing you have ever gone through; I am just trying to understand why you do not want anything else. I mean, I have watched you and your friend group, and your actions are odd. Most guys either chase women to date them or to try to sleep with them. And when they go out, they try to do one of those two things, but I have never seen you try to do either. Some guys are more shy, so they usually try to become your friend first, but you can tell by how nervous they are that they like you. But you do not do any of those things that normal guys do. And yes, some guys are like that, where they make girls work for them, but even then they either sleep with them or deem them worthy of being a couple. But you do none of the 4. When you are out with your guy friends. You just read your book completely in your own world. Most people just let it go and do not care or cannot notice the signs of someone who needs help. I am like you in a different way. If there were 100 people in a room, you would be the quietest, most non-talkative person there, and if I were in a room with 100 people, nobody would be louder and more attention-grabbing than me. We are both extremes because it is how we cope with our pain from our pasts. But I am sure that the famous copycat ninja is very aware of that. And as the only other member of us two extreme shinobi, I am the only one that can relate to you. You see, Kakashi had lost many things in life: his father committed suicide, his mother died when he was young, his whole gennin team died, and his sensei, Minato Namikaze, the 4th Hokage, and his wife both passed away. He was so broken from all of that it put extreme pain on his heart and gave him depression. He would always act like he was just a guy late to things, but he hated leaving his house. And whenever he finally did leave, he felt like nothing else mattered more than going to the memorial stone because he was feeling so negatively about himself. He hated himself and put on a facade to trick the world into believing that the great copycat ninja was perfectly okay, but on the inside he was slowly decaying. The only thing that was getting him through was his comrades and Guy’s craziness. He also had a hard time sleeping because his mind was running so fast thinking about the things that happened to him in the past. He could not just shut it off. Like anyone else who is going through depression and is a professional at putting up a facade. And at this moment he decided to give someone a chance. I am cursed; everyone that gets close to me dies. Why would I want a girlfriend or even a one-night stand when all she will do is die? I cannot go through the process of getting close to someone and then dying. It would hurt too much. I am afraid that it would break my spirit. So that is why I do not have any dreams or wants for the future because I am cursed. Well, I understand that you feel like you are cursed, but don’t you think that the people you have lost would want you to try? Yes, you are probably right, but I do not think that I will just jump into it; it’s just too much. I would not recommend you do that either; for you to achieve something like that, you would have to work on yourself emotionally anyway to be ready for a relationship. First, you can just start with a friend that you can talk to, which is me, and your pain will slowly go away with time. You also must take the time while doing that to figure out what you want in the future, not what Guy wants, not what Konoha wants, and not what I want, okay? Okay, she felt glad that she was able to do what Kurnie did for her and try to involve someone else with her issues. Sounds good. Then Kakashi opened up his book but could not help that inward smile at the fact that he felt a little lighter. Anko felt glad that she was able to do what Kurnie did for her and try to help someone else with her issues.

At the Hyuga compound, their reaction to the letter was very simple. Thank you, Hyuga council, for coming today. I have some things that I wish to say about Itatch’s letter. We must use this letter to gain more power in the village. We know we have the strongest clan in the village now. We must hope that some other clan leaves Konoha and we can gain more power. I want every Hyuga, if a clan leaves, to disobey any order so that we can help them leave so that the Hyuga can rule Konoha. We could not have said it better ourselves, Hisashi.

In the hidden mist village in the rebel base, there was no greater positive impact than Itatchi’s letter. The camp was on a small island off the coast of the mist village. This place had all of the rebels there and their families, and there were some very important people in this village. Hi Mei, This is Ao reporting from your Anbu surveillance mission. It looks like the northeastern fort is moving 20% of its ninja to the northern fort for supplies. It looks like a false alarm. That sounds good, Ao. Good work. Thank you. Mei sama how is the development process going for prospects for one of the next swordsmen? There is a young child around 8 years old whose name is Chojuro. He is very skilled for his age with the sword, so I think he is the best candidate. Sadly, he is just so nervous we will have to break him out of that. Yes, a nervous swordsman does not really seem like the image that the 7 swordsmen of the mist are meant to portray. Well, Mei-sama, what do you think our plan of attack will be against Yagura? Well, we need time to build up our strength while also we have to win the people's trust. Yeah, I think the rhetoric on these bloodline purges is crazy. I mean, who in their right mind would approve of targeting clans and killing them just because they have a blood limit? You must not have seen the letter. Ao our village is not the only place where this has happened. Here, read this: Ao’s face was absolutely shocked and prideful at the same time. I cannot believe that Konoha ordered one of their family members to kill the whole Uchiha clan; it is so surprising. Yes, it was considered the greatest village for them to do something like that; it is very surprising. Yes, it is Ao. Did you read the rest of the letter? Yes, I did, and I feel like we can use this person’s ideals as some sort of emotional strength for our citizens. We should make one for each family to remind them that there are other people like them that are not inside of these walls. I could not agree with you more, Ao I will get these in every household immediately. I wonder where he will go? Well, I highly doubt that a civil war-torn land with a doujutsu would be his first choice. Yeah, that would not be my first choice either, but I do not think we should give up hope on that. The island where these rebels lived operated like a small town where everyone knows everyone, and it made Mei extremely happy to see how happy everyone on the island was. It gave her hope for her future. Mei was with her younger sister Mindy, who was 6 years old with red hair, and Mei was putting her to bed. Mei Yes, Mindy, do you think that that man who wrote that letter will come here? I hope so, Mindy; that would be great, but it is about using anything you can to deepen your resolve when you are fighting for something, and that is what this letter has done for our people. What do you think he is like? Probably a very deep human being, but other than that, I do not know Mindy. Well, Mindy It is time to go to bed. Goodnight, big sister.

When Mei thought about that day, she never thought in a million years that Itachi Uchiha and his brother would come. How do we know that you are Itatchi? Summoning jutsu above itachi rose up 5 ravens with Uchiha crests on each raven with letters to be given out. Okay, you do know that the mist is in a civil war, and we are the rebels. It could be a dangerous place for your brother. I know it may be dangerous for him, but it would be anywhere else we went, but here we can find like-minded people, which will be good for him. Okay, I will let you come inside. We have many things to talk about. When Itachi entered through the front gate, he had experienced something that he never had before: everyone was staring at him. He experienced stares because he was a prodigy, but those stares were filled with envy and jealousy, but now he was receiving stares out of respect. We actually used your letter in each household of people here so they could be reminded that other people think about the world similar to us. Itachi was stunned because he never would have imagined that the letter that he wrote would affect so many people, but from that moment he felt a connection to the people of this rebellion. Itachi, please sit in this seat here. Thank you, leader-sama. You are welcome. My name is Mei Turumi, and before we get you started with ranking, there is something that you must understand if you want to live here. The thing that you must understand is that you will never have any peace and quiet; people will view you as a symbol of what is right with this world, and you have to make sure that you do not take any actions that tarnish that image. That means no running around with women, no being weird; you have to be the representation of that image every day. Yes, that will work for me. Okay, well, it looks like you are an S-class ninja, so I will give you the rank of Jonin, or you can work with AO, who used to be in ANBU. I used to be an ANBU captain, so I would choose ANBU. Okay, that makes sense, so there are living quarters for ninjas with families. Would you like to take you and Sasuke there? Yes, I would like to take him there with me. Okay, that sounds good. I think all of the specifics are settled. Is there anything you would like to request? Do you guys have an academy? Yes, we have a much smaller one. How old is your brother? He is 6 years old. Okay, perfect. That is the first year of our academy. Well, I will have AO take you to your living quarters to get you set up. I will start to give you missions with AO in a few days. Thank you,

End of chapter 4, a time skip is coming soon.

Chapter 5: Chapter 5 Two swordsmen on the move

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. I also do not own the Itachi and Kisame bromance, which is so sad.

Kakashi and Anko pairing

(6-month time skip)

CH5

In the land of the mist, Itachi and Ao had become a very formidable combination. They had a tactic of scouting enemies for hours to find any slip-ups to do damage. They were especially good at exposing the nighttime. They would take advantage of the fact that most people on a campsite relied on a sleeping time schedule with a few people to watch and notify other people in a camp. This was normally not an issue because most ninja were extremely stealthy and could not be caught so easily. If you try to break into a camp, all it takes is one pair of eyes to see you and notify everyone, and then that person dies. Sadly for the anti-rebel group, they were facing a Byakugan user and a Sharingan wielder who made finding these lookouts extremely easy. That stacked upon the fact that if they got caught by anyone, Itachi would just put them under a genjutsu and they would not move or make any noise. So Itachi and So took out 2,000 soldiers since Itachi got there, and it was causing some real issues for Yagura and the anti-rebel forces. Yagura-sama, we have lost more shinobi to these two men. We must take some extreme action to combat these ninjas. Well, they are both masters in stealth, so the only way to attack this camp would be to lure them into a trap. Yagura was a 3-tailed jinjuriki, and he could easily deal with this problem, but he thought it was time to test someone’s loyalty. Kisame was the most powerful ninja from the 7 swordsmen, but he had seen him becoming more disconnected from the mist village. Kisame got in trouble for leaving a battle 4 weeks ago because he was bored. Over the last 4 weeks in jail, he had said on multiple occasions that he had changed and he wanted to fight for the mist again. We will go ahead and let Kisame try to redeem himself in this mission; if he fails, we will sentence him to death. Sir Kisame is our strongest ninja. Are you sure that death is appropriate? I have no time for an untrustworthy bloodline having pawns. Kisame, you are about to receive a chance to redeem yourself, but if you fail, you will die. Will you accept this mission? Yes, I will accept this mission for the hidden mist.

Itatchi and Ao were about a minute and a half away from the next place they were going to attack when they felt an extreme chakra presence heading their way. I'll go ahead with the mission; I will stay back and keep our unwelcome guest company. Wow, so nice of you to send your comrade away, but you only quickened your death. Kisame Hoshigaki, the strongest of the 7 swordsmen, is extremely gifted with water jutsu. Oh well, it is great to know that the youth knows who I am, but who are you, child? I am Itatchi Uchia. You are the man who wrote that letter!?? There is no way a child could write something like, Who are you really?'' Itachi closed his eyes and opened up his eyes to reveal the Sharingan. Those eyes—you must be the man writing that letter. If you are, then what in the world are you doing in the mist? You must leave; there will never be hope for peace here. I have been stabbed in the back over and over again, and this village is rotten. I came here because it is a cause worth fighting for. What kind of person would I be if I did not follow through with my words? Itachi's eyes spun and turned into the pinwheel shape, and he said, "Tsukiyomi." Kisame opened up his eyes to see a world without shape and very muddled with Itachi inside. Hello Kisame, this is my strongest genjutsu. I can control time and what happens inside this world. I will show you what I have seen so you have no doubt that I am who I say that I am. Kisame saw this 14 year old child murder his whole clan and receive orders to do it by his government. He also saw Itachi put into a position where being a traitor to his village was his only choice. Why did you go against your village? I went against my village because I think I can do better in this world. I know very much about you too, Kisame. You used to have the strongest loyalty in the village, but they started to ask you to do some things that went against your moral code. What do you think is the right way for the world to kiss? The right way for the world is to change from what is going on currently. So let me get this straight. You have a bloodline limit, think that what your government is doing is wrong, and are not treated well, but you are not fighting for the rebels. Why? I am afraid I am afraid that we will fall. We do not have more numbers, and I am not stronger than Yagura. Mei is not stronger than Yagura. Everyone would look up to me wanting me to act. All I am right now is a man who just follows orders. But all I am right now is a man who just follows orders. Thank you for being honest, but don’t you think that fighting for the Kiri that you grew up loving is an honorable goal? And you are right, Mei, and you cannot defeat Yagura. But you, Mei, and I can defeat Yagura. Will you come with us to make Kiri the nation it is supposed to be, or will you keep on denying the man you are supposed to be? I will join you; they are going to kill me if I fail. This Genjutsu seems like it could be very annoying to deal with anyway. A question, though? What do you do to people in here? I stab them with a blade for the equivalent of 24 hours, and they can feel the pain. Jeez, if you wanted me to join, you should have started with that.

Itachi There are 500 enemies coming our way right now; we have to leave. Yes, Ao, exploding water wave!!! An extremely huge amount of water came from Kisame, and the surrounding area became a lake. Water release 5 feeding sharks 5 sharks entered this lake and started attacking the enemy ninja. Well, I guess you have not lost your touch. Kisame, we should make it back to the base camp easily with this distraction. Mei Sama Itatchi and Ao have returned from their mission. Report Ao yes, Leader-sama, we were heading to camp 1 mile west of the capital, and we got intercepted by Kisame. Itatchi and I agreed that he would stay behind and stall Kisame. I went ahead to try to complete the mission. After silencing the first 3 guards, one got the jump on me and retreated back to their camp. Then the 500 ninja in the camp attacked me, and I fled. Itachi, you can tell the rest. Yes, when I intercepted Kisame, we talked and came to an agreement for him to join the rebels. Kisame of the 7 swordsmen has joined us! Where is he? The person at the front gate wanted your permission before letting him in. Anbu tell him to let Kisame into our office. Hi Mei, It has been a while. Yes, it has Kisame. Why is this time different than when I asked you to join me? I did not think that you and I could kill Yagura because of his jinchuriki state. But with Itachi, we can win. Well, we will make you a Jonin. I think we can both agree your style of fighting is not exactly quiet enough for ANBU. Yes, Mei Sama. I will also make you the teacher of the next generation of the swordsmen of the mist. We already have one person who is skilled with the sword; his name is Chojuro. Okay, Mei Sama, thank you for allowing me to join your rebellion. Itachi show Kisame to the shinobi living quarters so you can stay.

Ao you have been a ninja for a very long time. Can we trust Kisame? Yes, Mei-sama, he seems like he has found a new purpose in his life and friendship with Itachi. Well, with Itachi and Kisame being complete strokes of luck, we may be able to move up our time frame. Yes, Mei-sama, we have been lucky, but we are fighting a good cause. If these moving pieces keep on continuing, the Mizu we build together may be the greatest ever. Yes, but who would be their leader? It would be you, Mei-sama, right? I do not know; maybe I am not the right fit. Kisame and Itachi are stronger than me. Itachi is also looked upon as a god in this village. Nobody is more loved than him. When we first brought him here, I thought that he would act like any other 13 year old boy who chases girls and gets into petty fights with their comrades. It has been the exact opposite; he has the mind of a seasoned shinobi with a very calm demeanor, and all he is focused on is talking shortly with people that come up with him. When he is done with that, he focuses on Sasuke. Did you know that Sasuke and Mindy have become friends? It is hilarious; the first time they met, Mindy wanted to play Sasuke in Shogi, and she beat him in 20 moves. You should have seen Sasuke fuming because he was getting beaten so badly. They are so cute together. Ha ha ha. And then while all the girls are fawning over Sasuke, she is just zoning out looking at the lake. Whenever she is with him, it's hilarious. Yes, that is funny, Mei-sama, but back to Itachi: I do think that he may be able to be a good leader, but he would need you to teach him. Yes, I think that it is something I could start to do.

Sasuke, how was the academy this week? It was good, Itachi. I learned about the different elemental nations and former Mizukages. Did you know that one of the Mizukage used a clam in their jutsu? Isn’t that so cool? Yes, Sasuke, it is. Itachi, can we go training? Yes, Sasuke. We can go training and get on my back. Yes, Itachi!! Wow, this forest is pretty cool. Itachi, can I show you how improved my fireball jutsu is? Yes, fire style fireball jutsu, out of Sasuke’s mouth came a big fireball. That was good, but before we move on to learning a new jutsu, I want you to try to improve it by at least 20%, and I think you can do what you want to know how. Yes. You have to improve your breathing control. You have to try to practice breathing in as deeply as possible so you have perfect breathing control to maximize the fire you can produce. The reason why is that each fire jutsu comes from the lungs and stomach, and if you can maximize the amount of air you can breathe in, you can maximize every fire jutsu you ever use. Wow, that is so cool, Itachi. I will do it. The other thing I will show you just once, but you must learn in case of an emergency. I want you to force chakra into your eyes and activate your mangekyo. Yes, Itachi! Once you do, I want you to put a lot of chakra into your body and imagine a skeleton forming around you. Around Sasuke formed a bone-like structure that was purple. Okay, now deactivate it. Yes, Itachi, my eyes hurt. Yes, Sasuke, your body is not ready for the power that your eyes grant you. What I just showed you is your Susano. It is one of the greatest defensive jutsu ever in the shinobi world, and if you are ever in an emergency, you must use it and run. Yes, Itachi.

There was a man with bandages wrapped around his face with a child with an ANBU mask walking to the rebel forces gate. (6 months earlier) in the most western part of the land of earth, there were Zabuza and Haku as paid assassins. Yes, Haku, we have to do this mission. We need to stay as far away from the mist hunter ninja as possible, and this achieves that. Yes, Master Zabuza, you know how I have issues working for morally corrupt people. I know, but these are the kind of people that hire assigns like us, so you better get used to it. A hawk with an Uchiha emblem flew above Zabuza and gave him the letter. Zabuza read the letter and felt like fate was playing with his life and that he was going to be able to have a second chance at making a difference. Zabuza a year ago led an assassination attempt against the Mizukage, which failed. Zabuza had the bird come closer to him and Haku and checked the bird's location for Itachi, and it said the rebel camp of the hidden mist. Zabuza was stunned by an S-class shinobi from Konoha going to fight for the mist; that was crazy. He knew that now was the right time to head back to the mist and rejoin the village. But it could not have come at a worse time. They had strategically moved slowly to move to the opposite side of the shinobi world as the mist. The issue was that they had to go back to the mist very stealthily and slowly. They had to do this to avoid the Mists hunter ninja. Haku, we are going back to the mist. (back to present day). Well, Haku, here we are, after 6 months of traveling stealthily through the elemental nations; we are back home. Yes, my master. A person burst through the front door, Mei! It looks like a child and Zabuza are heading to the gate. What do we do? Lead them into my office. Well, Zabuza, who is this child with you? Her name is Haku; she has the Ice Release Keki Genki. Wow, I thought all of them were killed. I am glad that the world gets to have one more. Okay, Zabuza, why do you want to join the rebels? I got a letter from a Hawk that led me to this place. What a surprising thing, someone fighting for their dream in the same place that I fought for mine. Yes, Zabuza, well, I am glad you are here. I do want to ask, do you want Haku to become an orphan, or are you her guardian? I am her guardian. Sounds good, Haku, you can take off your mask. Haku, do you want Zabuza to be your guardian? Yes, I will do it for my master. Well, this is interesting timing. You are the second 7 ninja swordsman to join today. What? Who joined? Kisame. Wait, so you're telling me I get to spar with Kisame again? That will definitely make me more powerful. I will make you a jonin, and you will join Kisame to teach the next generation of swordsmen. Yes, Mei sama. Haku, how old are you? 7 years old. Okay, and she will join the academy. Ao show him to the ninja family barracks. Yes, leader sama.

End of chapter 5, we're headed to Konoha to get some growth from these characters.

Chapter 6: Chapter 6 What Will Kakashi do?

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. I also do not own Kakashi, but Anko does.

Kakashi and Anko pairing

(year timeskip)

CH6

Kakashi was thinking about how much his life had changed over the past year and a half. He gained a very loud but sensitive friend in Anko. She was extremely helpful for him to heal himself and really work on his emotional issues. Anko always tried to make sure that he knew that he had to do this work by himself, and it was working. It took him a while, but he forgave himself for what happened with Obito and Rin. He also forgave himself for not appreciating his father and looking down upon him when he committed suicide. He also forgave himself for what happened with Minato and Kushina, and over the past 6 months he had started to think about what he wanted. He realized that he wanted to try to build the Hatake clan back and wanted to be a good father. He thought that with all of the mistakes in his life, he could help mend his soul by helping another child grow. That really became his mindset about 3 months ago, and then he started to realize that is when Anko could never leave his mind. Before this she was just an extremely supportive friend who was attractive, but since he had mentally made the decision to want to be a husband, new things about Anko seemed to matter more. The way she and Kurenai interacted and how close their bond was. He realized that someone with those bonds must be extremely loyal. He got to see for a very long time how emotionally mature she is and how supportive she was with him. He also started to realize how she never provoked anyone negatively before they provoked her negatively. Underneath all of the loudness, there was a woman that would always help someone in need, which showed that she had a good heart. During these 3 months he felt himself becoming attracted to her for more reasons than her very attractive exterior. He had been trying his best to figure it out until today. He realized that today he has been in love with his best friend for a long time. He loved ANKO, and he knew it; the issue was just like any girl: he had no clue if she liked him back in the same way. But he knew that he wanted to date her to see if they were compatible enough to build the family that he wanted. So as a ninja, he knew he had no time to waste; he had to profess his feelings to Anko. Summoning Jutsu, there was a puff of smoke, and a dog was there. Yes, Kakashi, I need you to find Anko. yes. A few minutes later he saw Anko in the forest of death training. Anko, umm, I have to tell you something. Did you finally realize that we should go to the Dango place every week? No, it is something more important. When our friendship started, you said that I need to figure out what I want before starting to date any women. And I have figured out that I want to build the Hatake clan and be a father. I decided that about 3 months ago. Since then I have become more attracted to you in ways that are more than friends. You are my best friend, and I truly believe you have a good heart, and you are beautiful. I want to see if you wanted to go out on a date this Sunday. Anko was very happy because most women found the aloof bad boy Kakashi appealing and attractive. But the more she got to know him, the more she wished that he would be ready for dating. It took you long enough, jeez. I thought my hair was going to turn gray before you asked me out. Now I will tell you that if you cheat on me or lead me on, then may God save you from the literal mutilation of your balls that will happen. Do we understand each other? A shiver went down Kakshi’s spine about all the jokes that would surely happen about who wears the pants between the two of them. Ma Ma, I will pick you up at 6. We will go to this event where they burn Dango as a religious ceremony. Anko pulled out her kunai to kill anyone who would burn dango, but the famous copy ninja was not all talk and had already disappeared. To threaten Dango and then leave he is surely going to be interesting.

Ringgggggg The ninja academy in Konoha had just ended. Man, I know that I thought that following my classmates to find someone else who wanted to leave was going to be easy, but it is so hard. Sakura and Ino go back and forth about who would have ended up with Sasuke. When I follow Kiba and Shino, Kiba just talks the whole time; the only one that was odd was following Shika and Choji because it always seemed like he lost them. and he never says anything about the letter. The only ones that were odd was Choji, Shika, and Choji, because it always seemed like he lost them. Today he had Shikamaru and Choji again. It looks like they are taking the same route again towards Shikamaru’s house. Wait, where did they go? Naruto started to freak out. Not again; I will not lose them again. Naruto started to run through the trees until a trap went off and he was left hanging in the air. Naruto You following us every 3 days is so troublesome; you will tell us why you are following us. I am following you guys because you look so cool. Lies are so troublesome. Tell me the truth, Naruto. Shikamaru had not really cared enough to think about Naruto’s actions, but he thought he knew what was going on. Naruto was an orphan who was bullied and did not know why and was stalking classmates for a reason rather than going up to talk to them, which is what he usually did. So the only thing that would make him secretive would be if Naruto wanted to do something that he should not, and that is the reason why he is lying. Naruto Wait, Shikamaru brought out a piece of paper, and he wrote on it, Uchiha? Naruto’s eyes bulged out of his head because he was surprised that Shikamaru knew what he was thinking about. Follow us to our house, but do not talk about what is on that piece of paper. We only talk about school, okay? Yes, Shikamaru, Naruto then saw the piece of paper that Shikamaru showed Naruto, and Shikamaru burned the piece of paper. Hi father, we are home. I have something troublesome to talk to you about. What is it, Shikamaru? Well, Naruto has told me that he wanted to talk about the Uchiha letter, and it seems like he wants to leave. What should we do? Shikaku thought about this situation, so he was the son of the 4th Hokage, which was troublesome. He thought about the fact that the 9-tailed demon was sealed inside of Naruto. Naruto also was the son of the 4th Hokage. Naruto was beaten a lot growing up and treated like a non-human entity, so he could understand why he wanted to leave. But Naruto did not know that he was the 9-tails host or that Minato was his father. This made stealing him a much bigger crime than them leaving. If another village tried to steal, Naruto Konoha would go to war with them. If Naruto did go with them, who would tell him about his true heritage and his furry friend? And when would be the best time to do that? He could tell him before they left. But the kid was always the talkative type, so I highly doubt he would keep that to himself. The kid could use the shadow clone jutsu because of his immense chakra reserves due to the fox. The other thing is that he respected Minato greatly, and he felt like he let down Naruto by not standing up more in the council and doing more for the 4th Hokage's son. Shikamaru bring Naruto in. Yes, father. Naruto saw Shikamaru walk out and come inside Naruto. Hi Naruto, please sit down on this chair. Yes sir, Naruto, can you keep secrets? I have never kept a secret before. Okay, do you think that you could? Maybe, but it is hard keeping secrets from G Chan. Yes, I am sure it is, but if you had a secret that you were going to do something that could involve a lot of people, would you keep it even from your G Chan? Yes, I will never go back on my promises, sir. Okay, good. Well, you will have to promise me that you will never tell anyone what I am about to tell you; it impacts many people. Yes sir, I promise. The Nara, Akimichi, Aburame, and Yamanka clans are leaving the village to go to the Hidden Mist Village because that is where Itachi is. And it seems like you want to come with us? Yes, please. I promise not to tell anyone. Okay, well, we will be leaving about 6 months from now. There is a jutsu that I will show you that you need to practice for when we leave the village, but you must not do it in front of other people or tell anyone about it. Yes sir, I promise. Okay, these are the hand signs; then say Shadow Clone Jutsu." Naruto did that, and then 20 Narutos came out of the puff of smoke. Shakaku was stunned by the amount because he could not make this kid a chakra monster. That is a good job. These clones are very useful; they are more sturdy than normal clones, and the user gets their memories. Get their memories; what do you mean? After they dispelled, do you remember getting memories from different angles in the room? Yes, I do well; that is the point that was your clone's memories. Wow, thank you for teaching me the jutsu. Yes, of course, Shikamaru I need you to work with Naruto about keeping secrets even though it is troublesome. Yes, father, so troublesome. Goodnight, Naruto, but remember: do not tell anyone about what we talked about. Goodnight! Wow, I get to see this really cool Itachi guy in 6 months. He seems so cool; I want to be just like him. I will help him build his world and be the leader of Mizu!!

That Sunday there was a gray-haired man at Anko’s door. Knock knock Hi Anko, It is Kakashi. Okay, wait one second; I am going to come out. When Anko walked out her door, she came out in an elegant blue dress but was more Anko’s style, which means that the dress was very low-cut to show cleavage and had no material on her back until it reached her backside. Ha ha ha, Kakashi, did you get hit by a tomato? I did not know that your face could reach such a shade of red. Um, well, you look very beautiful tonight. Thank you, Kakashi; you can lead the way. Kakashi brought out his book and started to walk to the fancy restaurant he had gotten reservations for. Whoa, whoa, let me get one thing out of the way here, Kakashi. You can read your book during other times than our date, but right now close it or I will leave. And then Anko leaned into his ear and said, And if you are a good boy, I will do things that make that book look like it is rated PG. Kakashi almost died while walking when he heard that because his book was the extreme non-censored version, he literally just could not move for 15 seconds. I am sorry; my system just had to reboot; after that, my inner pervert was on death's door from shock and blood loss. It is okay; remember that no book you can lead the way. They got inside the restaurant, and it had great dark lighting with candles lighting the room with romantic music playing. Wow, not a bad choice, Kakashi. They went through dinner and talked the way that they normally did because they had been friends for so long. On the way back, Kakashi pulled out a box. Hey Anko, I got a first date gift for you. He then pulled out a dango stick and handed it to Anko. Wow, and Dango stick, thank you so much, Kakashi. I guess your lazy ass can try sometimes; that is good to know. Ma Ma the walk was so tiring, honestly. Aww, well, I think I have something that can solve that for you. Then they went inside Anko’s apartment and had some Lemon scene time.

End of chapter 6, things are going to heat up over the next few chapters in the land of water.

Chapter 7: Chapter 7 Yagura strikes

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. I also do not own Yagura’s water mirror. Like, why is that mirror so ridiculously OP? Seriously, if everyone in the mist village had that mirror, they would literally run the world.

Kakashi and Anko pairing

Ch7

In the mist village, the one year that passed was extremely productive. The rebels now had 2 two-man squads, which were extremely tough to beat. Ao and Itatchi still sliced down the enemy numbers at nighttime, and Kisame and Zabuza were taking 10 high-level ninjas with them and slowly gaining territory for the rebels in the process, which allowed them to have more farmland, which made the economy of the rebels to be on solid enough footing to get by. Sasuke had learned 3 different fire ninjutsu that were all C rank, but he mastered his breathing, so they were all very impressive. Mei Terumi had been teaching Itatchi about the economics of a village and leadership duties to try to groom him for the position. Itachi You are always so focused, pretty boy, but you never go out with a lady. I understand that you think I am good-looking, but you say that to every other guy, so why would I take you seriously? You should take me seriously because not every man is able to date a high-level Kunoichi like me. They can’t handle the other person being better than him. Men run off ego, and a strong woman has disadvantages because of this. So then why me? You are very strong; you are growing into a handsome young man, and I know below all of that quiet exterior you have a good heart. Okay, quiet boy, How about this: at 8 pm tonight we go out to dinner, Itachi? Okay, I have to go do border patrol rounds. Hai I will see you at 8pm my handsome man. Ao I need you to manage things for today.Yes, Mei Sama. I will manage the things you need. DID YOU SAY THAT A WOMAN COULD NOT MANAGE THINGS AO? Nooo, Mei-sama. I did not. Good, I hope you remember that before saying something like that, I can melt someone's balls off literally. Ao felt a shiver go down his spine. Yes, Mei, sama i will do the things that you could do as well. Good boy. See you later!! Mei was walking home to go see Mindy so she could spend time with her before she got ready for her date. Mindy I knew you would be at the lake. Oh hi, Sasuke, what are you doing at the lake with Mindy today? I am just relaxing after training. It is a little peaceful. Well, I and your handsome brother are going out on a date tonight; you should come shopping with us. You asked him out, didn’t you? Yes, strong kunoichi like me take what they want! Well, I guess I will come with you. Where are you going? We are going dress shopping, and then I have to go get my hair done as well. Sister, that sounds boring. Sasuke, we can play shogi while we wait. I do not want to play that game with you because you always win, Mindy. How about this: Sasuke, we can play Ninja while Mei gets her hair done and shogi while she looks for the dress. Ooo, Sasuke, that is a good deal; getting my hair done will take much less time than shopping for a dress. I will take your deal, Mindy. Okay, Sasuke, but just remember that we play Shogi for the whole time, no matter how many games it takes. Oh, you poor Sasuke. You don’t know that it will take my big sister way longer to shop for a dress than you realize, and the time for her hair getting done is charged by the hour, and she will only pay for an hour. Hey Mindy, why do you have that grin on your face? Oh,, sometimes Sasuke, when you get a good deal, it just makes you so happy. Hey Mindy, I think I am going to start at this shop, okay? Yeah, Sasuke Let's set up our game. Yeah, sure, I will show you the mind of the great Uchiha clan. Why did you make that move that makes this so much easier? Uhggggg why did I not think of that? It probably was those Uchiha brain cells. Hey, that is not nice. I will show you. How has your sister tried on 3 dresses already and not chosen one? Is this your first time shopping with a girl, Sasuke? Yes, it is. What is it like shopping with Itachi? He walks into a store and sees what he likes and buys 7 of them and wears the same outfit every day of the week. It probably takes about 5 minutes. I am sure Mei can not take much longer than that, right? You may win this Shogi game, but I definitely won that deal we made. Ha ha ha, Oh poor Sasuke, When a girl says she is going to go shopping, you always time the amount of time they are going to spend there by 3. And my sister tries out an average of 10 dresses at a store, and we have 6 stores she will go to. And she will go to each and every one just to make sure that it is the best one, which means she will try on 60 dresses today. This is going to take at least 2 hours, or maybe 3, if she finds a few dresses that look great on her and she has to choose the best one. That means that we will have 2-3 hours playing shogi. Oh great Uchiha. I hope you enjoy your 1 hour of ninja Ha ha ha. Well, look at that! Who knew that an Uchiha’s face could match his eyes? So you're saying that I have to play Shogi with you for the next 2-3 hours?!!?? Yeah, it will be great for me to test out some of my new strategies. I can’t believe I got myself into this. Yeah, I know, and I am going to enjoy spending time with my precious Uchia so much. HA HA HA. Well, that was some quick shopping, wasn’t it? Mei, Sama, do you call 2 and a half hours quick? OOOOHHH, time flies when you are having fun, Sasuke. Mindy, how did your shogi game go? We played 10 games. The most he lasted was 25 minutes once. I really got to try out some crazy ideas just to see if they would work. Ohh yeah, and I had the pleasure of losing over and over and over. HA HA HA That is a lesson to never take a bet with me. Oh great Uchiha. Well, that all ends now. We will play Ninja now. Let's have some fun!!!!! Oh yeah, I have been looking forward to this Sasuke. Water Clone Jutsu. Well, this is technically me, so it can come with you while I look at this pretty lake that is in this area. See you later, oh great Uchiha!!!! You kids have fun. I will be getting my hair done for the next hour. Hmph, I guess you can play Ninja with your water clone. I am never making a bet with you again, Mindy. Staring into this lake is so nice while my clone plays with Sasuke. Hey!!! Leave me alone, GASP. Mindy could only see the gray hair falling above her as she had her mouth closed. Mindy had her head turned around, and she saw a young man with purple eyes with green eyes and a vertical scar below his left eye. Yes, child, it is me. Yagura, the 4th Mizukage, and you will make great bait. Mei Terumi was finishing getting her hair done when she sensed a familiar presence, and she felt true fear coursing down her spine. It is Yagura. I must protect the rebel civilians. Mei Terumi made it in a minute to Yagura’s location, but she saw Mindy beaten and unconscious. Yagura, what are you doing here!! I’m sure that you thought you could bide your time and attack me with Zabuza, Kisame, Itachi, and yourself, which would attack me and defeat me. How naive! Without you around, they will lose their leader, and I will defeat all 3 of them with my 8 best ANBU. Oh yes, and Zabuza, Kisame, and Itachi will be very busy with the 100 Chunin I sent to where they were at. Today Mei Turmi, you die. Yagura was sprinting at Mei Terumi. Yagura is going to use his Bojutsu; I must be defensive. Mei Terumi could only see flashes after 5 seconds. Mei was sent flying into a tree from the combo that Yagura hit her with. I must keep this a long-range battle. Water dragon jutsu. Water style Aqua Mirror Jutsu. The water dragon went back to Mei Terumi and dispersed her jutsu. Wow, I have heard of his Aqua Mirror, but I had no clue that it was this strong. Maybe if I sent acid at the mirror, it would disperse. Yoton yonki jutsu Acidic mud came rushing out of Mei Terumi’s mouth. This acidic attack must be able to break that mirror. Water style Aqua Mirror. Mei Terumi was utterly shocked at the sight of all of her acid mud flying back to her at incredible speed and dispersing her jutsu, Coral Palm Justu. Around Mei she felt extreme restriction, like she was encased in crystal. You were so busy trying to break that mirror of mine that you let me get close.You see, you never would have been Mizukage with me around, and so you gathered the bloodline using scum of the bloodline users. Bloodline users are the reasons for many deaths and sufferings in the history of the Hidden Mist Village. All of our bloody mist history comes from you terrible bloodline users. I don’t know why you guys just do not kill yourselves. If you had any respect for yourself, you would. Hundreds of years from now they will tell the history of the great Mizukage who purified the hidden Mist and led them to glory. Do you want to know what the greatest thing about history is? The winners write it, and in 100 years nobody will even know that the word bloodline ever existed. I will beat you to death with my Bojustu nice and slow so I can enjoy watching the hope for bloodlines die. Mei Terumi was getting hit in the head over and over by the Mizukage, and she could feel her completely losing her strength. I might die. What will happen to the rebels?? I have prepared you, Itachi, to be our next leader. I sadly will never be able to show the love that has grown in my heart for you, but please watch over Mindy and lead the rebels to their revolution. Sasuke saw MIndy’s water clone disperse, and he knew something was wrong. A few minutes later Sasuke saw a mist envelop the area, and he knew something was wrong. He ran into the mist and saw Mei and Mindy unconscious and a man with purple eyes trying to kill them. I will not let you kill Mei and Mindy; the Mist is now my home. Sharingan!!! A child of the Uchiha clan, I am so glad that I will be able to kill three bloodline users in one day. Sasuke knew that Itachi wanted him to only use his Susanoo in life-or-death situations, so he did what his brother said and focused himself to imagine a ribcage surrounding him. Yagura saw an incomplete purple ribcage come up around Sasuke, and his strike to Sasuke bounced off the ribcage. Sasuke grabbed Mei and Mindy and ran away as fast as he could. Yagura Sama We must leave the 100 Chunin that we sent to distract the rebel forces. They have died; we must leave. I have accomplished what I wanted to do. The rebels have lost their leader, and they will no longer be a threat. We can head back. Yes, Yagura Sama.Sasuke was heading to the medical area with his Susanoo still up so that he could run as fast as possible. Why did I not hesitate when I saw Mei on the ground? Why did I immediately go save her and Mindy? I know that I liked this town, but the sleepless nights and the non-stop flashbacks to the massacre should make me know that death is inevitable. If all the people are going to die anyway, then why did I save Mei and Mindy? I mean, Mei and Mindy spend time with me, and Mei is always flirting with my brother, but why? Do I view this place as my home? Did I really mean what I said? This place has treated me and my brother so well, but I never realized how much I viewed this place as home now. I will make it to the medical tent and protect my home no matter how much my body hurts from the Susanoo. I have Mei Sama and Mindy. HELP!! Here, please take them. We need to go to the medical area right now. I will take you as well. Sasuke it looks like you have mild chakra exhaustion, yes, miss. Ao Sama, Mei Sama is in the hospital. Let us in. I don’t care who is in there with Mei, but we have to tell her something urgent. The door of the office Ao was preparing to leave slammed open, and Kisame, Zabuza, and Itachi walked inside. There were 100 Chunin ninjas sent to our location. After capturing them, Itatchi put one under a genjutsu, and they told us that Yagura was distracting us so he could kill Mei. Where is she? She is in the hospital. I was just now heading over there. Let's go together. How is Mei Sama? She was beaten up badly, but right now she is in a coma. Mindy is just unconscious and just needs sleep. Sasuke has light chakra exhaustion, and he is fine. So what happened? Well, Sasuke said that he saw some smoke, and the water clone of Mindy exploded. So he went to smoke to find out what happened. He said that he saw Mei-sama encased in rock getting beaten by Yagura with Mindy on a tree unconscious. So then he distracted him with something that Itatchi taught him and ran away as fast as possible with Mei and Mindy. So, will you be the leader while Mei-sama is unconscious? No Kisame Itachi is supposed to be the leader if Mei was ever unable to be the leader. Really, that is surprising. Itachi, what will you do? We are vulnerable without Mei, and how easily Yagura infiltrated our camp is an issue. I have grown to think of the mist as my home. Seeing you guys fight for such a good cause and to have someone as good of a person as Mei to be in a state like this shows me we only have one option. We must act before they do and land a fatal blow on them. Ao, Kisame, and Zabuza we are going to kill Yagura. We are going to muster all of the strength this village gives us to create a better future. But we are not strong enough. He will have 8 Anbu. With him at least. You do not know that there is another level of the Sharingan that will greatly increase my power. I have spent the last year training my eyes to their maximum level of strength with my Mangekyo Sharingan. But you can reach another level, which is called the Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan. The only other Uchiha to have those eyes was Madara Uchiha. I need the best surgeon we have to swap me and Sasuke's eyes; then I will have the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan. And then I will show Yagura the pain he so easily forces onto others. We will take over the mist village for Mei!!!

Alright, the next chapter is going to be exciting: some serious fight scenes and some EMS coolness.

Chapter 8: Chapter 8 Itachi the new Mizukage

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

 

I also do not own how epic Itachi is.

Ch 8

Itachi opened up his eyes, and he felt pain go away. Itachi knew that living in the hidden mist meant that he always had to be on his A game. Being a part of the rebel forces forced him to train with as much vigor as he did in Konoha. He knew that he would get Sasuke's eyes within a year or two of being in the village, so he wanted to make sure that he mastered his eyes. The thing that grew the most was his Susanoo. It started off as just a few pieces of a rib cage, but as he grew in control, something amazing happened. He saw that mere rib cage over a whole year of training turn into a full-bodied Susanoo that had a horn sticking out of it with a sword and a shield. He made a shadow clone for training with it, and he was amazed at how the shield could reflect anything that was used to attack him. He was also amazed when he saw one enemy shinobi in a field with nobody around. What amazed him so much was when he activated his Susanoo and he struck the enemy with his sword. It went through the enemy, and it sealed the enemy away. Itatchi was really intrigued when he saw the yasaka beads that he could use to throw at people like shuriken, which was an extremely powerful thing. He also realized that he could put people in a genjutsu that made him basically a god for 24 hours, which was extremely useful. All of this experimenting with the limits of the Susanoo and other abilities drained Itachi, and he started to feel a sickness attacking his body. When Itachi felt the sickness go away, he felt relieved. Itachi, you are awake. I am glad the surgery went well. How is Sasuke? Sasuke is good; he is still asleep. That is good. Ao, can you please call in Zabuza and Kisame? Here I have something I need to do. Yes, Itachi, I will go grab them. I am sad to see you well; my sharks were really looking forward to seeing how an Uchiha tasted. Yes, Kisame, well, we have important things to talk about. I need to test my strength today sparring you and Zabuza. I need you to come at me with all of your strength. I thought I was coming with you to try to kill Yagura as well? You are going to come with me, but I will only use you to watch the fight with your Byakugan, and if we lose, I need you to go back to the village and escape with the rest of the rebels. Yes, sir. Itachi, Kisame, and Zabuza were standing a few feet apart from each other. A little ways away was Ao watching the fight through his byakugan. I know Itachi's strong, but taking on two swordsmen at once, this guy must be crazy; there is no way he will be able to defeat them. Kisame and Zabuza filled up the area with the hidden mist jutsu, which did not cause any problems for Ao seeing the fight because of his Byakugan. Itatchi was on the defensive with the two swordsmen attacking him, but he was showing great nimbleness. I was waiting for that; those two know better than to look into his eyes, but his genjutsu skills are impressive. It is like Kisame and Zabuza are fighting themselves. Kisame breaks out first of the genjutsu and used water bullets to attack Itachi, which he blocked with a minimally formed Susanoo. Ao saw Kisame running to Itachi and tried to hit his Susanoo with his sword, but he was repelled back. What????? I cannot believe that the sword that is supposed to absorb chakra got repelled back. It is almost like the refractive forces of Itatchi’s Susanoo are stronger than the chakra-absorbing abilities of Kisamae’s sword. Ao saw Kisame use his water jutsu that makes a lake-sized water mass, and then Zabuza broke out of his genjutsu. They both went through hand signs, and an extremely huge water prison that was meant to trap the fighters in a water-filled area got filled by sharks that were heading right for the submerged Itatchi. What will you do now, Itachi? This ninjutsu is amazing from Kisame. Then Ao saw something mind-blowing: he saw an orange humanoid figure fly out of the water prison with wings. It was 10 times bigger than Itachi with an orange shuriken on its head. On the head was what looked like hair sticking up with a forehead plate holding it all up. He also has shoulder plates with a very painful outfit on it. By far the most notable thing was the two weapons. There was an absolutely huge shield with an extremely long, narrow sword in the other hand. With 5 beads hanging off Itatchi’s neck. Itachi then used his massive sword to cut Kisame's huge water prison in half, causing the air to move around him, which caused every tree in the area to move. Then Itatchi waved his sword and cut all the trees in the area in half. Ao was absolutely stunned, as he had never seen any kind of power like that in person. I cannot believe that a 15-year-old has this much power. Kisame and Zabuza both forfeited and then walked toward Itachi. I thought that you were all talk with the Madara Uchiha talk, but that was an absolutely insane amount of power. Well, Kisame, we need power to win this war, and I will do what it takes to build the dream world in the Mist. Let's go to the infirmary, and we will attack Yagura in 3 days. Sasuke It is nice to see you are doing better. I asked to be next to you so we could talk. What do you want to talk about, Big Brother? Well, how are you doing after what happened with Mei? I am doing better. I actually wanted to ask you something: What gives people strength? Strength comes from wanting to protect something you care about. I am guessing that you got strength from people that you care about in the village, and that is how you saved Mindy and Mei? Yeah, I realized that I have grown to love this village, which makes me sad because the last time I loved something like this, they all died. Sadly, more people you care about will die. But the impact that they leave on you will always be in your heart. You will gain strength and understanding through those people who are gone. but make sure you enjoy each moment to fully take in the present and the things that are so valuable. Try to appreciate each moment of something that gives you strength. That could be as simple as showing people that you care about them through your actions so that the things that give you strength feel appreciated. It is that reciprocal balance that leads to happiness. Does that make sense, Sasuke? Yes, it does, big brother; you are so cool. Itatchi chuckled, and a small smile passed his face. Itachi thought to himself, Mom, I promise I will guide Sasuke the best I can. I am so glad he came with me because he gives me so much strength. Also, Sasuke, we did the eye transplant. So you now have EMS, which will greatly increase your power when you grow up. But again, I need you to make sure that you tell nobody about them. Yes, big brother, I will do it. I overheard that you have been making a lot of noise losing to Mindy each time she plays you in shogi. Yeah, she said that since I am not able to move around, I should be training my puny mind. Wow, the puny-minded Uchiha might become your nickname if you do not start winning. Itachi saw the fear set into Sasuke’s eyes, and he knew that would be a nickname to stick, and he needed to avoid that at all costs.

Itachi woke up the next morning feeling a lot better. He rolled over and saw Sasuke asleep, and he thought it would be a good idea to check up on Mei. Itachi walked over to where Mei was and saw her still asleep from her coma. Itatchi walked over and put his hand on her cheek and kissed her forehead while she was asleep. I really did never tell her how much I respect her and how I care for the strong woman she is. I am looking forward to that date. Don’t you worry; I will end this war in 2 days, and you will wake up to a different land of water. Later that day, Ao, Kisame, and Zabuza came to Itachi’s office. Ao since you used to be a part of the Mizukage's ANBU, when is the best time to try to attack him? He spends a lot of his day in his office, but I would say that during the time when he walks around the surrounding forest to clear his head is ideal. During that timeframe he will have only 5 ANBU with him. That sounds like the perfect time for me; let's go with that. Kisame and Zabuza, you will attack the 5 ANBU, and I will fight Yagura one on one for Mizu. Never forget what we do this for. This is for hope in the world and peace in the souls of the land of Water. A day after that, they were heading out to find Yagura in the forest. Alright, we are at the spot. I am going to go to a spot where I can watch the fight and not be seen. I will see you later. Look at that; he is leaving his office right now. Alright, this is when we fight for Mizu. Itachi, Zabuza, and Kisame dropped to the ground right in front of the path that Yagura was walking. Trust me, I could sense you weaklings from far away. How is Mei doing after our little reconnection? I am sure she told you about how much she missed me. I am sad, though, because you guys should know that I am completely out of your class. It is this simple: all I have to do is use my mirror against Zabuza and Kisame, and I nullify your ninjutsu. And all I have to do is not look into your sparkly red eyes, you bloodline freak. Kisame, Zabuza I count 5 ANBU. go, Yes sir. A 15 year old child thinks that he can beat a Kage by himself. I did not know you were this stupid. Itatchi rushed at Yagura with his tonto in hand. Yagura brought out his boujustu and was winning the exchange between the two of them, which ended with Itatchi flying into a tree. Itachi then threw shuriken at the Kage and said, Fire style Phoenix Flower Jutsu and multiple fireballs went past Yagura, who was rushing toward Itachi. All I have to do is touch you. Once Yagura touched Itachi, he turned into crows and ended up a few feet away. Neat little trick there, but that is nothing to me, Uchiha. Water style water dragon jutsu, Itatchi defended with a wide-ranging fire style jutsu. phoenix sage fire nail crimson Justu, then one of Itatchi’s best ninjutsu with fire with shuriken in them, got fired out to Yagura water style water mirror justu. The fire jutsu dispersed, and Yagura was staring at Itachi, trying to intimidate the Uchiha. All right, Uchiha, I am going to take it up a notch. Yagura then went into his partial jinchuriki state and started running at Itachi at amazing speed but was repelled back by some force. Yagura saw a huge orange humanoid statue getting in the air. Well, if it is strong enough to repel me in this state, then I must go all out. Itachi saw Yagura transform into his full jinjuriki state as the Isobu, which is the 3 tails that are inside him. You see, Itachi, your size does not scare me. I am the strongest in the mist. Itachi's Yasaka beads, which landed on the jinchuriki, which hurt him. That was an impressive ninjutsu, Itachi, but I must end this now. Forming in the jinchuriki’s mouth was widely considered the strongest ninjutsu in the ninja world, which is the tailed beast bomb that was fired at Itachi, who put out his shield and negated the jutsu. Yagura, in his whole life, whenever he was in a situation with a tough opponent, he would use his tailed beast bomb and end their lives. It was super easy for him to be the strongest in the mist because of this weapon. And to now see something that reflected his beast ball with no effort. Put him in an absolutely stunned state. Then he made a mistake. He looked up at the Susanoo in awe and looked directly into Itachi’s eyes.

Yagura opened his eyes to see himself on a cross in a very odd world, and then he saw Itachi appear right in front of him. Itatchi was staring at him. As though something was wrong, and then Itachi said, You have been put under a genjutsu. Itachi could tell that it was a strong genjutsu from an Uchiha, but because of his EMS, it was no issue breaking it. After that, I was so weak to be put under this genjutsu. Yagura's eyes were shocked as he realized that he had been under a genjutsu this whole time. Thank you for breaking me out of that. I am saddened by all of the deaths and pain I have brought to my nation. I will go down in the history of the Hidden Mist as the worst Mizukage of all time. I was so weak to be put under this genjutsu. Yes, you have brought great pain, but you can spend the rest of your time trying to fix it. I can not be the leader of Mizu any longer. I have already brought enough disgrace to my village. This whole time, the bloodline purges have all been done to weaken Mizu. I also had to not choose the best, most qualified people for positions. I have some jonin-level ninja as genin. Worst of all, something that is only known by the Kages of Mizu is that each swordsman has a summoning scroll, which, as you know, 5 of them are lost. Well, each Mizukage has passed down to the next Mizukage a backup summoning scroll in case they get stolen by the enemy or the swordsman dies. The genjutsu I got put under did not let me resummon those swords, which means that Mizu has been without 5 swordsmen for years. The illusion disappeared, and Itatchi walked up to Yagura, and Yagura handed the 5 scrolls to Itatchi. Please take these scrolls and lead the 7 swordsmen of the mist back to glory.Yes, I will do that. I actually know a way that you can still serve the nation you love while not being in the country. What is it? I want you to become my spymaster, and specifically, I want you to try to look for someone named Madra. Then Itachi just had a moment of realization: if that really was Madara Uchiha, I would not have been able to break the genjutsu put on Yagura. Because Madara Uchiha had EMS too and could cast stronger genjutsu than me. I was only able to break him out of it because my eyes are more developed. That man is an imposter. Actually, I just realized the man that put you under a genjutsu calls himself Madra, but he is not. He is either Madara’s son or some other Uchiha using Madara’s name to inflict fear. Also, be very careful; there is a nonhuman being that works for Madra that can come out of any object in space that is white and green, and be on your guard if you see a being like that. Yes, I will do my best to get information on him. Okay, sounds good. Your codename will be 3. And even though you may object, I will tell the truth to this nation about you being under a genjutsu because I will not build a nation on the foundation of lies. Itachi!!!! We will help you finish off Yagura. Stop! That man was under a genjutsu for years; he is not the murderer we all think he is. I am very sorry for forcing each of you to turn on our country. Yagura bowed down and put his head in the dirt to symbolize him asking for forgiveness for what he did. We forgive you, Yagura. What will happen now? I will no longer fight against people with bloodline limits and will apologize publicly for everything I have done. I will also pass the Mizukage hat to Itachi while becoming a spy for this country. The war is over; wow, that is great news, right, Kisame? Yeah, it is, but my sword will miss all of the chakra. A day after that, everyone was gathered in a crowd that was a part of Mizu that was fighting giants, the bloodlines. Yagura!! Yagura!! Yagura! Our great Mizukage!!!. I thank you for those cheers, but today is a start of something new. I was in a battle with a rebel who undid a genjutsu that I was under. This genjutsu was put on me to weaken the Land of Water. They did this by making me not give the rank of jonnin or ANBU to people who were capable of those levels but much weaker. It had me not summon the 5 swords of the mist that have been lost for years. And it made me persecute people with bloodline limits. This persecution has led to a nationwide discrimination against people with bloodline limits, which we must grow from. Those rebels could have just left Mizu, but they stayed, and they fought because they love this country. We must all work on acceptance of these people. I am calling off the bloodline limit purges and reforming the old clans of the mist. If you have any doubts about this, then ask yourself what Mizukage would not use 5 swords from the famous 7 swordsmen of the mist if they were not under a genjutsu to make Mizu less strong. I am so sorry for all of the wrongdoings I have done as a Mizukage, and as of today I am naming Itachi Uchiha as the 5th Mizukage of the land of water. He is the one who reversed my genjutsu and has been with the rebel forces for a year. There was a mix of shock and cheers for Itatchi because everyone knew about the letter he wrote to the world, so he already had respect. Itatchi was amazed; he never would've thought that he would be a Kage of a country, but he knew that he had to make his mark on Mizu. He then thought about how he wanted to build a world where Shisu would be able to live a happy life in. Thank you. I will lead the Hidden Mist Village to heights it has never seen before. And I will never deceive you or not tell you the truth in any way. We live in a very hard world with many sad realities, and no matter how bad a situation is, I will also tell you the truth. The time of deception in the hidden villages is over!!!

When Itachi, Zabuza, Ao, and Kisame made it back to the rebel base, a party started throughout the whole city because the war was over. Itatchi made it into Mei’s hospital room to find a tired but awake Mei Terumi. Well, I guess I know what all of this noise is about: Itachi, the 5th Mizukage. What a great sight. Yes, we won. I defeated Yagura, and he renounced his Mizukage hat and is no longer making the bloodline purges active. And we also have the scrolls for the 5 missing swords of the mist. Wow, that is amazing news! Mei started crying about all of the lives she lost fighting the war. It just makes me so sad that we had so many people die that I cared about to make this outcome possible. Itachi put his hand on Mei’s shoulder to comfort her. Thank you, Itachi. Thank you very much. I'm guessing we will not have our first date until you are less busy. Yes, that sounds good to me. Mei. Big Brother, are you in here? Yes, Sasuke. No way they were not kidding; they made you the Mizukage. Does that mean you can order all of the Paki you want? Wow, sounds like such a good job. Hey nurse, my brother is the Mizukage. Isn't that so cool!! Wait, hey, Mindy, I see you guess what my brother is, the new Mizukage. The Uchihas are sooooooo cool. Yeah, you have been privileged to be friends with the younger brother of the Mizukage. Oh geez, I really thought that nickname Itatchi told me about would stick; now he will not even care.

A few days after that, Itatchi had a meeting with all of his most trusted people in Wave, which were Ao, Kisame, Zabuza, and Mei. Alright, today we will be talking about how we are going to restructure things. Mei Terumi You will be the Jonnin commander, and I want you to come up with a way to test that each person is at the rank they should be and move people around as you see fit. You will report to me weekly about what changes are happening. Ao you will lead the ANBU forces, and you will meet with me weekly at least as well. But we are changing our policy. If we can bring a body home from an ANBU mission, we do it. Are we understood? Yes, leader Sama. Also, the people in ANBU may tell their families and friends that they are in ANBU. Yes, leader Sama. Kisame You will be given the rank of Jonnin and the role of head of the training of the next 5 ninja swordsmen. This will take a while to find the right people, but I want you to prepare a system for training. And when the 5 swordsmen start to go on missions as part of their training, you will take 3 of them with you. Zabuza, you will be given the rank of Jonnin. I am impressed by how much you improved Haku while traveling around. I think you have a hidden talent for seeing how other people can best grow. So you will be a special advisor for the students in the school and have the ability to tell them in what areas they will grow. You will also be handling a lot of A-class missions with other ninjas around you for this next year. Also, when Kisame deems the 5 ninja swordsmen ready, you will take the other 2 swordsmen with you on missions. Also, I think it would be helpful for both of your growth to try to make sure you and Kisame spar a decent amount so you can make each other better. Yagura will be the head spymaster and deal with gaining information outside of the village. We will also change our school system. I want these kids to be focused on the necessary skills to be a ninja, like tree walking or making clones. Things of that nature are very important. I also want all of these kids to be tested to figure out what their strengths are. For example, Haku is a mid- to long-range ninjutsu specialist. She would need to work on that strength. The way we can do that is by having the kids spend their Friday with a mentor with the exact same strength as them. The reason why is that we lose a lot of ninjas at the Genin stage because they are not developed enough. I mean, I have seen many kunoichi with no skill other than chakra control die early on in their ninja careers because chakra control exercises and learning genjutsu were not things that were taught to them early enough, so they died. But if they had a strength that was focused on a development that they could rely on in a tough situation, then more genin would live. They can work on their weakness as a ninja as they move up more through the ranks. This is why it is so important for you, Mei, to reevaluate each ninja we have so we know each person’s specialty so that we can correctly put them with mentors that fit what they can do. All of our ninjas will get paid D-rank Rank Missions for being a mentor. It will also strengthen the bonds of our Ninjas as a group because more people will have more positive relationships with other Ninjas. Also, one Ninja can take on more than 1 apprentice if needed. The only people that can get out of this are people in clans. If they deem that they do not want to teach an outsider of the clan their clan techniques, then they have the right to do that. But most of the time students with clan-specific techniques will usually get paired with other clan members anyway. Also we will be reinstating all the clans of the mist that are alive; that includes the Hozuki clan, Yuki clan, the fuma clan, the Hoshigaki clan, the Karatachi clan, the Momochi clan, the uzumaki clan, and the terumi clan. And I am making a Uchiha clan as well. Now we will have a meeting every 2 weeks to talk about issues. If all people in the room agree on an issue, you can overrule my authority. But you will not have the ability to remove me as a Kage.We will meet every 2 weeks and make sure the citizens are informed about what we talk about. We will also have to spend the next year really focusing on negative sentiment. We used to be at war with each other; there is a lot of hidden tension between all of us. it will take about a year to implement all of these things the best we can, but we will make The Hidden Mist much stronger because of it.

Well, in the next chapter we will spend time developing the characters that will come from Konoha and some relationship issues in the Hidden Mist.

Chapter 9: Chapter 9 Will Kakashi go to the mist?

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch 9

It had been a whole year and a half since the day that Anko had come into his life. For a year they were just really great friends. And then that friendship blossomed into love. For the last 6 months, Kakashi had felt true love for the first time, and it was really changing him. He found himself not reading his book all of the time while he was out, and he caught himself smiling from time to time. Guy would shout to him about being more youthful, and he could feel it as well. It was like the love he had with Anko allowed him to become happier in his day-to-day. He also found himself spending less time at the stone for the dead shinobi of Konoha, which made him feel better. Him and Anko had become the talk of Konoha within the gossiping circles; they all knew that they were together. The funniest parts were Anko scolding Kakashi for something and chasing down the copy ninja with a kunai, which really livened up Konoha. Hi Kakashi, good morning. Hi Anko, good morning. I actually want to talk to you about something I want to leave. Now Kakashi, who was in love, just felt his heart drop to the floor because he thought that he was about to be broken up with. I want to leave Konoha and go to the Mist to help support Itachi's dream. I actually was thinking this for a while, but then we started to become friends, and now we are a couple. But I really feel like I have been living a life that is not exactly the way I want it. I am sorry to put you in this position because I know you love Konoha, but I really feel like I must leave. I must leave because I know what it is like to be an outsider because I was betrayed by Orichimaru’s lies. And the lies of this village helped cover those things up. I really feel like the way that Itachi wants to build the world is correct. Kakashi was stunned because he had a very strong loyalty to the village of Konoha for a very long time. He used to even have a borderline unhealthy need for the village’s approval after all of his loved ones died and he had nothing else to hold on to. But Kakashi had learned that he did not need to rely on the past to enjoy life. His life goal now was to have a family and be a father and a good husband. And he knew that he had a rare opportunity with Anko to have someone who could possibly give those things to him. But his sensei was the 4th Hokage. How would he feel about him leaving the village? That would be bad; he then realized that he was living in the past and he was no longer the genin that watched his genin team members die. He was different now; his life had changed him into a man who had to make decisions based on the path in life that he wanted to take. But there was one regret that he had to face. And that regret was his sensei’s son. He remembered watching over Kushina, who was Minato’s wife, while she was pregnant. That time frame really helped him heal from being in the ANBU at such a young age. He got to see the love that the Yondaime Hokage had for Kushina each day. And how that child was going to grow up as the pride and joy of Konoha. That child was going to be the prince of Konoha. He was going to grow up with the same attention and respect as a Senju child would. But then when the 9 tails attacked the little prince had to become a jinjuriki for the 9 tails demon fox. He was told when the child was born that he would be an orphan so that nobody would know his lineage. And Kakashi did not protest, did not say anything back, and just said, Yes, Hokage-sama. And in his mind, that excuse of you not being allowed to raise him gave him false comfort. Why should he be mad at himself when he can not do anything? But now he cannot help but think of himself as a failure during that time frame because he did not fight for the son of someone who he viewed as a father figure after his own father passed away. That would make him someone who is supposed to be like a big brother to Naruto, and what has he done for the kid? Absolutely nothing helping out the kid when he was being beaten; as an ANBU, it was his job. If any other kid was being beaten, he would have done the exact same thing because it was his job. He had seen the kid unconscious in a pool of blood. He had seen his apartment broken into and all of his things scattered everywhere. He had seen the child not be able to buy things in the market for himself. He saw the sadness the kid had. The kid was hated for the fox inside him, and nobody knew he was Yondaime's child. The child who was supposed to be the prince of Konoha was treated in ways that were unlike the ways that any child or human being should ever be treated. And he knew that the child just needed someone he could trust, and he should have been that since he was born. Kakashi knew what he needed to do. He needed to protect Naruto for the rest of his life and care for him. Even if Naruto hated him, he had to at least protect him. But if Naruto gave him a chance to be in his life, then he would take it and do a good job at it. If Naruto wanted to, he would take him to the hidden mist village with him and Anko. It would make sense for Naruto to leave because nobody is abused or lied to more than Naruto. But if Naruto knew the truth about Minato, he might stay. Kakashi knew that he needed to tell Naruto about Minato so that Naruto could make a decision with all of the facts.Anko I do want to go to the mist with you because I think we can build a family together. I know that it will be hard to cut the ties that I have in the village, but I will do it to build a future with you. Sadly, there is one thing that I need to do in Konoha. What is that? I must talk to Naruto. He is the biggest failure that I have committed since the 9 tails attack. I know you do not know this, but Naruto is Minato’s son. He is more than just the 9-tailed jinchuriki. Anko was absolutely stunned that the child of a Hokage was treated like a demon. If that is true, then it makes my resolve to leave for a place without lies even stronger. Because if it were not for lies, then the child of Minato would have been treated a lot more differently without the lies. I completely understand why you must go and try to make amends with your sensei’s son. Yeah, you are definitely right, Anko. I love you. I love you too, Kakashi.

Kakashi started to head to Naruto's apartment, but he did not see the child at home, which was surprising since it was nighttime. He then went to where he heard Naruto would go, which was the Hokage mountain. Naruto was sitting on the Hokage mountain thinking about him leaving Konoha and how this Itachi guy seemed so cool. Naruto saw a tall, gray-haired young man appear right in front of him, and he felt himself tense and got ready to try to run away. When people beat him up, usually the shinobi would be much harder to run away from, so he was getting ready to run away from the gray-haired man. I am not going to hurt you; I only want to talk to you. My name is Kakashi Hatake. I am an ANBU, so we met while I was wearing my ANBU mask, Naruto. I sadly have made many mistakes in my life, and you are one of them. I want you to know that I do not expect any special treatment from you, and if you wish to hate me, then I understand. I will be leaving soon, and you must know before I leave. I am going to tell you things that will be very surprising to you. I knew your father and mother very well, and I have a lot of regret not doing this earlier. You Naruto are the 9-tailed Jinjuriki and the son of Minato Namikaze and Kushina Uzumaki. Naruto felt extreme shock; finally now he was understanding why people would hate him if he had something to do with the 9 tails. What is a jinchuriki? A jinchuriki is when a biju is put into a child through a seal so that the biju is restrained and the child becomes very strong and can have special abilities. So all of those times that people called me a demon fox is because I am the demon fox? No, you are not the fox; it is sealed inside you like a kunia in a scroll. Oh, okay, that makes sense. And also I have never heard of those two ninjas in my books. What rank were my parents? Wow, I guess the rumors of Naruto not being the brightest bulb were not wrong. You are sitting on his head. Minato Namikaze was the Yondaime Hokage, and Kushina was a jonin-level ninja who was the jinjuriki before you. Naruto started to have tears streaming down his eyes because he now knew the truth. He had only known hatred from everyone. To go from that to someone who was the son of a kage was the most shocking thing. He knew that his parents were dead, but now at least he would not have to wonder if his parents were alive. He did feel pride in being someone who was the son of a Kage, but it made him hate the people who treated him so poorly even more. Why has nobody told me those things? Because people would try to kill you if they found out because of the war with the land of earth. And Minato was my sensei, and I am sorry that I was not in your life up until now. Even though I am not allowed to adopt you, I can visit you when I am not on missions and pick you up from school sometimes. Naruto was crying even more now because the idea of having someone looking out for him and that someone he could trust that was an adult was something that he had always wanted. I am going to be leaving in 6 months, though, to the mist village. I can not stay here. Who is taking you? I am not allowed to tell it is a secret. I made a promise, and I always keep my promises! Okay, well, what if I told you I am leaving to go to the mist as well? How about this: you do not have to tell me their names, but was it someone from your school? Yes, it is. Okay, that makes sense. I will leave with you to the mist when you leave. I have to go now. I will see you tomorrow if I do not have a mission. Okay, thank you for telling me about my parents. Yes, Naruto, your life will be very different from here on.

Shikaku Nara It is so nice to see you. Kakshi Why did you come over to my house at this troublesome hour? Well, I just wanted to talk about the watery Yondaime's legacy. Shikaku felt a jolt in his spine and realized that he was talking about Naruto and the mist village, which is where he is taking him. Why do you want to talk about the Yondaime's legacy, Kakashi? Well, I am going to start looking after him, and he told me something interesting. And I just wanted to talk to you about me liking water as much as you liking water. Kakashi Hatake wants to leave and go to the mist; he is a very loyal ninja. I do know that him and Anko are together, so I could see a scenario where she would want to leave, and he went with her. Well, this could go two ways. Either he was sent by the Hokage to try to figure out that my clan and other clans are going to the hidden mist village. But he would not have used the word Naruto if he was trying to bait me because he would not have had that conversation with Naruto just to do research to see if I am planning to leave. He would probably pressure my son or a clansman to give him that information, which means that he must be telling the truth. Sure, you can come in and talk about your water taste. Thank you, Shikaku-sama. I am going to be watching over Naruto, and Anko wants to leave to go to the mist, so I will go with them. Naruto did not tell me that you were going to the mist, but he did tell me that he is going with a student. And if he was asking other students about going to the mist, I would have already heard about it, and he would be under watch. And the only person in that room full of 8 year old kids who would be able to read that Naruto would want to leave would be your son, which led me here. So when are you leaving? In 6 months, and it is not just me; the Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi, and Aburame are all leaving. Shikaku could see the stunned look in Kakashi’s eyes. 4 of the great clans of Konoha are leaving all at once? Yes, they are, even though it is troublesome. Okay, just send someone to my house the day before so I can get ready to leave. Actually, since you are here, I wanted to talk about getting Naruto a gift from his father before we leave. And I am sure that the Jonnin commander would know where it is.

Naruto was at the end of his day in school, and he was thinking about his talk yesterday with Kakashi. That one guy with the gray hair really said that I was the son of the Yondaime Hokage of Konoha. I am so furious at people for treating me so badly because my father died for this village. I know that I have the 9 tails inside of me, which is why they beat me growing up. How does that not get outweighed by the fact that I am the son of the Yondaime Hokage? Did he not do enough for this village? I do not want to talk to anyone anymore since I know that it is pointless. Nobody has ever cared about me on a consistent basis before, and nobody ever will. I have been beaten by a lot of drunk people. I am sure that the gray-haired man was just drunk and spilled the truth. He probably will never talk to me again. Nobody in this world is just good or nice just to be nice. I used to think that I would become something great and earn everyone’s trust, but what is the point? My father was the hokage, and his son gets beaten and has to be an orphan. Like, how does that even happen? How would me trying to gain everyone else’s trust and respect work when my father was a hokage, but his son gets beaten up? ringggggg . Class is dismissed; do not forget to continue your shuriken throwing practice. Well, it is time to go home. The worst part about leaving class is watching all of the other kids get to meet their parents after school. Yeah, that gray-haired man will not be here either. It is best not to get my hopes up.Naruto was walking out of the gate of the school into the street when he heard, Hi, Naruto. Naruto turned and saw the gray-haired man he saw the other day. Hi Kakashi, What are you doing here? I told you when I am not working that I will pick you up from the academy. How was your day? Naruto felt something tighten in his chest, and then he felt watery eyes and looked away; it was good; he didn’t really remember what they talked about today. Naruto felt a brief warmth on his shoulder, and it was Kakashi who had his hand on his shoulder and said, You will never have to walk home again alone while I am not on missions because you are my little brother. Naruto hugged Kakashi while crying and then felt himself being picked up by the gray-haired man. Ma Ma , I am going to take you to my house so you can meet Anko. Anko, we are home! Hi, you must be Naruto. It is so nice to meet you. Come on in; I will make some tea, and we can talk. Oooo, I have a question: What was my dad like? Well, your dad was very protective and gentle with people he cared about. He also would be very strict as a sensei. I got scolded by your father so many times. And these types of stories would go on for the rest of the day. Naruto felt his anger that he was feeling that day get replaced by a foreign feeling that can only be described as home. A place that he could go to talk about his stress and be protected from others. It was a very foreign idea to him, but he actually felt like his smiles through story after story became more and more real.

Next chapter we are going to be in the mist village!!!

Chapter 10: Chapter 10 trouble in the MIst

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre; they will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be two Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things; this will be a completely different ninja village.

I will be updating at least one chapter every Sunday. If I finish more than one, then I will update all of them on Sunday.

Only one story at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch10
(6-month time skip)
Itachi, wake up! You said that you would take training with you today. Yes, we can go training after I finish work today. Heyyy, no fair; you said the same thing yesterday. I understand.
Sasuke but running a village is not easy, and I am also meeting Mei for lunch. Now make sure you focus at the academy today. Yess big brother. Itatchi walked out of the house and could feel all eyes were on him. Everyone stared at him as he walked by because he had become the hero of the Mist. The Mist had a feeling of hope and growth that you could feel in the air. Itatchi felt so proud that he was building a village that Shishui would have enjoyed. He walked to the Mizukage tower, where he was greeted by everyone and worked on his paperwork. Shadow clone jutsu 2 Itachi's popped out of the smoke and started working on his paperwork with him. During his paperwork he could not help but wonder about his relationship with Mei. She was really a good woman who treated him well, but he could feel her starting to get distant, but he could not figure out why. He had made attempts to take her out on dates and be gentlemanly to her, but there just seemed to be something missing, and he could not figure out why. He had not been mean to her at all, and so he was extremely confused. All right, I have finished my paperwork for today; it is time to meet Mei for lunch. Itatchi walked in that direction and was very confused about what he did wrong. Hi Mei, you look good today. Thank you, Itachi. Oh man, I am done for. I could tell by the way that she said thank you that she is still upset at me for something. Alright, Mei, thank you for coming to lunch with me, but I know that you are upset with me for something, so tell me. Well, you are so quiet and speak with such few words. I am not upset. I just do feel sad and question our relationship. You have a lot of good qualities, but we do not have as strong of a connection as we should. The first reason is that you never open up to me. You are always so quiet and speak with such few words. And keep your emotions in check all of the time. But I am the woman you have been dating for the last 6 months, and you need to let down your emotional walls with me. I see how you avoid each topic that has to do with your past. I see how you focus on your job and the people of this village, but you give no care to yourself. I understand you have responsibilities, but this will never work if you do not open up. Look, you are a hero to these people, but through becoming this hero, you have neglected me and your brother. Do you know how many times I have seen your brother sad because his big brother did not keep his promises about training with him? Do you think that your little brother only wants to train with you? No. Your little brother is a 10 year old child who just wants to spend time with you. But all that analytical brain sees is the time wasted helping the village or helping your brother train. I know you love your brother, but you're so emotionally dense that you don’t just see that your brother wants to spend time with you. And you have not been doing a good job of that either. I am happy that you care so much about this country, but you have employees so that you can have your own free time. You need to use them and use your time wisely. But the first thing about you opening up needs to happen for this relationship to continue. You need to open up to me about your deepest scars so we can have the emotional intimacy needed for a relationship. You have to do that. For us to continue, you have to take the jump emotionally. I know it is going to be hard for you, but if you never face these emotions, you will always push the ones you care about away from you. Is that something you think you can do? Itatchi thought about that night that he had tried so hard to avoid. He couldn’t help but think about the past and how much that night hurt him and that he knew that he was not handling it well. He knew that Mei cared for him, so he felt anxious about how he wanted to talk, but it was hard for him. Yes, it is something that I can talk about. We should go back to my place so we can talk in private.
Every time Itatchi walked closer to Mei’s door, he felt his anxiousness rose higher and higher. He knew that that day was something that he could never get out of his mind, and it haunted him. He would wake up in the middle of the night from his dreams of that night. It was like no matter what he tried to do to stop thinking about it in his day-to-day life it was like he could never escape his dreams. Alright, Itachi, we are at my house. I will make some tea. Itatchi saw Mei use a fire jutsu to make the tea really fast. Alright, here you go now, and start from wherever you like. Itatchi looked at Mei in her eyes, and he could feel the support in her eyes. It gave him courage to talk. Well, at first my village told me to kill my clan members because my clan was planning a coup d'état. This coup d'état was not in the best interest of the village. They told me that I should kill all of my clan members. I told them that I could not kill my brother. And they told me that he could live. Itatchi this whole time was looking off into the distance when saying this, but he felt Mei's hand on his hand and could see the love and understanding in her eyes. This gesture from Mei really made him feel very glad that he was talking to someone who cared about him as much as she did. The eyes never lie about a person's feelings, and he could see nothing but true care in her eyes. I thought to myself that I was uncertain if I was doing the right thing for the village or if the village was wrong. I then came to the conclusion that lies had created the situation where I had to kill my whole family. I then knew that I had to kill my whole family, but then I had a real dilemma with Sasuke. The more I thought about it, the more I thought that I should take Sasuke with me because he needs his family. So I made a decision to tell Sasuke the truth, and I did. And he decided to come with me. I then went and killed Itatchi stopped mid-sentence because he could not help but see all of the faces of his clansmen that he killed. I then killed every single clan member, and then i i i killed my parents. Mei saw Itachi break into tears and was sobbing at this point in time, and she held Itachi in her arms to comfort him. Mei could tell by how hard Itachi was crying that this was the first time that Itachi had cried since the massacre. Mei thought it made sense because since Itatchi had left his village, he had had no time to really reflect on his own emotional state because of other things. Itachi, I know that you carry the weight of being everyone’s hero, and you have to be strong with Sasuke. But you need to make sure that you can let these emotions heal by talking to me. Itatchi felt his tears clear up, and he saw for the first time in his life someone who he could be vulnerable with, and it made him feel so much better. You are right, Mei. Itatchi kissed her on the forehead, and they stayed in that embrace for some time.
Sasuke was leaving the academy, talking to his classmates about the great Uchiha clan, when he saw his brother. Itachi!!! Are we going to go train?Yes, unless there is something else you want to do? Really You will play anything with me? Yes. Oooooo, I have a good idea: what if we went out into the woods and then I played you? I can act like the Mizukage. I want to boss people around too. Can we pleaseeeee.I guess if that is what you want to do. Sasuke found a rock and a piece of wood where he could make a desk in the woods. Alright, well, I was thinking about this the other day, and I actually have a script that I want you to read of people talking to me while I act as you big brother. Okay, Sasuke I will just read the script. Knock, knock... come in. Hi, oh great Uchia, fire-breathing, red-eyed god, how can I serve thee? Ao I am glad you came to see your great Uchiha leader. Oh Great Leader It brings me so much joy and happiness to just be in your presence. Yes, Ao, the Uchiha greatness is known worldwide; I understand your amazement. Yes, well, I came to give you a report that the search for all the cool people around the world with red eyes has not shown any results yet, but I will find them. Oh great Uchiha-Sama. Yes, well, I am sure you know that I have to do some great Uchiha exercises, so you may go, Ao. Alright, Itachi let's read the next script. This is so fun. Sasuke saw that his brother was visibly trying his best not to laugh. Okay, Sasuke let's do the next script. Hi, oh great Uchiha-sama, Hi, oh great Uchiha-sama. Hi Mei and Mindy, It is nice to see you on this beautifully red day. Yes, every day with you is a beautiful red day, my cute Uchiha (wink). So I came to talk to you today to let you know that you, Mr. Uchiha you look extra cute today. Yes, yes, I know as the great Uchiha I must look very cute to you, but I am busy with Uchiha things, so I must go. Yes, my cute great Uchiha. Actually, Mindy, I need you to stay and talk to you. Yes, what is it, oh great Uchiha? Well, I have heard that you play with my little brother. Is that correct? Yes, I have the pleasure of getting the great, young, and gallant Sasuke to play with me. Do you happen to have your shogi board with you? Yes, oh great Uchia. Amaterasu, out of Itatci’s eyes, came the black flames that burn anything in the world, and they were burning Mindy’s shogi board. Now that it is settled who won each of these Shogi games, I win when I play Sasuke. Do you? Mindy felt a cold stare at her. Actually, I have never won a match because I would never be able to beat an Uchiha. That is correct. Also, you will always play the games that Sasuke says, okay? I will do what you ask, oh great Uchiha. Yes, that sounds good. You may go now. Thank you for your guidance, great Uchiha. Alright, Itachi Let's go to the next script. Unknown to the great Uchia’s, there was an audience for the last script, who was Kisame, who found it all hilarious. He was really looking forward to messing with Itachi about it later. Alright, let's start the script. Yes, Sasuke. Thank you for your time, oh great Uchiha. Yes, Kisame. I am glad you came. I have something serious I must discuss with you. Kisame, I heard that you found a girlfriend. Yes, she is someone so important to me; I care about her very deeply. That is why I wanted you to come. Kisame, you cannot have a shark as your girlfriend. But I love her.ITATCH!!!! Itachi and Sasuke turned to see one of the great 7 swordsmen of the mist, Kisame, right in front of them, who was very upset. I DO NOT DATE SHARKS!!! Then a massive amount of water came rushing out of Kisame’s mouth. Itachi and Sasuke were running away. Then Kisame put his sharks in the water to attack Itachi and Sasuke, who were running at top speed. Kisame’s girlfriend is attacking us. I DO NOT DATE SHARKS!! Itachi and Sasuke made it home after their adventure. Itatchi was watching his little brother sleep. I am so glad that this plot has me marrying Mei because Sasuke definitely needs a female presence in his life. If not, he would need a therapist. I mean, what kind of 10-year-old comes up with that weird script? For some reason I feel like I would have left after the murders. Sasuke would end up with a snake that likes little kids. Hmm, no, I guess Sasuke’s weirdness is getting to me. Uchiha’s and snakes that love little kids would never be together. Itachi went to bed, and Sasuke and Itachi would never talk about sharks again.
Next chapter, it is finally 2 years into this story's timeline. Which means all of our Konoha friends are going to be leaving in the next chapter. Is anyone able to guess what Shikamaru is going to get for Kakashi to give to Naruto that has to do with Minato?

Chapter 11: Chapter 11 The Great escape

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things. This will be a completely different ninja village.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. I also don’t own Shikaku’s intelligence.

Ch 11

Shikaku Nara was in the forbidden section of the Hokage’s office. In the drawer he was looking for there was the Hiraishin and all of Minato’s notes on how to use the Hiraishin, which is a teleportation technique. Shikaku thought for a long time that these things should be given to Minato’s son, Naruto. In his clan, their techniques are invaluable to their survival in a tough ninja world. As the Jonin Commander, stealing the Hiraishin was not hard, and it was the first step in a very busy day. It was 7 am in the morning, and Shakaku just called 20 Jonin to go on a special training mission with 20 of Hiruzen’s ANBU shinobi to learn ANBU techniques. Today you will all be training to hunt down 1 of our Jonin, Asuma Sarutobi, who has had a 3-hour head start. Jonin, you will shadow the ANBU in this mission to learn their strategies in this situation. Only nonlethal techniques—remember, this is a training exercise, not an actual mission. Yes, sir.

Shikaku Nara was walking to the Hatake residence and then knocked on the door. Knock! Knock, Hi Shikaku, how can I help you? Hi Kakashi, can I come in to get some tea? Yes, come in. Here, take this. Kakashi’s eyes went wide as he saw the Hiraishin, which his sensei, Minato Namikaze, was world-famous for using as a teleportation technique. On top of that, there were his notes on how the Hirashin worked. Why are you giving this to me? It is too troublesome to fully explain, but I want you to give it to Naruto because it is his birthright. But do not give it to him until we make it to the land of the water. He may get too distracted with this on such a big day. He is still just a kid, and we have no clue how it would affect him emotionally. Thank you for bringing it to me. I will make sure he receives it. Okay, Remember to come to the Nara compound today for our escape from Konoha. Then Shikaku left the house heading back to his compound with many things to do, which was so troublesome. The front door of the Kakashi’s house broke down, and an extremely concerned bull haircut man stormed in. What are you doing with Shikaku!!?? Kakashi I was extremely thankful that he lived in a nonpopulated area of Konoha so that Might Guy’s extremely loud voice was not an issue. Kakashi knew right there that he had to be honest with his lifelong friend and rival. Yes, I will be leaving Konoha with others today. We are going to the land of Water to support Itachi's dream. Now Might Guy on the outside may seem like just a dense guy that just screams about the values of the power of the youth. But Guy had thought what Itachi was doing was youthful, but he never would have thought of leaving Konoha. But the idea of losing his best friend and long-term rival made him sad. Why would you leave Konoha when it has done nothing wrong to you, Kakashi? Well, I have no grudges against Konoha outside of how Naruto was treated growing up. But I want to have a family, and Anko really wants to leave, and I do think that what Itachi wants to build is really great. I think the future of the hidden villages is in Kirigakure, and I want to build in Kirigakure. And there I can raise Naruto. Which, as Minato’s student, I think I should do. Guy took in all of the information. He was genuinely glad that Kakashi had grown to overcome the former reliance of the village to give him his value and how he used to push his emotions to the side every time something bad happened. His friend could never have grown into that person without Anko entering his life. He understood that Kakashi a few years ago would have killed everyone leaving, but that this Kakashi was much different. Guy was very proud of his best friend, but it made him sad to lose him. He did not have any family or friends that mattered more to him than Kakashi. It made him think of a young kid named Rock Lee that he has seen fail the exams multiple times due to an extremely low chakra level but always works out after school. He followed Rock Lee home one day and saw him go to an orphanage, so he knows that he has no parents. He had started talking to the kid and was thinking of training him. He genuinely saw a lot of himself in the kid. He also knew firsthand what it was like for a parent to die being a shinobi, and he thought that the system of ANBU led many children to never even know their parents names, which was very non-youthful. He then knew that the thing his heart wanted was to follow them to the village as well. I think what you are doing is very youthful, Kakashi. I will go as well. There is an orphan who I will see if he will go with me as well so we can all have the power of youth in Kiri!! Kakashi, next time tell me about these types of things. It was not youthful of you. You are right, Guy. I will let you know next time. Alright, I will leave to talk to Rock Lee. I will see you later today.

Guy sensei I am so happy to see you. What do you want to talk about? Hello, Rock Lee, let's go on a walk while we talk. Make sure you tell the woman that runs the orphanage that you are leaving. Yes, Guy sensei!! Alright, can you tell me how you ended up in the orphanage, Lee? I do not remember my parents because when I was born, my parents were shinobi that died when the 9 tails attacked Konoha. I have a picture of them; apparently they were chunin. I do not have any other family because most of my family were also ninjas that died in missions as well. Guy sadly all too well understands that this was one of the more sad realities of the ninja world: that when ninjas died, their children had a tough time finding other families to live with. Well, Rock Lee I want to adopt you, but I will be moving from the village tonight, so if you wanted, I could raise you where I am going to move to. Really!! You would raise me? Yes, I would, but you would be training with me and become a most youthful ninja. Yes, Guy sensei! Alright, I will come pick you up before dusk, and we will move on a most youthful adventure! Yes, Guy sensei!

Hinata Hyuga has had a crush since she was a child. The Princess of the Hyuga clan, when she was 4, was getting bullied while it was snowing outside. Just as she was about to cry from the bullying, a blue-eyed, blonde-haired kid ran and tried to stand up to the bullies. The bullies beat the kid up. From this moment in time, Hinata slowly built a crush on Naruto year after year. Now being a part of the Hyuga clan gave her the ability to see in distances that are extremely far, farther than the normal human eye. This was a blessing for Hinata because it allowed her to stalk her crush without being seen. She had seen him training, and whenever he had some unique prank. Her favorite prank by far is when he painted the Hokage’s faces on the Hokage mountain. It made her laugh so much, and she really was interested when Naruto would sneak away and go to the Hokage mountain and sit and think. What really interests Hinata is watching the change in Naruto when he would start watching Naruto tailing his classmates on the way home from school. It was a very odd thing that she never really understood why Naruto would be doing those things. Then one day she saw Shikamaru catch Naruto in a trap on the way home from school, and Hinata was going to try to save him, but something very odd happened. Naruto walked to the Nara Compound and then walked home super excited, coming home with Shikamaru. Then every day Naruto would walk home with Shikamaru and Choji. She was happy for Naruto because he looked like he was becoming good friends with those two.

Hinata, stop zoning out!! It is time for our next set of palm strike teaching. Hinata was sad to be broken out of her daydream about Naruto. Yes, Neji! I do not know why I, the prodigy of the Hyuga clan, have to help teach a failure like you, but let's get this done. I have better things to do! Now palm strike this training dummy now!! Neji turned on his Byakugan and saw that Hinata always hit the dummy very softly. How many times must I tell you the Gentle Fist needs to be forceful to close the chakra points? Do it again, stronger. Hinata kept on hitting the practice dummy for the next hour, trying to slowly get better at the strikes with each repetition. I am so thankful that the time where I have to work with the failure of the Hyuga clan is over. I will give you a present. Neji assumed the Gentle Fist stance and hit one of Hinata’s chakra points in her stomach, and Hinata folded to the ground. I will be doing some real training that a failure like you could never do. It is a disgrace to be your cousin.

Hi Father, my training session is over. Hi Hinata, are you able to do the drill like Neji yet? No, Father. The fact that the Princess of the Hyuga clan is not the strongest of her own age is an absolute disgrace. What an absolute failure you are, Hinata. If you do not focus and become stronger, your younger sister will become the princess of the Hyuga clan, not you. The less I have to look at you, the better. Hinata walked out of the room and into the hallway and saw her sister Hinabi, who, just like Neji, was considered a genius of the Hyuga clan. Like always, Hinab had a smug smile and just said hi, failure, and then just kept walking. Hinata went to her room and cried about being treated like this every day and how she wished her mother was still alive to comfort her. In moments like this, she thought of Naruto and how she really needed to see Naruto’s positive attitude to help her feel better. She got up and left the compound to complete her daily stalking. The guard at the exit of the Hyuga compound said, Do not forget, princess, to be back by dusk. Yes, I will!

Naruto, everything is packed; let's head out. Yes, Kakashi. Alright, Anko, do you have mountain climbing outfits? Yes, and everything has been packed. Alright, Naruto I need you to act like nothing is going on as we walk to the Nara compound. Yes, Kakashi. Once they were there, Kakashi saw an extremely huge amount of people in the area that was truly amazing. Shikaku, after seeing everyone was here, he started his speech. Alright, so we have many kids and non-shinobi people here with us, which means that we will have to be very smart about how we leave. We will have all of the shinobi-trained people make shadow clones for all of the people in this group so that it will buy us some time where they think nothing has happened. As well as using earth jutsu, we have built a 50-mile cave system that is leading towards the land of the mist. We will have our shinobi carrying 2 non-shinobi people those 50 miles in a day, and with that we will have a huge head start.

Shikaku It looks like we have one young Hyuga tailing us from a far distance. In the cave system. Shikaku knew not to doubt Shibi Aburame's detection prowess and that the information was correct. There are no adults with them? No, not at all; it is very odd. Even if someone got wind that we were leaving, the Hyuga would just activate the bird seal on whoever it was and kill them. Shibi, you can go capture her and then bring her here, and we will get information from her. Someone may have leaked our leaving, so we need to be thorough. I figured I just knocked her out. I will go get her. Shikaku even immediately recognized the princess of the Hyuga clan when he saw her. It would surprise him with how notoriously nervous she usually was; she did not strike him as the type to try to stop them all from leaving. Why are you following us, Hinata? B B Because Naruto. What do you mean? Shikaku saw her face turn red, and then she said that she follows Naruto. Shikaku shook his head. Young crushes are so troublesome. I understand that you like Naruto, but where we are going, there is no family for you. You have no clue if you will grow out of this crush. Your family is much more important than your current crush. My family does not even want me. I am their failure, and nobody even cares about me! The only person that loved me since I was alive was my mother, who passed away! I would much rather go with you guys than stay home. I will take her. Like most women, Anko could not resist the urge to eavesdrop on their conversation. She completely knew how Hinata felt totally alone, and she really needed someone like her to break her out of her shell. Kakashi was about to say something, but then Anko stared at him and said, Oh, so you think you can adopt Naruto, and I cannot adopt Hinata??? Kakashi knew when he saw that look that said, I dare you to say no. He was totally stuck, and now he was a parent of two. You guys adopted Naruto? Yes, Hinata, we are adopting him and going to the village hidden in the Mist. I am Anko, and my husband is Kakashi, and Kashki’s sensei was Naruto’s father, so we are taking him in. We would love for you to come live with us. Okay.

(48 hours later)

Hiruzen was really confused; he had thought that yesterday his Jonin Commander, Shikaku Nara, was just sick or that the lazy man was just having a lazy day. He very normally would not see him for a day every once in a while. The lazy man would just bring his paperwork in the afternoon from the previous day of news about missions and some mission planning for some higher-ranked missions. He knew that the Shikaku was extremely elite at his role, so it did not bother him too much. But today it was already midnight, and there had been no reports from Shikaku. ANBU! Yes, Hokage-sama. Bring Shikaku Nara here. I don’t care how much he whines about how troublesome it is. Yes, Hokage-sama! An hour later the ANBU returned. Hokage-sama I could not find Shikaku anywhere, and it was very odd; I did not see anyone else at the house. Did you look at Incochis’s house? Yes, Hokage-sama, he was not there. What about Choza’s house? Yes, Hokage-sama, he was not there. Did you check all of the bars? Usually, he was out at one of those places. Yes, Hokage-sama, he was not there. Hokage-sama, at one of the bars, he was seen with Choza and Inochi drinking together yesterday. Hiruzen was thinking about how every once in a while he would see Choza and Inochi stargazing with Shikaku from time to time and that may be where they are at. ANBU check all lakes with scenic views within a 10-mile radius that lazy bones would not get far. Yes, Hokage-sama. 3 hours later, the ANBU returned Hokage-sama. We still could not find Shikaku-san anywhere, or Incochi-san, or Choza-san. Hiruzen was up at 4 am waiting to find Shikaku, and when he was found, I am going to give D ranks for a week every hour it takes for me to find this guy. ANBU go to the Nara, Akimichi, and Yamanaka compounds and find them. 3 hours later. Hokage-sama, there is nobody at the Nara, Akimichi, or Yamanaka compounds. Hiruzen's face paled as he was thinking about how smart the Nara was. And two days ago there was an odd Jonin joint training session with ANBU. Hirizen really did not like where this thought process was heading, but he had to face the reality that he was 55 hours behind the smartest man from his village; tracking him down would be no easy feat. ANBU this is an emergency. I want tracking ninja on this at this moment, and I want every inch of this village combed within the next hour. We cannot lose any time. Am I understood!? Yes, Hokage-sama! 1 hour later, the ANBU came back with his report. It looks like all of the Nara, Yamanaka, Akimichi, and Aburame clans are completely gone. It looks like the princess of the Hyuga clan has been missing in the last two days and that Anko, Kakashi, Guy, Naruto, and an orphan named Rock Lee are gone. It looks like there was some sort of tunnel that they caved in, and the best Inuzuka trackers say that they cannot follow the scent because they are already too far away. Hiruzen should have known that Shikamaru would not make it so easy for their tracking specialists to track them. Hiruzen could see sadly that after the Uchiha clan was murdered, he should have done more to reassure the other clans that they would be next. As much as he understood, they had the 9-tailed fox, which had been under their control since the founding of the village, and he needed that retrieved. What direction was the cave dug? East Hokage Sama. Hiruzen’s eyes went wide because he immediately knew that the two villages that were to the east were the Water village and the Lightning village. He knew that there was no chance they would defect to go to the lightning village due to them being known as the village that makes ninja clans have multiple children, treating them like breeding dogs. And the option became very clear that they were going to the Water Village. Hiruzen knew that Itachi had very much grown in strength and that they would not be able to attack the water village and win without those clans and without Danzo’s ROOT. ANBU I want you all to travel to the water village and see if you can find them before they enter that village.Yes, Hokage-sama!

Ao flashed into Itachi’s office, saying that thousands of people were nearing the Mist village and hundreds of them had ninja chakra signatures, and 5 of them had jonin chakra level signatures in front of them, and one of them was carrying a white flag. Itachi was very thankful that Ao had the byakugan for these moments. Gatherer, Kisame, Zabuza, and Mei, we are leaving in 15 minutes. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Once outside, Itachi was absolutely shocked at the familiar faces that he was seeing. Four of the main clans of Konaha were all there, and Kakashi, who was his sensei in ANBU. Then he saw Might Guy and then the 4th Hokage's Legacy in Naruto Uzumaki. Shikaku, why are you here? We believe that you are building a better version of the Hidden Villages, and we wish to join you. Itachi was stunned that so many people he had accepted to never see again were here now and believed in his dream. You guys may join this village and come inside for now. I am sure that there are ANBU tracking you guys.

Chapter 12: Chapter 12 Politics

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch12

On Itachi's desk there was a piece of paper from Kumo. Kumo is at this time probably the strongest or the second strongest village after Konoha. Konoha used to be number one, but after losing so many shinobi, they were not. Kumo is well known for having a very strong economy. They are very well known for never thinking about alliances, historically speaking. I mean, who would trust them with the Hyuga incident in Konoha? Because they faked like they were in peace talks with Konoha only to try to abduct a Hyuga. So why in the world is there a summons to try to discuss a peace treaty? AO! Bring Mei and Shikaku here. We need to discuss this peace treaty talk.Yes, Mizukage-sama.

Alright everyone, Kumo has given us a peace treaty summons. I will allow you all to read the summons, take your time, and then one by one give me your thoughts. Ao it looks like you are ready to give us your thoughts. Well, their Raikage is A, who is a master of using lightning chakra around his body and is extremely fast. They have two Jinchuriki: B, who is the master of the eight tails and is a fully realized Jinchuriki. They have Yugito Nii, who is the two-tailed Jinchuriki, and she has full control of her biju as well. A’s right-hand man is Darui, who is extremely skilled with black lightning release, which makes him unique. Other than that, it looks like they have a long history of mostly all shinobi using swords. From an information-gathering perspective, these are the most important things to note.

Mei, it looks like you are ready. What do you think? Well, obviously the hurdle here is we just got out of a civil war after all of the bloodline purges. Every clan is going to worry that Kumo will take advantage of a treaty to try to acquire our clans. Which our clans just grew again. I do like the fact that the summons are on land in between our two villages, so it looks like he is being thoughtful to those worries. You are such a hero here that the people would not question your decision. We all believe in the village you are trying to build, so we will do whatever you say.

Shikaku, It looks like you are ready; what do you think? Well, we lost a very large amount of ninjas in our civil war, so right now any village outside of Konoha would beat us. It will take time to regrow our forces. If we had a peace treaty with Kumo that said we would work together against all invaders, that would be great. It would be great because it buys us time for us to regrow our forces. On top of that, we are the two eastern villages, which would give us a huge strategic advantage in battle. But they have an image issue, and we would be hugely helpful to that, which would allow them to get more missions and make more money. I appreciate all of your thoughts on this matter. Go ahead and send the reply to them that we will meet them. Yes, Mizukage-sama.

Both nations were able to bring 3 ninjas to the peace talks. Itachi brought Ao, Mei, and Shikaku. The Raikage brought the 8- and 2-tailed Jinchurikis and Dauri. Hello Itachi, it is nice to meet you. The Raikage brought out his hand to shake it, and Itachi shook it back. The Raikage could tell that Itachi was trying to figure him out. Itachi, you know I actually really respect you standing up for what you want, so that is part of the reason why we are at these peace talks. I mean, most people would not try to make a treaty with the Hidden Mist village because of how turbulent your history is. But I really do think that you will be Mizukage for a while. So this treaty is really something that would have never been possible without you. Thank you, Raikage.

So you guys probably lost 30 jonin, 90 Chunin, and 150 genin in your guys past war. Does that sound about correct? Yes, we have lost many lives due to the civil war. Well, any of the great 5 nations outside of Konoha could march over here and defeat you guys. You need time to build up your forces. But what if you were allied with me, and the contract said that if either one of us were attacked, we both go to war, then I just bought you time to rebuild. Now obviously I would not be doing this without reason. We are the two most eastern countries, and without the sea in between us, we basically border each other. This means if there ever was a war, we would have an extreme strategic advantage over the other nations. On top of that, we can remove all taxes on goods between both of our countries, which would economically help both of us. Raikage Sama, you talk about a lot of really nice benefits, but I highly doubt you do not want something in return.

Yes, there is something that I do want in return. Actually, do you mind if your ANBU brings me his sword? Ao give the Raikage your sword. Yes, Mizukage-sama. You see, your country has the 7 swordsmen of the mist, and you have by far the best quality swords in all of the 5 great nations. We use a lot of swords in our fighting, so I would like 500 of them for free every year of this quality. Itachi knew that was a very uneven offer that would be a huge financial toll. And what would you give in return, Raikage? Well, I hear you have the 9-tails Jinchuriki. By a stroke of luck, I can train him to be in full control of his Biju. That is a good offer, but my Jinchuriki is in full sync with his Biju as well, so he will teach him when the time comes.

Yagura is alive? Yes, Raikage, Yagura is alive, and I am glad that this conversation is moving in this direction because there is something you need to know. Yagura was put in a genjutsu during the whole time frame where he was the Mizukage. This genjutsu weakened my village, and it was put there by Uchiha. I will give you a very quick lesson with my eyes. The first tomoe is when a sharingan user awakens his eyes. The second tomoe allows them better reaction time and genjutsu abilities. The same things apply for the 3 tomoe sharingan. But the Mangekyou Sharingan gives an extreme jump in abilities like the Susanoo and very elite genjutsu and ninjutsu abilities. The cost for these extremely elite eyes is blindness will eventually affect them. But there is a last stage called the Eternal Mangekyō Sharingan, which gives you much stronger versions of your previous abilities and no blindness. Only Uchiha with brothers can achieve this Sharingan level, which in history only Madara Uchiha had. Now when I massacred my clan, there was a man saying he was Madara Uchiha who was there with a Sharingan, and while I did kill everyone in the civilian area, he killed all of the people in the Konoha Police Force. While heading towards Mizu, I was approached by a white and green entity that just appeared out of the ground. They asked me to come join them trying to build a dream world with Madara Uchiha, which I declined. This means that there are 3 Uchihas alive, as I have described to you. Madara Uchiha should have the eternal Mangekyō Sharingan, which means I should not have been able to break Yagura out of the genjutsu. Me doing that means that he is Madara Uchiha’s son or someone trying to imitate him.

Now for someone to try to put the whole ninja world into some sleep-like state is very concerning. The reason why is that there must be some unknown power that will allow them to defeat the whole shinobi world. With this treaty, I want an emergency line put into both of our kage offices for emergencies or trends. There has to be something that they need because if they did not need something, then they would have already attacked. The Raikage had been a kage for a long time, so even though he was known as a hothead, he had a good poker face. But hearing that there was someone basically trying to take over the world was very concerning. Well then, this means that when we make this deal, we must be preparing for war. Yes, I agree building our forces makes a lot of sense. Trying to gather information is going to be extremely important. Yes, Mizukage, I agree, but since Yagura is alive, what do you want in return for the swords?

Pay half of the cost to make the swords. Sounds good. Is there anything else that you want? Yes, I want it in the contract that the alliance dissipates if you try to make a move on our bloodlines. That sounds agreeable. Itachi signed the alliance, and then the Raikage did as well, making it official that the Hidden Mist village and Kumo were allied. After the meeting, Itachi talked with his advisors about the deal. What does everyone think about the alliance? It makes sense for Kumo because it makes their economy and ninja forces stronger. And yes, those swords are not cheap, but they are covering half of the cost, and now we will have time to rebuild. Yes, I agree, Mei, go announce to our village that we have allied with Kumo. Yes, Mizukage-sama.

In Konoha there was a meeting with the council about the departure of 4 of the great clans and the loss of the Kybui. In that meeting were Komura and Homura, both war veterans that were elected by the civilians to represent the civilians. Then there was Haishi Hyuga, the leader of the Hyuga clan. There was also Tsume Inuzuka, who was the head of the Inuzuka clan. Leading the meeting was Hiruzen Sarutobi, who was the Hokage. So as you are aware, we had 4 clans and the 9-tails Jinchuriki left. So did Hinata Hyuga, Guy, Kakashi, Anko, and an orphan named Rock Lee. Haishi, I am sorry that your daughter left the village. I am sure you miss her. I don't miss that failure; it just made it easy for the prodigy of the Hyuga clan, Hanabi, to be the princess. There was still a little bit of my daughter that liked Hinata, but now that she is a traitor, she wishes to see her on a mission one day so she can kill her. Okay, well, what do you think about the 4 clans moving from the village? Tsume responded, anyone not loyal to their country is a coward, and I am glad they left so we can rebuild without the cowards. Komura, Homura, and Hiashi all nodded in agreement. Homura and I both believe that this is a great opportunity to use our alliance with the sand village to crush the Hidden Mist village. We need our 9-tails Jinchuriki back, and we can split with them the spoils of war. Yes, I agree we will be able to defeat them, and then we would regain some of our lost power. Hiruzen knew that this was the correct response. Hiashi nodded his head in agreement to Tsume’s statement. Yes, I completely agree with you guys; as much as I feel like it was my fault they left, this is an act of war, and we must act appropriately.

An ANBU flashed into the meeting. Hokage-sama I know this may not be the best time, but there is some extremely important news. Hiruzen took the scroll and read it, and everyone in the room could see the shock on the otherwise even-keeled Hokage. The Mist and Kumo have made an alliance that specifically states that if one of the other countries is attacked, they will both go to war. Tsume screamed, This is great news! Now with Kumo in the fold, we would have so many resources to split after the war. Could you think about it? We would be stronger than before all of the clans left; it would be absolutely amazing. Hiruzen could see everyone nodding their head to that. We are not the same Konoha as before; we would lose. You guys are also underestimating Kumo's strength greatly. I will not be invading them; we need time to rebuild our power through our own ninjas.

Chapter 13: Chapter 13 Life at the ninja academy

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to canon and not try to shake up things. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch13

Hi, Mizukage-sama, For what reason did you call for me? Yes, please sit down, Zabuza. You see, with the addition of the Konoha clans, we have a very diverse group of shinobi. We have 5 swords of the mist that we must find wielders for. Between Choji, Shikimaru, Rock Lee, Naruto, Ino, Sasuke, Mindy, Chojuro, Hinata, Haku, and Shino, we have 12 people who have very unique abilities that could be swordsmen of the Hidden Mist. Like I have stated previously, you have a very good eye for the way young Shinobi can grow. On top of that, you are one of the 2 of the ninja swordsmen of the mist. When you are going there every week, I want you to watch them closely for the next 2 years. Since they are all 8 years old, they all have 4 years left in the Ninja Academy. After 2 years, I want you to bring me reports where we will have meetings discussing who will be the next 5 ninja swordsmen. After the next two years, we will train them on how to be swordsmen. We will do this while still doing other basic academy instruction, but they will be much more focused on developing their kenjutsu skills. Yes, Kazakage-sama. Also make sure to inform the teacher that Choji will have to eat a lot during class because his body needs to take in an immense amount of calories for his family’s abilities. Yes, Kazakage-sama, Is there anything else? No.

Alright class, we will be having many people joining our class today from Konoha. They all left their village in a big group, so they already know each other. Alright everyone, come in at once. Sasuke was in class sitting alone and was very intrigued if these were kids he knew from the academy in Konoha. He definitely felt like the one he felt bad about was being mean to Naruto too much. He probably could have been better friends with Naruto. And even he could recognize he felt a little lonely. Alright, everyone walked in, and Sasuke’s eyes went wide. Hinata, Shino, Shikamaru, Choji, Ino, and Naruto all walked into the room. HHHi I am Hinata Hyuga. I am 8 years old. Hi, I am Shino Aburame. I am 8. Hi, I am Shikamaru. Anything else is too troublesome to say. Hi, I am Choji Akimichi. I am 8. Hi, I am Ino Yamanka. I am 8. Hi, I am Naruto Uzamaki Namikaze, and I am 8. Sasuke was not a prodigy for nothing; he knew that Namikaze was Minato Namikaze, the 4th Hokage. Naruto Why are you lying? I know your last name is Uzamaki. I thought so too, but a few months ago I was told that my father was the 4th Hokage, Minato Namikaze. My mom was the previous 9-tails jinchūriki, and when I was born, the seal weakened, and a bad guy got the 9-tails. Then my dad made the bad guy go away and sealed the 9 tails in me. Believe IT!! Do you want to see something cool? Naruto lifted up his shirt and activated chakra, and there were gasps as everyone saw his seal on his stomach. This is the seal for the 9-tailed fox! Everyone in the room was in shock; even people from Konoha had no clue that Naruto was both the 4th Hokage’s son and the 9-tails jinchūriki. If that is true, then why did Konoha not say anything about it, Naruto? Well, Sasuke, Kakashi told me that my dad killed so many people that if they told people his true heritage, other countries would hunt me and kill me. But my dad is so cool! He created multiple new jutsu and saved Konoha. So I wanted to change my last name when I moved.

Alright everyone, go pick a seat. Sasuke Is it okay if I sit next to you? Yes, Naruto. Naruto sat to the left of him. Is it okay if I sit next to you? I would not want you to sit next to me. Ino, you’re always running around being very loud, competing with other girls over me. You always are all over me. I would allow you to sit next to me if you respect my personal bubble and promise not to scream at me or yell at me. Okay, Sasuke I still like you, but I will not be so overbearing about it. Okay, you can sit next to me. Hinata sat a row behind Naruto’s chair, very quietly hoping nobody would notice her. What are we going over today? The 7 swordsmen of the mist, thanks. Sasuke could not believe that Naruto, who never focused in school, was actually bringing out a notebook and pencil and looked like he was ready to actually focus on class. Naruto, why are you actually trying at school? Well, my super cool dad used the hirashan, which is a space-time ninjutsu that allows you to travel instantly. I have his notes for the jutsu and his kunai. Kakshi said that I must focus hard on my studying to be able to learn the technique. My father was a genius, so understanding his jutsu means that I am going to have to focus on school very hard since I am so behind. The good thing is, though, that before traveling from Konoha, I was taught the shadow clone jutsu. I thought you could not make clones? Well yes, Sasuke, regular ones give me issues because I have so much more chakra than others that my chakra control is really poor. But shadow clones require much more chakra to do. But the major thing is that when one shadow clone explodes, the user gets the memories of the previous clone. So I right now am a shadow clone. I have a shadow clone researching my father's notes on the Hirashan. I have a shadow clone studying fuinjutsu. My real body is working on Taijutsu right now. Really, please teach me the shadow clone technique. No, Kakashi made me promise not to teach it to anyone because it may kill them with how much chakra it requires. Well, unlike you, with my Uchiha greatness, I will not need shadow clones. Yeah, your brother is cool, but my dad was cooler. Did your dad have red eyes? No. Then obviously my brother is cooler. So why did you guys move? Ino was the first one to respond. Well, the clans had a meeting about moving due to fear of the village trying to kill our clans. Like what happened with the Uchiha. Also, we believed that the things Itachi wanted to do were correct as well. All of the Aburame clans, Nara clans, Akimichi clans, and Yamanaka clans came. See, I told you, Naruto, my brother is the coolest! Yes, your big brother is the coolest, Ino said. Because he was able to let me follow my love across the Ninja world. We're like fated lovers, Sasuke-kun. Ino still saw that same old guarded face as usual, with no expression shown after that remark. And then Sasuke, wanting to act like that never happened, turned around and asked Hinata why she was here if the clan had not come. Iii was heading in the same direction, and then they caught me. Aaaand I wanted to leave because of my family. Where are you staying? With Naruto. Hinata could see a huge look of shock on Ino’s and Sasuke’s faces. How!!?? Well, Kakashi said that he wanted to raise me, and his girlfriend is Anko, and she saw Hinata while traveling here. She decided that she wanted to raise her as well. Wow, that is crazy. So that is everyone that came? Naruto replied to Sasuke that a guy named Rock Lee and Might Guy came. But Rock Lee is a year older, so that is why you do not see him in class.

Shino was walking to a seat that was open in between a blue-haired guy and a black-haired girl that was on the left side of the class a few rows back. Hi, can I sit here? Yes, this seat is open. Hi, um, my name is Chojuro. Hi, my name is Shino. Shino turned to the left and saw a black-haired girl turn to him and say, My name is Haku. So, Shino, what do you use as a ninja? My clan uses bugs to either suck away chakra or to poison. Surprisingly, neither one was like, Eww, bugs are gross, which definitely surprised him, but he didn’t show it on his face. And what do you use? My clan uses Ice Release. Interesting, He turned to his right, and he could see the boy nervously say, I practice Kenjutsu a lot and know water jutsu. Today, Shino, we are going over the 7 swordsmen of the mist. It is going to be so much fun! Why is that? Because I want to be one of the next swordsmen of the mist! That is a very good goal. Shino turned to the front of the class, and he felt extremely lucky. He was lucky because next to him was a shy person and not an overly talkative person. Shino enjoyed his silence and really liked that he could just relax and not be forced to communicate as much as when he was in Konoha. In Konoha, Kiba would never stop talking to him, and sometimes he just wanted his space to not talk. He felt really lucky that here he would not be expected to do that.

Shikamaru went to the back of the class with Choji sitting next to a red-haired woman who did not say anything to him when they sat down. Hi, my name is Mindy. Hi, I am Shikamaru. Hi, I am Choji. Shikamaru saw Choji start eating his snacks and then saw that the girl with red hair looked annoyed. How long are you going to eat those for? Choji’s family jutsu requires a lot of calories, so he has to eat a lot. It is okay; I will just zone him out. Shikamaru started to prepare what kind of sky and stars he was going to daydream about during class. Then he started to zone out the teacher. Alright class, today we are talking about the 7 swordsmen of the mist village. The first one we are going to talk about is the Nuibari, which means sewing needle. The last person to wield the sword is Kushimaru Kuriarare. The sword resembles a large needle and is considered a longsword. There is thread tied to the base of the hilt. The sword has the ability to pierce all things and stitch them together, which can kill multiple enemies at once. It can even be thrown to pierce multiple enemies at once. It can also be used to bind a person, revealing if they are using some sort of camouflaging jutsu. The next sword to talk about is the helmet splitter. Shikamaru noticed something very odd about the girl with red hair to his right. She was moving her hands in directions and then thinking and moving her hands again. She would sometimes move her hands in ways like she was playing against herself. He watched longer and then realized. This girl with red hair was playing shogi against herself. He was watching her moves, and she was good. He sat up and then moved a piece on the imaginary shogi board of the girl, and he could tell she was shocked. Then they moved a piece of the board through the whole class, and they were both having fun doing it. Hi, I have a shogi set at home. Do you want to come play Mindy? Yes. Hi, Dad, I am home. Hi, Shikamaru. Mindy and I are going to play some shogi. After 10 games played, Shikamaru had won 6 games and Mindy won 4. Shimamaru could tell that the girl needed a break. So how long have you been playing Shogi for Mindy? Since I was 4. My big sister and I play a little. That makes sense. I have been playing since I was young with my dad. He usually beats me, though. Really, he is that good. I usually beat my sister. You can come over whenever you want to play. Okay, sounds good. Mei then left the room and headed home. Shikamaru was heading to his room and saw his father. Shikamaru finding a woman that likes shogi is like gold. Yeah, I know, dad, what a drag.

Naruto, Hinata, Sasuke, and Ino were all walking home together. Hinata, how is life with Naruto? Iiit is good. I train with him sometimes, and we do some chores as well. Yeah, Hinata is super helpful with my studying. She is super smart; believe it! Hey Sasuke, let's be like Hinata and Naruto and move in together. Think of how dreamy it would be to wake up and see each other every day. Talk about dreams coming true. No, Ino, we don’t even have any space in our house with how much Mindy and Mei come over. Really, why? Mei and my brother are dating. Really, that is so cute. Wait, who is Mindy? Mei’s little sister is in our class. What?? Some other girl gets to see you more than me. That is not fair. Mei is nothing like that; she just likes to make fun of me. I am so sorry, Sasuke. If you ever need someone to talk to when getting made fun of, I’m here. Alright, we have to go this way. Okay, Naruto and Hinata. Hey, wait, Hinata. I have not gone shopping around here yet. Do you want to go with me? Ummm, yes, Ino. Okay, I will head the same way as you guys. Iii will let Anko know that I will be going with you. Sasuke could not believe his luck that Ino walked the other way and he could go home quietly without distractions.

Alright, Ino, we can go shopping. Sounds good. Honestly, Hintata, you would look so cute in outfits other than hoodies. Iii really don’t know; I’ve never thought of myself as cute. Hinata could see Ino getting sad. Hinata I am sorry that your parents treated you in a way that hurt your self-esteem. But you are very cute with your dark blue hair color and your eyes; you would look so elegant in a dress. Yeah, but we're Shinobi; I cannot wear dresses in the field. But you could wear cute versions of them. Let's go; this looks like a shinobi shop. Let's look around. Oh, look at this black one with a blue flower print. You would look so cute in this. Or this dark purple one would complement your complexion so well. There is the super subtle pink one right here that would look so good. Here, please try them on. Ino waited to see how cute Hinata would look, and she walked out with the black one with the blue flower print that looked so good on her. Oh my goodness, Hinata, darker colors look so good on you. What do you think? Ino could see that Hinata actually really liked it, and she replied, Yyes it does look good. Hinata then tried on the dark purple one, and Ino could see that she really liked that one too. Wow, Hintata, that looks so cute on you. Hinata then took a subtle pink one, and Ino could tell that she really did not like it. Yeah, I think we discovered how good dark colors look on you, so I definitely get not getting the pink one. Yyeah, I agree, but I think it would look good on you, Ino. Sure, I will go try it on. Ino tried it on and was surprised at how good it looked on her and showed it to Hinata. She saw Hinata nervously say, It looks good on you, Ino. Yeah, I know, right? It totally complements my hair color. They both got their dresses that they liked so much. Then Ino and Hinata left the store, and Ino saw Hinata smile, which made her happy. So how did you start liking Naruto? Ino could see the shock on Hinata’s face that she was found out. Hinata, it is very obvious you like him. Wwell when I was a kid, I got bullied by these other kids, and then Naruto came and saved me from the bullies. He even gave me a scarf to wear since it was cold outside. Awwww, that is so cute, really?? Yeah, and Naruto always really believes in himself and works hard for his goals. That is so cute, Hinata. You are so adorable. Ino saw Hinata blush and then say something that looked like she was about to reveal a secret. I actually have been watching him from afar with my Byakugan. The reason why I followed you guys here was because I was following him. Hinata, seriously, that is so romantic, oh my goodness! So when do you think you will tell him that you like him? I couldn’t do it. Okay, just know that whenever you are ready to tell him that you will have to tell him because he is so dense when it comes to someone liking him. Oookay. So, Ino, why do you like Sasuke? He is so handsome. And now I really like how much nicer he is. I honestly used to like him because he was a bad boy, but he has changed. Honestly, I really like the changed him. That is cool, Ino; hopefully you guys eventually get together. I feel like you guys would compliment each other well. Thank you, Hinata; you are so sweet. At least we both get to see our crushes every day, Hinata! Yyaeah. Ino walked Hinata home, and she felt happy that she was able to make a new friend today.

Chapter 14: Chapter 14 The power of youth!

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon and not try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch 14

Haku was walking through a back alley of the village, and then she heard something. Look, that is her! She is the bloodline limit user in the academy. Admit it! Admit that what Yagura said was a lie! Admit that Yagura was being manipulated to say that what he was doing was wrong! Our parents died in that war, and you will tell us the truth. You are good for nothing, Bloodlimit user. All of you are the same; you all lie and kill others. You are all the greatest threat to our village. You will pay for what you caused. The kids started to all move to jump Haku. At the end of the hallway, there was a grey spandex-wearing boy running at them at top speed, but before the kid could get there, all of the bullies had fallen to the ground with senbon in their necks. Wow, I was going to come save you since bullies are most unyouthful! But you were most youthful in defeating them! Haku was definitely weirded out by this guy, but how fast he was running was impressive. My name is Rock Lee; it is nice to make your acquaintance! Hello, my name is Haku. It is nice to meet you. I appreciate you trying to come help me even though I did not need it. Haku walked home weirded out about Lee. The fact that at least he tried to help was nice.

Hi, Haku How was the shopping trip? Nothing of note, Zabuza, but there were a few kids that I did put to sleep when they tried attacking me. I am not surprised that you handled them so well. Yeah, but there was a very loud kid in green spandex who spoke about youth. He tried to help me even though I did not need it. Did he have a bowl cut? Yes. Was his name Rock Lee? Yes, how did you know? Well, Itachi has me watching kids in the academy for the next possible 7 swordsman of the mist. And he is one of the names on the list. He is a year older than you, which is why you did not know about him. What makes him unique? Well, you probably do not remember, but once the seven swordsmen were on a mission, and there were Konoha Genin there. We were going to kill them and move on, but one of their dads showed up. And he used something called the gates, and he killed 3 of the 7 swordsmen, but the last gate of the jutsu killed him. Really? Yes, and that man’s son is Might Guy, who, when using the 6th or the 7th gate, is an S-rank ninja. It greatly increases power and speed to extremely impressive levels. Even though they look like father and son, Rock Lee was an orphan, and he training under his style. So do you hate him for killing your comrades? Haku You have been in the ninja world; you should know better than that. If everyone held grudges on the past, we would always be at war. Yes, Zabuza-sama.

Haku was at her favorite training ground at 5 am throwing her senbon at targets off extremely tough angles, and then she heard it again. This is a most youthful morning, Lee! Yosh Guy sensei! We will do our 500 warm-up laps around the village, sensei. Oh, hello again, lady, have a most youthful training session Haku nodded. Now, of course, she thought they were all talk about the 500 laps being a warm-up. They completed all of their laps in very impressively quick time. When they got back, they did not look nearly as fatigued as one would expect. She was curious what that banging sound was, so she went to the trees and blended in with the surroundings. Due to her time with Zabuza working on assassination missions, she was very good at not being seen. She saw Rock Lee kicking a tree. 403,404. 405,406. She saw him do 1,000 kicks both legs without his sensei; his work ethic was impressive. She could tell that he was much better than the average 9-year-old in Taijustu by a lot. Haku started heading home after her snooping. She was thinking about how much her life had changed before moving to the village; she really used to just view herself as a tool for Zabuza. But when they moved to the village, she was surprised at how quickly he said he would adopt her. And while they were living together, she felt less like only a tool for him. Zabuza would cook dinner when he was not on missions and still train her. And he would ask her how her day was and things that made her start to think that he may care for her. Now Zabuza would never come out and say such things; he showed no emotions. But his actions were very different than you would expect for the last two years. Even though Zabuza put effort into her training, which she appreciated. She was feeling that she may have been reaching a ceiling with her family justu. There were no texts for her family; justu there was nothing. But she was very speed-oriented in fighting, and if she learned those gates, maybe she could throw the senbon with incredible force. She wanted to ask Might Guy if she could be trained by him. Before moving to the Mist village with Zabuza, she never would have asked him to let Guy train her. Originally, she was supposed to be a tool for his wishes only. But she did not want Zabuza to feel like she was abandoning him. She thought that she should tell him her wishes. Due to the better treatment she has had, recently she may no longer be a tool to Zabuza. Hi, Zabuza, are you home? Yes Haku. Haku got on her hands and knees and said, I think if I got trained by Might Guy, that I would become stronger. I use speed in my fighting style already, and if I could use the 8 gates, it would greatly increase the damage and range to my senbon. Haku, as I have gotten older, I have realized that putting you in a situation where I made you feel like a tool was a mistake. I am sorry. You are not my tool; you are your own person. Good luck. Haku saw Zabuza walk away, but she could not help but cry because now she felt more free to be her own individual.

The next morning at 5 am, Haku stopped Guy and Lee during their workout. Hi, my name is Haku. I have heard that you use the 8 gates; is that correct? Yes, it is a very youthful fighting style with speed and power. Yeah, and when you are in those 8 gates, could it allow you to throw stuff hard? Yeah, I guess it could be used for that purpose. But you have to build up your body to an extreme degree during training so the power does not kill you. Which is why I have the most youthful training! Can I be trained by you? I feel like I have hit a ceiling. I was born with ice release, but there is nobody else alive with that ability. So I have no clue how to improve my clan's jutsu. I do use senbon and know the pressure points on the body, and I could become very strong with that ability. Please train me. Might Guy knew that if it was easy to do his training regime, then everyone would have the 8 gates. He knew that she did have a good work ethic, but she would have to go to another level in training intensity. He did not know if she did have the ability to train more intensely. My training style requires a very strong work ethic. You must prove to me that you can handle the hard training. We're doing 500 laps around the village every day. And then training after. If you can just do the 500 laps today. I will train you. Thank you, Guy. Sensie. Haku started running with them; she was able to keep pace for about 100 laps, but then her legs started to feel heavy. She started to slow down a bit, realizing that Guy probably did not expect her to keep pace with them but to see if she had the toughness to finish. She had to remind herself of the long-term goal each time that Guy and Rock Lee lapped her. She had a natural feeling of jealousy and incompetence. She slowed down the pace, and around lap 200 she got what is called a runner's second lung, and it started to become easier. Around lap 300, she realized that she was probably at her limit. Guy and Rock Lee were no longer lapping her, so she knew they must be finished. Then she realized that without her pushing past her limits, she would never grow to the level that she hoped. So even though her legs felt like concrete, she ran. At lap 400, she was only running through sheer willpower at this point. After finishing her 500th lap, Guy walked out of the tree line. He was watching her the whole time, and he was definitely impressed. Around lap 300, he could tell that she was at her limit, so her making it to lap 500 was impressive. She definitely had the mental toughness needed for his extreme training style. He was surprised because usually girls that age just chase boys and do not take the ninja arts seriously. She definitely came off as mature for her age, so it would make sense. That was a most youthful training session, Haku! I will train you with Rock Lee. Thank you, Guy Sensei.

The next day, Rock Lee saw Haku and got red in the face and said, I love you, Haku. Lee blew a kiss to Haku, who did not move. Lee, why do you love me? You are the most beautiful flower! Lee, that just means you find me attractive. Love is deeper than that. Well, you work hard, so that is something that I love about you. Lee Love is much deeper than that. How about this? I will give you a challenge, Lee. I will go out with you if, every day at 4:45 am, before training for a whole year straight, you tell me one different reason why you love me every single day. And you are not allowed to say anything about my looks. That is a most youthful challenge, Haku! For the next year, Lee held up his end, telling her a different reason why he liked her at the same time every day. It was definitely a very romantic gesture, and over that year she did grow to like certain qualities about Lee. He had a very good work ethic and was mentally tough. He was very gentlemanly with people. She couldn't count the number of times she saw him help old ladies across the road and open doors for others. He was a very positive person; she never really saw him in a bad mood or mean to anyone. Sure, was he too loud? yes. Was he very awkward in public? Yes. Did that green jumpsuit not make him look good? Yes. Was his haircut very rough? Yes. Honestly, she could not lie; some of those odd things he did started to become cute to her. She liked how Lee was always Lee; there was nothing fake about him. After a year, it also became very obvious how much Lee looked up to Guy and idolized him. So wanting to be like his idol is something she could understand no matter how odd it looked. Alright, Rock Lee I will go on a date with you tonight. Where do you want to go? I would like to take you to a movie and then dinner, and then we can walk around the flower fields after. Okay, Lee, at what time are you going to pick me up? 5 pm sounds good, Lee.Yosh! It will be a most youthful night! Lee Take this. Lee saw that there was a bag with nice clothes and pants. You may not know Lee, but on a date you are supposed to dress nicely, so I found an outfit that would look good on you. Haku, that is so sweet, my flower; that is why I love you! I will pick you up at 5! Haku walked back home, and she could not help but maybe think that she loved him back.

At 5 pm, Lee knocked on Haku’s front door with a flower in hand. But instead of his love, Zabuza Momochi opened the door with his sword on his shoulder. I heard you are taking Haku on a date tonight, right? Yes, I am very much looking forward to taking her out tonight! Do you know who I am? Zabuza Momochi, one of the 7 swordsmen. Yes, I am. My sword is the Kubikiribocho. Do you know what my sword's special ability is? As it absorbs blood, it repairs itself. That is correct. Do you know what that means? Zabuza made direct eye contact with Lee and said cutting off your second ball will be easier than the first. Zabuza saw the look of shock on Lee’s face, who did not respond. Let's make a few things clear here, Lee. If you cheat, lie, lead on Haku, or anything like that, you will be ball-less. Am I understood? Yes, I will treat Haku in a most youthful manner! Also, curfew: Haku needs to be home at 11, so when will she be home? By 11 pm, Zabuza-sama! Lee saw Haku walk downstairs in a very pretty blue dress, and he was amazed at how pretty she looked.

Haku, you look so beautiful today. Here are some flowers I brought you. Thank you, Lee; they are very nice. Lee walked Haku to the movie. Haku had said that she liked sci-fi movies, so he took her there. Haku had to tell Lee to quiet his tone whenever screaming about parts that he found very youthful. Lee took Haku to a palace that had seafood since it was her favorite food. Lee I do not know much about you. Like your life and family. Well, my parents were chunin in Konoha, and they both passed away on missions. Then I was in an orphanage. I started the Ninja Academy, and everyone said I would never be a ninja because I could only do Taijutsu. I wanted to prove everyone wrong that I could do it, and I worked really hard. And Guy would talk to me every once in a while. Eventually Guy Sensie told me that he would adopt me and take me to the Mist. Do you like being here so far? Yes! I get to work out with Guy Sensi every day. Do you know what your parents were like? No, I wish I did; I am sure they were most youthful! What about you, Haku? At around the age of 3, I realized I could do ice release. So I proudly showed my mom that I could do it, but then she hit me. Evidently, she was trying to hide that she had the ice release. This is when blood limit users were being killed. My dad got a mob of people and killed my mom, and then I killed my dad and the mob of people. Lee saw some tears running down her face, and Lee put his hands on hers and tried to comfort her. I totally understand if you want to tell me the rest another time, Haku. Thank you, Lee, but no, the rest is not as bad. I was orphaned like you and living in the streets. Zabuza found me and wanted to use me as a tool for his ambitions. We eventually became rogue ninjas and took assassination missions and high-priced guard duties. Then Zabuza saw the letter Itachi passed out, and we came back to the mist. How has it been living with Zabuza? It has been good; I have gotten more comfortable with time with him. They finished their dinner, and then Lee was taking the long way back to Haku’s house, which had many flowers and trees. Thank you, Lee, for taking me out. I had fun. I had a most youthful night as well. Haku I will take you out next week as well! I am looking forward to it, Lee. Haku put her head on Lee’s shoulder while walking back. When they got home, Haku could tell Lee was super nervous about what to do. So Haku kissed Lee’s forehead and told him to have a good night.She could see Lee’s face get super red and happy. I love you. Have a most youthful night as well, Haku! I love you too, Lee. I will see you tomorrow. Haku giggled as she saw Lee sprint away. Lee could not believe his luck that a girl that pretty and nice loved him. It made him think that he was in some sort of dream.

Chapter 15: Chapter 15 7 swordsmen part 1

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon and not try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch 15

(1 year time skip)

Hi, Itachi-sama, These are the files on Choji, Shikimaru, Rock Lee, Naruto, Ino, Sasuke, Mindy, Chojuro, Hinata, Haku, and Shino. Thank you, Zabuza; bring Kisame here as well. If we think about an individual for the sword and they have clan-specific stuff, we will stop the meeting and go talk to their parents. I want to make sure we are as informed as possible before making these decisions, okay? Yes, Mizukage-sama. All right, thank you, Kisame and Zabuza, for coming. Yes, Itachi. We could, in theory, involve more people in this meeting. The reason why I want this to be decided by us three is that your opinions are much more qualified than anyone else's. We are choosing 5 of the 7 swordsmen of the mist. You are the only 2 swordsmen we currently have. I do not want your guys opinions being drowned out by other less qualified people. A lot of our uniquely talented options are from the Leaf Village, and I know their jutsu very well. I will make one thing very clear, though. Even if you disagree with me on something, you must say it. If you do not feel comfortable doing that, then leave. I understand Itachi, said Zabuza. Yeah, yeah, let's get on with it. The longer we delay it, the hungrier my sharks get, said Kisame.

Alright, before getting into this, I would like to discuss a topic. I personally feel like every swordsman today that we choose should be like you two. What do you mean, Itachi? Well, Kisame would be at least an A-rank ninja without his sword. Between his shark Justu, his strength, and his great water ninjutsu, he would be a high-ranking fighter without the sword. But with a sword that grows his chakra reserves so much, it makes him a ninjustu beast and someone you cannot beat close range. That sword is a picture-perfect fit to grow an already good skill set. Changing Kisame from a midrange fighter to a close range and midrange fighter. Zabuza, you have very good water ninjustu as well; without the sword, you would be a low A rank ninja, but adding the sword also makes you very good up close as well. Just like Kisame, you go from a midrange fighter to a close range and midrange fighter. What I am getting at is that our goal should be to make the strongest 5 ninja’s in the village with these swords. For example, the last person to use the helmet splitter sword was Jinin Akeibino, who may have been a level of Chunin, who was just strong before getting the helmet splitter sword.When Jinin Akeibio gets the sword, he is just a close-range specialist with no other threats. That is exactly what I do not want. That makes sense Itachi Zabuza said back. I am sure you guys are wondering why not just give the swords to established Jonin that are in the village? Older ninjas usually have a defined fighting style that may not pair as well with their fighting style as hoped. Let's take Kakashi, for example. He has lighting release, so in theory we would give him the Kiba sword, which naturally emits lightning chakra and puts a lower cost on Ninjustu. But Kakskhi would never fight with the sword in his hand. His Chidori has way more piercing power than the sword. He has been sparing Might Guy in taijustu since he was young, so he would be better with that than the sword. Kakashi is a very good example that they are not as effective as they would be if they got it younger and built their style around the sword. I think we could all agree that Kakashi would be stronger if he had the sword at a younger age and grew his skill set around the sword. Kisame and Zabuza both nodded, knowing the point of what Itachi was saying was correct.

I am aware that through Kiri’s history, if you defeat a swordsman, you get their sword, correct? Yes, you either get it that way or someone dies and it is given to you. That is the way it has always been, Itachi. Yes, Kisame, it has always been that way. Kisame, how much weaker would you be with Zabuza’s sword? Much less strong due to me having extremely elite water ninjutsu. The chakra-absorbing capabilities with the sword increase my ninjustu abilities. Zabuza, how would having Kisame’s sword have the samahada effect on your fighting abilities? Having the samahada would not make me a better fighter due to my silent killing abilities. The reparrying aspect of my sword fits more with my style of fighting than the samahada sword. This is 100% my point; the way it used to be set up does not make sense to me. It does not make sense because the ideal skill set is not always paired with the correct sword. There is only one ninja through history that was equally as good with all swords. That was Mangetsu, who was able to liquefy his body at will. Due to that, it did not matter what sword he had; he was good with all of them. On top of that, I think killing off one of your top 20 ninjas just for a ritual is just stupid. The point of this is that if we pull these kids out of the academy right now, they will grow with their swords. Zabuza and Kisame, do you understand this? Yes, Mizukage, they both replied at the same time. Alright, what sword do you want to start with?

Itachi could tell Zabuza felt strongly about one of them. Go ahead, Zabuza. The sword I think is very obviously meant for one of them is the Hiramekeri. Go ahead and bring up Naruto’s profile. As we all know, he is the 9-tails Jinchuriki with extremely high chakra reserves. He uses shadow clones to learn multiple things at once. One of those things is the Hirashan. He is extremely creative in fights and really can think on his feet. The Hiramekeri is capable of storing chakra, and the two holes at the tip of the blade emit it on command. This can then be formed into various weapons, including a hammer or a longer sword. The size of the resulting weapon appears to depend upon the amount of chakra stored up beforehand, meaning a larger quantity will be met with a similar increase in the weapon's ultimate size. I mean, could you imagine the damage the sword of the Jinchuriki of the strongest Biju in history that grows as big as the chakra reserves are? On top of that, it can take many forms, and he is incredibly creative. On top of that, he could put the Hirishan seal on this sword and transport it where the sword goes and use its ridiculous power to kill people. I mean, this, in my opinion, is 100% his sword. He already easily had S-ranked potential, but after this he has the top 5 strongest in the world potential. Yeah, I am sure you know that he needs time to start to bring out Biju’s energy, Zabuza. Would that happen after the sword training? No, I think he should do them both at the same time, Itachi. He should use his real body to train with the Biju. I want him to train over the next two years with the thought process of using Biju’s chakra with the sword. We have no clue if it will take him a long time to figure out how to do it. I don't want this guy going in the field and getting killed young because he was underdeveloped with all of the obvious potential he has. He will use his shadow clones during his sword training, and if they disperse in the training, he will just have to send more. He can create hundreds of them right now. It’s not like his shadow clones studying the Hirashan will pop, so it's not like it will interrupt it. We have two years to have him grow. During his breaks from training with the Jinchuriki, he will have to train his body. His wrists, forearms, core, and shoulder and back muscles are the ones that he will have to focus on. Okay, I will have to summon Yagura back to the village and have him train Naruto in all of those things. Is there anything else? Naruto’s chakra nature is wind, so Yagura should make him make clones to have him start practicing wind chakra. He is a very upbeat and happy person. He works hard and has dreams of becoming Mizukage. He will be a good influence on others in the training.That all makes sense, Zabuza. Kisame, do you disagree with this? No, I agree with Zabuza; he is the obvious choice. I agree with you both as well. Naruto will be the wielder of the Hiramekeri.

Itachi, the next sword I want to talk about is the Kiba sword. It is a pair of swords, each with slim and straight double-edged blades. Both blades also have an upward-curved, bladed prong near the tip of one side of the blade and another one near the base of the blade's other side. They each have been imbued with lightning, displaying enhanced cutting power. They allow the user to transform and manipulate lightning freely. They also boost the user's attack power to the highest limit, which allows them to perform high-level Lightning Release techniques with a minimal cost of chakra. These blades can channel the user's own respective lightning techniques or conduct natural lightning. As long as there is natural lighting to access, the user can battle continuously without tiring and launch lightning from the sky to strike anywhere within a large area. They can also be connected at the hilts to form a larger double-bladed sword. They are able to perform various long-distance, powerful, and defensive techniques, either lightning-based or imbued with it. I personally think Sasuke is the correct user for this sword. His chakra nature is lightning, and he has very good chakra reserves. He would be a good fit. Zabuza turned to Itachi. Zabuza, those are good points, but his Susanoo has an arrow in his fully manifested form, which is very powerful. I do not think it would make sense for him to have a sword that he could not use with his Susanoo. What are our other options, Zabuza? Hinata’s chakra nature is lightning, so that would make sense. Chojoro has good chakra reserves even though his chakra nature is water. We could teach him lightning, and he could use both. Mindy looks like she was as gifted as Mei with her water, fire, and earth chakra natures, but her learning lightning chakra nature on top of that would be unrealistic. Rock Lee does not have enough chakra to use the sword. I want to get this out of the way. I do not think that Rock Lee should be a swordsman at all. His potential is 100% tied to him working with Might Guy as a taijutsu specialist. His potential with any one of the swords is lower than his potential being trained by Might Guy. Do you guys agree that we should not bring him up for any of the swords? Itachi and Kisame nodded their heads to Zabuza. Haku has Ice Release, but her potential is as a long-range specialist, not a ninjutsu beast. I personally think that out of those options, Chojuro would be the best choice. With his good chakra reserves and him using lightning and water, Justu would make him a Ninjustu beast, especially with the reduced chakra costs. Hinata may have lightning chakra, but her chakra reserves are average at best. Kisame spoke: I do agree with Zabuza, though Itachi, that Sasuke is the best choice. I mean, if he could use the sword in his Susanoo, it would make him a Ninjutsu beast. It would also increase his non-Susanoo power, which would make him have to use it less. What is the harm in checking if he can use the Kiba sword with his Susanoo Itachi? I mean, if he could, his potential may rival the power of my Susanoo one day. The Susanoo already greatly increases the power of Ninjutsu; the combination between that and the sword would be unbelievable. I will go check with Sasuke to see if he can merge the Kiba sword with his Susanoo.

Sasuke We are very far away from the village right now so that we do not damage anything. Yes, Itachi. Alright, we are going to test something today. Sounds good. What are we testing, brother? Well, you know how you have your bow and arrow with your susanoo? Yes, Itachi, that arrow is so cool in my Susanoo! And I have big wings with my purple susanoo that allow me to fight at range. Okay, yes, we are going to see if you can add a different weapon to your susanoo. Here this is a sword. This sword is the kiba blade; it is one of the 7 swords of the mist. This blade is extremely sharp and conducts lighting chakra naturally. On top of that, it makes all ninjustu cost less chakra-wise. Do you remember when we tested your chakra nature and it was lightning? Yes brother! Well, we are thinking of giving this blade to you. Go ahead and do 5 fire-style ninjustu, and then do 5 of them with the sword. Yes Itachi! Itatchi watched Sauske do his firestyle ninjustu, which had gotten much stronger and wider than 2 years ago. Now with the ninjustu you did with the sword, did they use less of your chakra? Yes! It was so cool! Okay, so what I want you to do is really focus on crating your Susanoo and adding that sword to it instead of your bow and arrow, okay? Yes, Itachi, I will do it! After about 20 seconds later, Itachi saw Sauskee’s purple susanoo with the Kiba sword in his hands. Itachi got into his orange susanoo form and put up his Yata mirror. Sauske, send 10 fire ninjsutu and let me know if the chakra costs are less. Yes brother! Sauske sent the 10 fire ninjustu at Itatchi that looked like it was doing no damage to Itachi’s yata mirror. Yes, Itachi, they barley drained my chakra. Okay, can you still use your bow as well? Itachi saw him go back and forth from the sword to the bow and arrow. Itachi deactivated the susanoo, not wanting to test his yata mirror verses that crazy powerful Indra’s arrow today. Deactivate your, Susanoo Sauske. Yes Itachi. Let's head back home. I am proud of how much your, fire Justu, have improved Sauske. Thank you, brother. Will I be able to use the sword? I am not 100% certain yet; we are still deciding. Okay, brother, if I get the sword, I will look so cool! Maybe our nickname will be the 4 red-eye lighting sword brothers? That would be so cool, right, Itachi? Sorry, Sauske, that nickname is to long; nobody would use it. Awww, man, it was such a good idea. Itachi walked Sauske back home, feeling very good that Sauske could be such a happy person after the Uchiha clan massacare.

Hi, Zabuza and Kisame Are you guys ready to start talking about the swordsman again? Yes, Kazekage-sama. So yes, Sasuke could add the sword to his Susanoo. Sasuke did say that it did not drain on his chakra as much using the sword in the Susanoo while using ninjutsu. I am guessing that means he is going to wield the sword? Yes, Itachi, it is perfectly suited for him. He will be a ninjutsu specialist for sure. We should have him train with Kakashi, whose chakra nature is lightning as well, to master it. Yeah, that makes sense. Alright, Zabuza, which sword do you want to talk about next? The Nibari, which is a narrow, long sword. It has a long length of thin wire, mirroring thread, tied through the eye located at the base of its hilt. It has the ability to pierce all and stitch them together. It can effortlessly penetrate multiple targets in a single thrust. The sword can also be thrown to pierce enemies. The thread can be used to bind someone to a certain spot as well. Okay, Zabuza, who do you think should have it? At first, I thought Haku before she started training with Might Guy to open the 8 gates. Her potential is being a long-range senbon specialist. She can use multiple senbon as attacks with the 8 gates. What makes her scary is she could use hundreds of senbon. If she was limited to just one thing she could throw, like the sword, her long-range potential would never be realized. It just does not make sense for her. For me personally, I feel like Chojuro, Hinata, or Shikamaru would be the right choice for the sword. Because Chojuro could use his water ninjutsu, on top of the sword, he would be a midrange fighting specialist for sure. Is it correct, Itachi, that the gentle fist turns off chakra points? Yes, Zabuza, that is correct. Well, if Hinata could turn off the pressure points with an already long sword, that would make getting close to her really tough, right? Yes, she would be very tough to fight against in the normal Tiajustu range with that. Her chakra nature is lightning as well, so the piercing power of the sword would greatly be increased if she were able to encase it in a lightning chakra. Yeah, that would make a lot of sense. Kisame, it looks like you're thinking of something. Can the Byakugan see through the walls, Itachi? Yes, they can, Kisame. What if, after teaching her lighting chakra nature, we teach earth ninjutsu? Imagine if she could build a wall and then encase the Nuibari in lightning chakra and stab them through the wall. A normal person in that situation would stab someone through the shoulder or miss entirely. But that would not be an issue for her. She would just stab them through the heart or the head.I think giving Hinata the Nuibari makes a lot of sense. I would agree with you, Kisame. Itachi, am I right that Shikamaru will always have to keep his handsigns active for his family jutsu? Yes, that is correct. So you have never seen anyone ever do it one-handed. No, never. Even though his intelligence would be interesting. We cannot put the sword in the hands of someone who cannot use it. So I agree with you, Kisame and Itachi, that Hinata should be the sword-wielder of the Nuibari.

Alright, Zabuza Which sword do you want to talk about next? I think the Shibuki should be next.The blade utilizes various explosive tags contained within a substantial scroll. The sword itself features two distinct sides, with a narrow cutting edge located down the entirety of one length and a wide platform section on the other. The aforementioned scroll unrolls along this latter side, sliding downwards and resting atop its surface to form an individual segment comprised of numerous explosive tags, which separates from the remainder upon detonation. The sword is able to reload another segment of tags onto the platform automatically after each strike. A skilled user of the sword can make the exploding tags go much farther than the sword for some midrange assaults.I feel like Mindy, Shino, and Chojuro are the frontrunners for this sword. With Mindy being given the same gifts as Mei, she would have very strong ninjutsu abilities. It would be interesting if she could add an acidic element to these paper bombs. Zabuza I will go ahead and stop you there, and then we will bring in Mei and see if this is a possible thing. Yes, Itachi.

Hi Mei, thank you for coming. Anything for my handsome man; you look so good when you are focused. Zabuza, Mei, and Kisame saw a rare blush from Itachi, which made them smile. Thank you, Mei. We are deciding who will be the next 7 swordsman of the mist, and MIndy was brought up as a possible weilder of the Shibuki sword, and since it looks like she has very similar potential as you, we wanted to know what you thought about her learning to be a swordsman? Well, between mastering 4 chakra natures and perfecting 2 Kekkei Genkai releases takes at least a decade. She started training when she was 8, but with the two years to learn the sword, it would be a little unrealistic. She probably starts taking missions at 12, and I would be worried about her dying when she is weaker with her ninjustu before reaching her potential. That makes sense; learning that many different things sounds tough. Yes, and you have to completely master them to be able to use them in the Kekkei genkai as well. That makes sense Thank you for letting us know, Mei.Of course, my handsome man, I will see you later. Mei gave Itachi a passionate kiss and then left. Itatchi’s face was red again; he should have known that Mei would not feel socially awkward to do that around others in his MIzukage office.

It looks like it is between Shino and Chojuro for the Shibuki. Well, Chojuro, like previously talked about, is a ninjutsu specialist, so he would be a good fit with the sword. He could possibly fill up his water jutsu with the paper bombs, but bombs underwater are not super effective. Itachi looked at Kisame after Zabuza described Chojuro’s abilities. He could tell that he had a good idea again. I know Shino’s clan uses bugs at long range to poison or absorb chakra, right? Yeah, they are usually long-range fighters. Yes, the way to beat Aburame clan members is to usually fight at close range. Well, if we made him a swordsman now, he cannot be beaten at close range. Zabuza wrote down that he also has two chakra natures with fire and earth, so he could mix in defensive and offensive ninjutsu on top of it. But what really interests me is what if he could use his paper bombs with his bugs to use at long range. And how rare is it to have paper bombs that actually can move midair to their target? That sounds like a super tough combination with this poison and chakra-draining abilities. Wow, Kisame That is a very good idea. On top of that, Shino’s clan jutsu does not require hand signs. I will go talk to Shino’s dad.

Hi Shibi, It is nice to see you. Thank you for coming, Mizukage. How can I help you? This is Shibuki, one of the 7 swords of the mist. It has the ability to generate paper bombs. We are thinking of giving this sword to your son, Shino. Can you come with me to a wooded area? I want to see if you can do something. Okay, since we are in this field, I was curious if you could use your bugs to pick up the exploding tags from the sword and have them attack some trees. Itachi saw Shibi take many of the exploding tags from the sword and move them in multiple different directions, exploding many trees in the process. Well, that answers one of my questions. I have another question, Shibi. The training process for learning the sword would be about two years. Do you think that Shino would be able to do this training while still being good at mastering your clan jutsu? Yes, or clan members learn how to use our jutsu very easily. What allows us to grow with it is using it in battle and coming up with new and creative ways to use it. Thank you very much for your help. Shibi I am going to head back to the office. Itachi got a nod back from the famously quiet Aburame clan head and then went back to his office.

Hello Kisame and Zabuza, are you ready to start this meeting again? Yes Itachi. I found out that Shibi could use his bugs to move the exploding tags in multiple different directions. He also did confirm that the 2-year training regime for becoming a swordsman would not inhibit his growth with the clan justu. I was told that they really just need combat to come up with creative ways to use their justu with time. That is good news, Itachi. I personally feel like he is the better choice than Chojuro. Yea, I agree with Zabuza that he is the right fighter over Chojuro with that sword. With him having fire and earth chakra natures, he can really fight at any range. It would almost like fighting against someone with a 10-minute clock, and if you do not defeat him, you lose due to the chakra-draining and poisoning effect of his bugs. He would truly be scary. He could be as strong as me one day. Itachi looked at Zabuza and Kisame and knew they were correct. Let's give the Shibuki to Shino.

Chapter 16: Chapter 16 The 7 swordsmen Part 2

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon and not try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. (I do own how it literally took me 5 days to decide who to give the helmet splitter sword to.).

Ch 16

Zabuza, go ahead and explain the last sword. Yes, Itachi. The sword is the Kabutowari. The sword itself consists of a giant axe and hammer, linked end-to-end by a flat, thin, leather-like rope, which together are referred to as a bluntsword. It is said to be able to break through any defense. The length of the cord means each weapon can be utilized individually. They can be employed in conjunction with one another. When facing a particularly difficult defense, the wielder can first attack by striking with the axe before slamming the hammer downwards onto its blunt backside. thus using the blade like a wedge to drive straight through the defense. It can be used to create a powerful shock wave by slamming it into the ground. We only have two real options for this blade, which are Choji and Cjojuro. Choji is part of the Akimichi clan, who are super strong. On top of that, he has fire ninjutsu and earth ninjutsu. And like mentioned previously, Chojuro is a water ninjutsu specialist with good chakra reserves. Well, Zabuza and Kisame, you guys may not be aware, but they have the ability to become massive. Like the size of a 4- to 5-story building. On top of that, they usually use a bowstaff so that they can make the bow grow bigger. So in theory, Choji could make the Kabutowari that big, and in that powerful mode, he would be in an extremely powerful state. Wow, that is impressive. We should put this meeting on hold while you talk to his father about that. Alright, see you guys soon.

Hi Choza, How are you doing today? Good, thank you for coming, Itachi. So this sword is the Kabutowari, which is a very powerful sword. It is also one of the 7 swords of the mist. We are thinking of giving the sword to your son, Choji. Let's go to this field nearby; there are some things that I am curious about. Yes, Itachi. Choza followed Itachi into the field he was leading him to. Wherever you get big, you take a bowstaff and make it bigger, right? Yes, Itachi. Well, I want to see if you can make the Kabutowari bigger as well. When the hammer hits the blunt side of the sword, it greatly increases its power. Can you go ahead and hit the ground while in your big state, please? Itachi saw Choza make the Kabutowari bigger as well as he got bigger. Itatchi saw Choza hit the ground, and there was a huge crater in the ground, which was impressively big. You can exit that big form, Choza. How much more power did that generate compared to your guys normal bowstaff? Probably about 2 times; it definitely is a very powerful weapon. At what age would Choji be able to do that? Probably 17, 18, or 19 years old. Okay, that sounds good. Thank you for your help. Any time, Itachi.

Hi Zabuza and Kisame, Are you guys ready to resume the meeting? Yes, Itachi, we are ready. It looks like Choza could make the sword get bigger with him, like with his bowstaff. He told me that he was about 2 times stronger with the sword than the bowstaff. It does sound like it would take Choji until he is between 17 and 19 to use the jutsu to that level. So with the 2-year sword training, he would be 19-21 before being able to use that function. I think we should give Choji the sword Kisame and Zabuza. Even though he will not be able to expand to the degree as his father for many years. He is still going to be very strong. With the sword in his hands, he will be so powerful in close-range situations. And we can teach him fire ninjustu to make him more diverse. And when he does figure out his clan-specific justu, he will be even more scary and strong. Zabuza, what do you think? Well, he will be very powerful with the sword from a young age. He has fire ninjustu, which is offensive. Earth style is mostly a defensive ninjustu. With Choji’s powerful style, teaching him earth jutsu would not make sense. So I agree with you, Itachi, if we do give him the sword, we should focus on his fire ninjustu only. Chojuro does have his water ninjustu and great chakra reserves. Itachi I think it should go to Chojuro since he will not always be surrounded by ninja like Shikamaru and Ino with their extremely elite support abilities. Due to those clans abilities to keep people in place, this is the reason why the Akimichi clans abilities are so effective. A swordsman will never go on a non-S rank mission that has as much quality support as the Nara, Akimichi, and Yamanka trio has had for a long time. And then how effective would he be against non-stationary ninjas? Like any A-ranked ninja that has a speed advantage on him would give him issues. That’s probably like 60% of A-ranked ninja’s that fit that description. And those are the exact kinds of missions Swordsman go on. On top of that, how would he handle long-range Ninjas without them? Yeah, I understand what you are saying, Zabuza. We could just have one of you two as the Jonin Sensie of the Ino, Shikamaru, and Choji trio. No, Itachi, all 5 of the swordsmen need to be on teams together to compete with each other as Genin. On top of that, the sword would not help his beast ball Justu either. Kisasme, we are tied; which one do you think should have the sword? Itachi, I think it should be Chojuruo as well. I would agree with you if Choji could master that function by 14 or something like that. But he may not survive with the dangerous missions that the 7 swordsmen of the mist take. I am sure you would agree that until Choji figured out how to become the size of Choza and grow to that size, Chojuro would be stronger. On top of that, Chojuro is the only water Ninjustu user with good chakra reserves here. His potential being taught by us is much closer to that potential version of Choji after being able to expand the sword to that size than I think you are giving credit for. On top of that, every person we just gave a sword to has never held a sword a day in their life. Chojuro has always dreamed of being one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist. He has been training with the sword since he was 4. Having someone so advanced their own age will make Naruto, Sauske, Shino, and Hinata become much better with the sword being around him. He has a very good work ethic as well. In my opinion, he should be a swordsman. Itachi, after taking in all of that information, felt like his choice had changed. Yeah, Zabuza and Kisame, you guys are right. Chojuro will be the wielder of the Kabutowari. We will go ahead and call every new swordsman in the office. Zabuza, you will explain to them their training over the next two years. You will also be the head of their training for the next two years. Yes Itachi.

Alright, thank you all for coming. Sasuke, Naruto, Shino, Hinata, and Chojuro, you are all going to become the 7 swordsmen of the hidden mist. As you are aware, the 7 swordsmen of the mist strike fear into others. They are ninjas who are at the top of the list of the strongest ninjas in the Mist. They are respected within the village. It is the greatest non-Mizukage rank that can be granted. As you are aware, there are currently two swordsmen of the hidden mist village. Kisame, who is right there, and Zabuza Momochi. Zabuza is very talented at developing young children into their potential. For the next two years, you guys will take your normal classes with Zabuza, but you will have extensive swordsman training as well. 4 of you have never held a sword a day in your life, so the basics will need to be drilled into you. Your school days will be much longer than for normal academy students. And the training will be much tougher than anything your academy students are doing as well. Zabuza, go ahead and give out the swords and explain to them the vision behind giving each person their swords. Yes, Mizukage-sama.

We will go ahead and start off with Sasuke. This is the Kiba sword. It is a pair of swords, each with slim and straight double-edged blades. Both blades also have an upward-curved, bladed prong near the tip of one side of the blade and another one near the base of the blade's other side. They each have been imbued with lightning. displaying enhanced cutting power. They allow the user to transform and manipulate lightning freely. They also boost the user's attack power to the highest limit, which allows them to perform high-level Lightning Release techniques with a minimal cost of chakra. These blades can channel the user's own respective lightning techniques or conduct natural lightning. As long as there is natural lighting to access, the user can battle continuously without tiring and launch lightning from the sky to strike anywhere within a large area. They can also be connected at the hilts to form a larger double-bladed sword. They are able to perform various long-distance, powerful, and defensive techniques, either lightning-based or imbued with it. Sasuke Your chakra nature is lightning, so you will be very dangerous with this sword. On top of that, you have very good chakra reserves. We did test it with your Susanoo, and you said that you felt less chakra drain. Mastering fire and lightning releases will be the main training focus over the next few years with this sword. Thank you. Zabuza handed the sword to Sasuke.

Naruto, this is the Hiramekeri.The Hiramekeri is capable of storing chakra, and the two holes at the tip of the blade emit it on command. This can then be formed into various weapons, including a hammer or a longer sword. The size of the resulting weapon appears to depend upon the amount of chakra stored up beforehand, meaning a larger quantity will be met with a similar increase in the weapon's ultimate size. These weapons are also formed with speed. Naruto, you are the 9-tails jinchuriki. Because of this, you have very large chakra reserves. With these chakra reserves, you will be able to make the size and damage of this sword massive. Also, if you do figure out the hirashion, you will be able to put the seal on the sword and transport it with you. You are very creative, and the sword takes on many forms that are up to the user’s imagination. We will bring back the 3-tailed jinchuriki to train you. You will use a shadow clone for this training, and your real body will be mastering the 9 tails.Thank you. Zabuza handed the sword to Naruto.

Hinata, this is the Nuibari, which is a narrow longsword. It has a long length of thin wire, mirroring thread, tied through the eye located at the base of its hilt. It has the ability to pierce all and stitch them together. It can effortlessly penetrate multiple targets in a single thrust. The sword can also be thrown to pierce enemies. The thread can be used to bind someone to a certain spot as well. Your chakra nature is lightning, so we think you can encase this sword in lightning and increase its piercing power. The longsword could be used to extend your gentle fist. We are thinking of teaching you to use it in creative ways. We think your byakugan will make you much more accurate on what you puncture than anyone that has ever wielded the sword.Thank you. Zabuza handed the sword to Hinata.

Shino, this is the Shibuki; the blade utilizes various explosive tags contained within a substantial scroll. The sword itself features two distinct sides, with a narrow cutting edge located down the entirety of one length and a wide platform section on the other. The aforementioned scroll unrolls along this latter side, sliding downwards and resting atop its surface to form an individual segment comprised of numerous explosive tags, which separates from the remainder upon detonation. The sword is able to reload another segment of tags onto the platform automatically after each strike. A skilled user of the sword can make the exploding tags go much farther than the sword for some midrange assaults. With your bugs, you are naturally a long-range specialist, but with a sword, you would be good at close range. Your chakra nature is earth, which can be used defensively to give you more time for your bugs to be effective as well. We talked to your father, and it looks like you could use your bugs to carry the paper bombs as well, which would be interesting. .Thank you. Zabuza handed the sword to Shino.

Chojuro, this is the Kabutowari. The sword itself consists of a giant axe and hammer, linked end-to-end by a flat, thin, leather-like rope, which together are referred to as a bluntsword. It is said to be able to break through any defense. The length of cord means each weapon can be utilized individually. They can be employed in conjunction with one another. When facing a particularly difficult defense, the wielder can first attack by striking with the axe before slamming the hammer downwards onto its blunt backside. thus using the blade like a wedge to drive straight through the defense. It can be used to create a powerful shock wave by slamming it into the ground. Your chakra nature is water, so we think you have some very good midrange fighting potential. On top of that, you have very good chakra reserves. You also have been practicing swordsmanship for many years. During this training camp, we will need you to be an example to your other swordsman on sword fighting. Yes, Zabuza! Thank you. Zabuza handed the sword to Chojuro.

I have high hopes for you all to be great swordsmen of the mist. You will all have to be dedicated to your learning. Yes, Mizukage-sama, they all yelled out at once. Alright, go home and let your parents know the good news. Thank you, Mizukage Sama! They all yelled out at once. Chojuro went home as fast as he could because he could not wait to tell his mom. Mom! Guess what?! I will be one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist, and I was given the Kabutowari! Wow, Chojuro, that is great news! I am so proud of my baby, who works so hard on his swordsmanship practice. Thanks mom Chojuro said back with a tear in his eye. You know what I am going to do? What mom? I will go out and buy some eel today since it is your favorite. How about that? Yes, mom, that sounds great! Your father is coming back from his mission tomorrow, so you will have to give him the good news. Yes, mom, I will tell him!

Shino walked through the door of his house with the Shibuki in hand. Hi Dad, they gave me this sword. I will become one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist. That is good news, Shino. I am proud of you.I have some new bugs I found today. Let's go look at them. Shino thought about how some people would see his family and think they were not close. But they just did not show much emotion and were mostly quiet loner types. He knew his dad was proud of him, and that was all he needed. And he liked researching bugs with him.

When Naruto and Hinata got to their house, outside of it was Ino. Hinata, what happened? I saw you got pulled out of class with Naruto, Hinata, Shino, Sasuke, and Chojuro. Wwe all got one of the 7 swords of the mist, and we will be the next 7 swordsmen of the mist. Really!!!! That is a great new Hinata. You are going to be such a badass with a sword. Congratulations as well, Naruto! Thank you, Ino! I will go ahead and get you guys a cake and some onigiri for Sasuke. I will be right back. Thank you, Ino! You're welcome, Hinata! Hinata and Naruto walked inside, where they saw Kakashi and Anko inside their home. Guess what, you two? What Naruto? Hinata and I are going to be 2 of the 7 swordsmen of the mist! I got the Hiramekeri sword, and Hinata got the Nuibari sword! Wow, that is great news! Anko replied. Yeah, Itachi told me that Hinata has the same chakra nature as me, so I will be training you in lightning release, Hinata. Thank you, Kakashi Hinata bowed. Ma Ma Hinata, no reason to be so formal. This is great news. I am proud of you both. Ino was waiting outside of our house because she was worried. Right now she is getting a cake and bringing it over. Really? That is great news! I am sure you are happy that you have made such a great friend, Hinata. Anko saw Hinata get red in the face and was so happy for her. When they took her in, she was so quiet and timid. But with time and some prodding, she has watched Hinata grow out of her shell more. Anko knew that the ever-social Ino was a great influence on her, and she was happy for her. She felt so fulfilled helping Hinata through a similar process that Kurenai, her best friend from Konoha, helped her through all of those years ago. She knew that she should have told Kurenia that she was leaving. But she was worried that with Kurenia dating Asuma, that would put Kurenia in a position where she would not be able to follow them to the mist anyway. Did she miss her friend Kurenia? Yes, for sure. But she was building a home with Kakashi, and she was helping raise Naruto and Hinata, which was very fulfilling. On top of that, Kakashi and she were talking about getting married and having kids soon so they would have a little one walking around. She knew Hinata and Naruto would make such good older siblings; she could not wait. She was also very happy to see Naruto and Hinata growing closer. She could tell that Naruto had started to like Hinata back a little bit. Once she started to wear dress-designed ninja outfits that Ino suggested, she could see Naruto start blushing every once in a while over the past year. Naruto was starting to go through puberty, and she could tell that Naruto was starting to see Hinata in a “she’s pretty kind of way." Hinata is always so nice and thoughtful to Naruto that she could tell that Naruto was feeling in a way that he liked her. But she could also tell that Naruto did not know what those emotions he felt toward Hinata meant. Since Naruto did not grow up around a mother or father figure, he really loved Kakashi and me so much. Hinata and he would get them presents for Father's and Mother's Day. A year ago, Naruto started calling her Kasan, which made her so happy. Anko had so many things to be thankful for. She could not believe her luck to have such a great home life.

Anko was brought out of her thoughts when she heard a knock on the door.Hi Ino, thank you for coming. Can I come in, Anko? Yes, Ino, you are always welcome. Here I brought cake. Ino walked in, and she could see the smile on Hinata’s face walking in with the cake. Did you tell Anko about the swords? Yyeah Naruto told them both about us becoming swordsman Hinata replied. That is so great. I am so excited for you, Hinata. You are going to look so graceful fighting with your long sword. Ino could see the blush in Hinata’s face after the compliment. Thank you, Ino. Congratulations to you as well, Naruto. Thank you, Ino. I am one step closer to Mizukage, believe it! Ino spent the next 2 hours at Hinata’s place. HInata I am going to go congratulate Sasuke on being one of the new swordsmen. Ookay Ino, thanks for coming Hinata said before giving Ino a hug as she left the room.

Ino knocked on Sasuke’s door. She saw Sasuke open the door and look confused. Hi Sasuke-kun, I heard from Hinata and Naruto that you are going to be one of the next 7 swordsmen of the mist. To congratulate you, I brought you some onigiri. Ino could see Sasuke's face get red from her thoughtful gesture. Um, thank you. You're welcome, Sasuke. Have a good rest of your day. Ino walked home happy that she got to congratulate her favorite people today. Sasuke walked back inside the house. Mindy and Mei came over to the Uchia house to congratulate Sausuke on him becoming a new 7 swordsman of the mist. They had already had dinner, so he went to go put the onigiri in the fridge. Who was that at the door, Sasuke? Itachi, it was Ino from class. She heard that I had become one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist. She gave me some onigiri, so put it in the fridge. Yeah, Ino likes Sasuke; she thinks he is so dreamy Mindy said to Itachi. Well, at least she is thoughtful as well, Sausuke. Yeah it looks like that girl is coming for your heart Sasuke Mei said to him. Itachi, Mindy, and Mei all grinned at Sasuke. Yeah, I guess Sasuke grinned back. Sasuke was reminded then of the people he wished were still alive. He really wished his mom was here to celebrate today. And his father as well. He wished that he could see them smile again. Feel what it felt like to be around his mother again. He wished that he could go shopping with her and eat one of her home-cooked meals. His eyes started to tear up, and then he ran upstairs. Mei, Mindy, and Itachi all looked worried about Sasuke. Itachi was about to walk up the stairs when Mei put a hand on Itachi’s shoulder and said, Things like this need a womens touch Itachi Mei said and then kissed Itachi on the forehead and went upstairs.

Sasuke I am coming in. Mei walked in and saw Sasuke crying in the corner of the room. Mei walked over to hug Sasuke while he was crying. Sasuke went away from her and said, You are not my mom! Itachi told me he is going to propose to you soon, but you will never be my mom. My mom always cared about me. She always made me breakfast. She took me shopping with her. She would listen to me when I was feeling jealous of Itachi and how much attention he got from my father. She would always tell me that my father cared for me as well. She took me shopping with her. She smiled when I came back home from school. She told me she loved me all the time. My mom was the nicest person in the world. You will never be my mom! Mei knew that Sasuke just missed his mother and was taking it out on her. So she did not let that verbal outburst get to her. She did not want him to feel alone when his emotions were breaking down. Mei gently pulled up Sasuke’s chin, made eye contact with him, and spoke. I am very happy that you had such a good mother, Sasuke. And even though our dynamic, once I marry Itachi, may look like a mother with her son due to the age gap. I completely understand that I will not replace your mother. I will treat you the exact way that I treat Mindy since we will be brother and sister by marriage. Will there be moments when I may come off motherly to you? Yes, but know that I am doing those things out of care for you. I am not doing those things to replace your mom. She poked Sasuke in the heart and said, You will always have your mom here. She will never leave you, and the memories will never go away. Mindy and I lost our parents in the bloodline purges. When we won the war, I felt extremely sad. Do you know why? No, Sasuke said back. Because when we have big moments, what we want to do is share those moments with the people we love most. So that is why on the day you got made one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist, you got sad. You got sad because you wish that your parents were here to celebrate with you. It is important for you to understand where your emotions come from when things like this happen. Just know that no matter if you are 10 or 90, you have a right to cry and feel sad about the sad things that have happened. Okay, Sasuke said back. I am sorry that I said those mean things to you. It’s okay, Sasuke. Whenever you are ready to come back downstairs, go ahead and do so. There is no such thing as fast-forwarding while dealing with your sadness. Sasuke. Mei gave Sasuke a hug, and then Mei left the room. Sasuke really reminded her of Itachi when he first cried about doing the Uchiha massacre. Itachi and Sasuke were both very guarded with their emotions. So Sasuke doing something like that made sense. Itachi watched Mei walk down the stairs. He could not feel anything but grateful that he had found such a good woman to be his wife and a positive older female figure for Sasuke. Mei saw the grin on his face as he kissed her on the forehead and said thank you. I love you, Mei. I love you to Itachi.

Chapter 17: Chapter 17 Day 1 of 7 swordsmen training

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madra and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki, other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon and not try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.

Ch 17

Hi, Yagura Thank you for coming back to the village. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Did you find any information about the man pretending to be Madara Uchiha? No, I went through all of the 5 great nations, but I did not get any information about him. Whatever his plans are, he is keeping it quiet at this time. But I do have some valuable information. There is a lot of underlying tension between Konoha and the Sand village. The reason for it is the daimyo that usually gives all of their missions to the Sand village. Right now Konoha is getting most of those missions. With losing 4 major clans, Danzo’s root, they are much easier to be a target to be attacked than ever in history. That is valuable information; thank you, Yagura. I have called you back because I want you to train the 9-tails jinchuriki. The 9-tails jinchuriki is here, Itachi? Yes, it came with the 3 major clans from Konoha. His name is Naruto Namikaze. Namikazae? You mean this is Minato’s son? Yes, he is researching the Hirashan. We made him one of the 7 swordsmen of the Mist. He will be the wielder of the Hiramekeri. We want you to help him with mastering the 9-tails chakra so he can imbue that chakra into the Hiramekeri. That makes sense. Is there anything else? Yes, Yagura. He uses shadow clones, and once they dispel, he gets their memories. He will use his shadow clone for his swordsman training, his wind chakra nature, and the ones that are studying the Hirashian. His physical body will be with you. You will have to mix in training. His wrists, forearms, core, and shoulder and back muscles are the ones that he will have to focus on. That makes sense, Itachi.

Yagura went to Naruto’s household to pick him up. He knocked on the door and was greeted by a gray-haired man. Hi Yagura, I am Naruto’s adoptive father, Kakashi. I will let Naruto know to come outside. Thank you, Kakashi. Naruto, grab your ninja equipment; Yagura is here. Sounds good. Naruto came outside to see Yagura the Mizukage before Itachi outside his door. Thank you for training me, Yagura-sama. Naruto said it very respectfully. Naruto I was a disgraceful Mizukage; there is no reason to address me respectfully. Alright, Naruto, there is a place we are going to walk to for your training; follow me. Yagura took Naruto to a secluded cave where the beach was visible. There was barely any sound or anything coming out of the cave. So Naruto, do you know that I have full control of my Biju? Yes, Yagura, I know. Well, how you do that is by talking with the Biju in your mind. You have to try to make friends with them or learn how to work with them. Each Biju has a different personality, so I cannot guarantee that what worked with my Biju will work with yours. But places like this cave are key. You want to find places that you find calming to enter your mindscape. Your mindscape is the area within your mind that you communicate with your Biju. The Biju’s chakra is coercive and very harsh. So usually the biju slowly increases the chakra it gives you with time to not kill you. That process naturally takes a long time, so do not get discouraged with you not getting it quickly. So what I want you to do is close your eyes, clear your mind, and imagine being in a place where you speak to your Biju. It may take a few hours for you to make first contact. After 2 hours, Yagura saw Naruto have orange chakra surrounding him, and then he knew that Naruto must have entered the Mindscape.

Naruto opened his eyes into a watery room system. Walking through the watery room system, he came to a massive cage. Inside that massive cage are two massive eyes. The eyes themselves were as big as a small child. He could see the outline of a very large being. This being oozed hatred, and it felt like his hatred was attacking him. Naruto froze for a few moments, taking in the truly magnificent being. Why do you dare enter my domain? The beast hurled at Nauro with tons of malice. I am Naruto Namikaze, and I am trying to reach out to the 9-tailed fox in my mindscape. Let me guess: you hate me, and you want my power. I do not hate you. But yes, I do want your power. Well, I am not giving it to you. I have lived caged with 3 people for a hundred years. And just like them, I will never give you my power! Naruto felt a hateful energy force him awake from his mindsape and saw Yagura. Alright, Naruto What was the nine-tailed beast like? Mean and hateful. Okay, well, that is helpful information. My 3-tailed beast was a little like that in the beginning. Naruto-tailed beasts live very lonely lives. As its container, you are the only person that it can talk to. They can be very guarded and hard to talk to. It is your job to take care of them like they are a guest in your house. The sad reality is, unlike a guest, they cannot ever leave. They cannot do things they enjoy or anything. What I did was every day I would wake up and talk to the 3 tails. These beings have been around for centuries, so they can feel your intentions and emotions much better than a regular person. It will take time, but you may even reach a time where you do not have to be in the midscape to speak with the beast. There is no guarantee that you will be friends with the beast. At the very least, they will respect the effort you put into the relationship over time. Being respected by the beast is much better than being hated. Just be honest about the fact that you will want to use its power, but just be consistent with showing that you are trying to care for them. It is important for you to understand these things since there will be special abilities that the beast gives you. For example, as the 3 tails jinchuriki, I have access to the coral palm technique. It grows when I touch something, which can cause me to immobilize enemies. If I did not have a good relationship with my biju, then I would have never been able to use it to the degree I can. Nobody has ever been able to master the 9 tails as a jinchuriki, so we genuinely do not know what abilities you will have. Does all of that make sense, Naruto? Yes, thank you for the advice, Yagura.

Okay, next I will talk about handling the tailed beast's power. Do you know what the worst possible character trait is for a Jinchuriki? No Yagura. The worst trait is someone who cannot handle his own emotions. When you are not in control of your emotions, you will tap into the jinchuriki’s power to a degree beyond your possible control of it. So just be very aware if you are feeling sad for a certain reason and using these powers, okay? Yes, Yagura, thank you for the advice. Alright, I was told that you have to work certain muscle groups. Let's go ahead and do that right now. After about a 3-hour workout, Naruto was very tired. Alright, Naruto, where do you like to eat? Ramen! Ramen is the food of gods. Do you like Ramen Yagura? Ramen is okay, but there is a good ramen spot that has a seafood-filled one, so we can go there. Woo! Free ramen!!! Yagura took Naruto to the ramen spot that he told him about; he always ate a lot, but Naruto ate more ramen than him, which definitely surprised him. He looked over to see Naruto’s very content and happy face and grinned a little bit. So Naruto, what is your goal? I will become the next Mizukage; believe it! You were Mizukage; what is it like? Well, you have to treat the village as your family. You have to be a good example to others and make sure that everything is thought through. Obviously, you have to be at least one of the top 5 strongest fighters in the village as well. I am sure you know I was put under genjutsu by an Uchiha, so I am not the best example. Naruto, you should consider yourself very lucky that I am not dead. Every other Kage in the world from the 5 great nations would have killed me in that situation. Itachi, who believes in his beliefs so strongly about changing the Ninja world system, is the only one that would have spared me. But it is not like you did anything wrong on purpose, Yagura. No, of course I would never do the blood limit killings on purpose. Naruto, you have to understand that it would have been so easy for Itachi to kill me and paint me as a bad person. It would have been easier for him to lie to the people of the mist to gain their trust for his rule to be stable. He chose to tell the truth. Because of that, the people that bought into my bloodline purge thought processes liked him less. Alright, let's head back for more training, Naruto. Yes, Yagura-sama! I said you do not have to be respectful in your speech to me, Naruto. Well, I disagree with you. You were a Mizukage who honorably served his role. To me, you are not a disgrace, Yagura! Believe it! As someone who will be Mizukage one day, I will speak to you respectfully as the 4th Mizukage! Yagura was surprised by the firmness of Naruto’s beliefs. He could see that Naruto had the mental strength to follow through with his words. He knew now that Naruto becoming Mizukage was not that impossible. Alright, Naruto, I will allow you to call me that. Let's head back to the cave. Yes, Yagura-sama!

Alright, Shino, Naruto, Sasuke, Hinata, and Chojuro I will explain your class schedule for the next two years. In case you forgot, my name is Zabuza Momochi. First, I will explain the setting arrangement. As you can see, we are in a smaller room than the normal classroom with only 5 seats. Over the next two years, I want you guys to get closer, become friendly, and have good rivalries, so this seating supports that. So basically the first part of the day will be the exact same as the other kids with your normal daily academy lessons. There will be an additional 4-hour block of work that normal kids in the academy do not have. The first 2 hours of this block are sword training. We will be going over different sword swings and the purposes behind them. You will all leave this academy mastering the basics of sword training.In those other 2 hours, we will do work on the Justu you need to master. For Hinata, that will be imbuing your sword with lightning chakra. For Sasuke, that will be mastering lightning chakra. For Chojuro, that will be making your Water Ninjutsu stronger. For Shino, that will be for making your bigs take off the exploding tags from your sword. For Naruto, you will expel the shadow clone that is here to get your memories to your main body training with the 9 tails chakra. These are the first steps for all of you, okay? Yes, Zabuza, all 5 of them said at once.

Alright, everyone come here. Since class is over, we will start with our sword training. The first sword strike is the downward slash. It is when you bring the sword above your head and slash down. You will all do this movement for the rest of the day. We will have you guys master one slash movement at a time until you have mastered all of the basic slashes. For the people who have never held a sword, it will probably take about 6 months to do this. For Chojuro, who has been working with a sword since he was young, it will probably take 2 months. Zabuza saw that Shino, Naruto, Sasuke, and Hinata were having real trouble after an hour of doing the same sword swing. Chojuro was looking like this was really easy for him, and it made him happy that the others could see his positive example. After the next hour, Shino, Naruto, and Sasuke and Hinata looked like they could barely hold up their arms; they were so sore. Chojuro looked like he was tired but not nearly as bad as the others. Alright, Hinata and Sasuke go to Kakashi and work on mastering your lightning chakra. Shino, go work on making your bugs take the explosive tags off the sword. Naruto, expel your shadow clone. Chojuro, come with me. Yes, Zabuza, all of them said back as they all left.

Hi Chojuro, We will work on your water ninjutsu, okay? Yes, Zabuza! Zabuza brought Chojuro to the ocean and made Chojuro start building up water chakra and focus on trying to focus on gathering it in one spot. After 2 hours, Chojuro was still unable to do the drill, which was expected for someone doing it for the first time. Chojuro, it is time to go home. I want to tell you something before you leave. What is it, Zabuza? You will have to master the sword strikes as soon as possible. Do not match your pace to the others. The reason why is that after you master it, you will have more time to work on your water ninjutsu. Your potential is being a water ninjutsu specialist. Okay, Zabuza I will do it. Zabuza felt good that at least one of the young 5 swordsmen would be a water ninjutsu specialist. It was important because their 7 swordsmen of the Mist history were filled with great water ninjutsu users, and with Chojuro, the tradition could continue.

( The next chapter will be when they are graduating from the academy and being a part of their gennin teams. I will have to create some original characters, so this upcoming chapter may not be done until 2 weeks after this chapter is published today. )

Chapter 18: Chapter 18 Genin teams

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki, other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon and not try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time.

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.(I do own the amount of time it took to get exact jutsus for our favorite character.)

Original Characters list

Mindy- She is Mei’s little sister and has been in this fanfiction since chapter 4

Yuuhi- She is a sensor-type ninja who is graduating from the ninja academy and will be placed on a genin team.

Shunske- He is a good taijutsu user and is raw ninjutsu-wise but has potential that is graduating from the ninja academy and will be placed on a genin team.

Akira- She is a Hoziki clan descendant who is graduating from the ninja academy and will be placed on a genin team.

Minato Hatake- Kakashi and Anko’s 1-year-old baby boy.

Ch 18

(2-year year-time skip)

Hello Zabuza and Kisame, thank you for coming. Yes, Mizukage-sama. As you guys know, the 5 swordsmen of the mist and others have graduated from the academy, so we will be making the genin teams. The big reason why you guys are here is because you told me you guys wanted to be the 5 swordsmen, Jonin sensei. And I remember that you both think they should be on two different teams. Is that correct? Yes, Mizukage-sama, the 5 swordsmen of the mist need to be on the same teams so they can compete with each other. Yes, Zabuza is right; they need that competition. Itachi. Okay, I do remember that even though we usually put 3 Genin on a team, we will not do that for one team because of the competition needed. Yes, Itachi, and on top of that, if we add a non-5 ninja swordsman of the Mist genin to the teams, it would be completely unbalanced. When building genin teams for all of the genin that graduated, you want them to be equal in power and this thought process supports that.

Okay, KIsame. Well, obviously, one team will only have two genin and the other will have three. Kisame is stronger, so you should have a team of two. The strongest in the academy is Sasuke; he is already at kage level power-wise with his Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan and his Susanoo. The next strongest is Naruto, but their rivalry is strong, so putting them on the same team will cause issues. I personally think Shino would make sense as Sasuke’s teammate because they would have a tracker. Which means Zabuza, you would have Chojuro, Naruto, and Hinata on the same team. Hinata and Shino are our two trackers that are available for these teams so it makes sense to put them on two separate teams. Itachi I agree with you about everything except Chojuro. I have been teaching Chojuro my water ninjutsu for the past two years. I do not have any other water ninjutsu left to teach him. Putting him with Kisame makes more sense. And take Shino off that team and put him with mine. I agree with Zabuza that you should put Chojuro on my team, Itachi. On top of that, Chojoro is the only one in that group that is only able to reach his highest potential with me as his sensei. Yeah, I agree with both of you guys that Sasuke and Chojuro should be on your team, Kisame. And Zabuza, your team makes a lot of sense as well. You are raising Haku, so having the only girl in Hinata makes a lot of sense. On top of that, Shino and Naruto have very creative ways of fighting that I do think Zabuza’s expertise as their teacher for the past 2 years will really need. Kisame and Zabuza, you are dismissed. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Also, Itachi, if that brat of a younger brother of yours makes a joke about me dating sharks, I will cut him into ribbons! Itachi grinned at his friend Kisame due to him never forgetting that Kisame dates sharks joke.

ANBU Get Might Guy over here. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Itachi saw the ever-youthful Might Guy run into the room and scream, Yes, Mizukage-sama, I am here! Hi Guy, thank you for coming. I want to talk with you about who will be on your Genin team. Yes, Itachi. So as you know, Guy Rock Lee has been a genin for the past year, training with only you and not going on any missions. We talked about how it would make sense for Haku and Lee to both be a part of a Genin team together. Which makes sense since you train them both in your Taijutsu style. So I have decided who will be the last member in your Genin team. Yuuhi is a sensor-type ninja, but she is last place in taijutsu with average test scores. She has very small chakra reserves due to her being from a normal non-Ninja parent home. She only, by luck, developed chakra sensing by being by the sea and wanting to imagine the fish. As you know, Haku was the first in taijutsu for her class and the top 5 in her class academically. Haku has very good chakra reserves due to her being a Kekkei Genkai clan member. So I had to balance her out with Yuuhi. Yuuhi gives you guys at least someone who can track, and it would be interesting if Haku could mix her long-distance attacks with a sensor giving her the positions of enemies from long range. Itachi, thank you for putting so much thought into my genin team. I will train my group to be the most youthful ninjas!

ANBU, get Kakashi and Anko over here. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Hello, Kakashi and Anko, thank you for coming. Yes, Mizukage-sama, alright, come and sit down. Kakashi and Anko, congratulations on getting married a year ago and your first kid, Minato Hatake. As you know, there are some genin graduating this year. For decades, the Nara, Yamanaka, and Akimichi clans have made some of the most balanced and strong teams for many years. This year, Ino, Shikamaru, and Choji are all representatives from their clans, and I want to put them all on the same team. Shikamaru already knows his clan's shadow possession technique. His test scores are low but he does not really try in class, but he is still very intelligent and is probably the most intelligent person in the class; he is just lazy. Kakashi had a small smirk; just like his father, that lazy genius gene is genetic. Itachi and Anko both grinned at that and then Itachi continued talking. Choji has the strength you would expect from an Akimichi member. And Ino already knows the mind transfer jutsu from her clan. The amount of Jonin-level ninjas we have from the leaf that understand how they need to work together is small. To be honest, one of you two is the person that I think would be a perfect fit as their Jonin Sensie. I wanted to ask first if you guys are in a place where one of you could pick up a Genin team. The reason why I am asking is because you guys have a 1-year-old kid. Worst-case scenario: You guys maybe don’t want to do it and do not give 100% to teaching the Genin. So what do you think? Kakashi and Anko looked at each other and replied yes. Would you allow the other person to stay home more and do fewer missions, Itachi? I would be perfectly fine with having the person be at home more to take on this Genin team. Kakashi and Anko looked at each other in agreement that one of them would be able to take over a genin team under those conditions.

Alright, well, I was actually thinking that the right sensei for this group would be Anko. Anko You have good taijutsu skills and Shikamaru and Ino have terrible taijutsu. They could fail missions when ninjas realize that they need to attack the long-range specialist first. They need better taijutus for those situations. And your personality will not allow Shikamaru to be a slacker. On top of that, those 3 all have a lot of clan-specific jutsu they will have to learn long-term. And Shikamaru and Ino need to make hand signs to make their clan-specific jutsu work. Due to that, they do not have the same time a normal Shinobi would have to learn ninjutsu due to them usually working on their clan techniques after missions. Luckily, Choji does not have that issue but it's not like he will ever be a ninjutsu specialist due to the long-term training in his clan techniques, as previously mentioned. They do not have the potential to learn a lot of ninjutsu to the point where Kakashi would be needed. The biggest reason by far I want you to be their teacher, Anko, is your snake summons. With those, it would really diversify their attack capabilities and give Shikamaru more options to work with as the strategist. The reason why it is specifically a great fit for Ino and Shikamaru is that you do not use any hand signs while using your snake jutsu. Which is a perfect pair with Ino and Shikamaru due to them having to use hand signs for their clan-specific jutsu. Also Anko Your chakra nature is fire, so you can teach Choji fire Ninjutsu as well. Maybe after a while you could teach Shikamaru and Ino those jutsu as well. Anko What kind of female ninja do you hate most? Anko said with a snarl on her face, the boy-crazy female ninja who never takes being a ninja seriously. Ohh and those types of girls will scream about a bug coming across their face. Anko was shaking her head vigorously. Those girls are horrendous for missions. They are a real risk to bring out on a mission because their lack of not being able to do anything could get their teammates killed. We are ninjas, not little girls playing dress-up. Anko I would 100% agree with you and Ino is one of those. Now I know that she and your Hinata are best friends and I think because of that you are perfect to get her out of this phase. Itachi, I will gladly kill her boy-crazy temptations. Thank you, Anko. Honestly, these improvements would probably lead to the best Nara, Akimichi, and Yamanaka combination ever. Now I know that it would be an odd dynamic for the husband to stay at home more, so do you guys agree with this? Kakashi got a look from his wife Anko, who, by her facial expression, said, "I dare you to say no.". Yes, that makes sense, Itachi. I am fine with Anko taking on the Genin Team. Yes, I will whip those weak genin into shape, said Anko. Alright, sounds good. Anko, come here tomorrow to introduce yourself to your team. Sounds good, Itachi. Kakashi walked back home with Anko and was honestly happy to spend more time with Minato. He made a decision a long time ago to rebuild the Hatake clan, and he felt so fulfilled doing that now with his wife, Anko.

ANBU Go ahead and get Mei over here. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Hi, my handsome husband, what can I do for you? Hi Mei, I know we have been talking about you becoming your little sister’s Jonin sensei when she is a genin.You want that because of all the training she still needs to learn your bloodline limit ninjutsu releases. Which is why I called for you, Mei. Your sister Mindy is in the top 3 in her class test scores. She is above average in Tiajutsu. She has extremely elite chakra reserves. Because of this, we cannot surround her with a ton of top-tier talent because it would make unbalanced teams. These are the other two people on her team. The first person on her team is Shunske. He does not come from a ninja clan. He is in the top 3 in the class in Taijutsu. He has poor chakra reserves, but his chakra nature is earth. He has average test scores.The last person on your team is Akira; she is from the Hoziki clan. She cannot turn her body into water like other Hoziki’s, like Mangestu, could. Apparently, if you do not develop it before the age of 10, you will never develop it. She has above-average chakra reserves. She has the top 3 worst test scores in the academy. She has the top 3 worst Taijutsu scores. Water is her chakra nature. I am sure you can see what I have done here. Mei You have mastered fire, water, and earth, Ninjutsu. Mindy does have the same potential, but Shunske’s chakra nature and Hoziki’s chakra nature are both things you have mastered. You are in a unique position to bring out the ninjutsu potential of each member of your team. Sure, it would be nice to have someone who is a tracker, but that skill is rare. Wow, my husband is such a thoughtful man, building me a good team for me to be the Jonin sensei. Mei walked over and gave her Itachi a deep kiss and left the Mizukage office. Mei smirked as she was walking. out, I'll be sure to reward your thoughtfulness tonight. Itachi had an embarrassed look on his face because the ANBU had not left the room. Not a word; ANBU is not a word. Yes, Mizukage-sama, nobody will know.

At the separate academy, the 5 swordsmen in training were with Zabuza and Kisame. In the room. In the seats were Naruto, Sasuke, Shino, Hinata, and Chojuro. Congratulations on passing the Ninja Academy, you brats. You will be divided into two different Genin teams. On one team will be Sasuke and Chojuro, with Kisame as your jonin sensie. The next team will be Naruto, Hinata, and Shino, with me as your Jonin sensei. Sasuke You are not allowed to use your Mangekyo or eternal Mangekyo abilities outside of C-ranked missions or above. Sasuke and Chojuro go with Kisame. Sasuke and Chojuro followed Kisame to the beach area. Alright again, my name is Kisame Hoshigaki. If you do not follow what I say, I will feed you to my sharks. Tell me about yourself, and what are your goals? Sasuke Go first. I am Sasuke Uchiha, and I am Itachi’s younger brother. My goal is to be as cool as Itachi is one day! I also want to help Itachi build the honest ninja village that he is dreaming of! Okay, Chojuro, your turn. I am Chojuro. I am going to become one of the strongest 7 swordsmen of the Mist ever. I want to be someone other people can look up to one day. Alright, well, I need to get a feel for what your fighting styles are like. On top of that, you guys need to get a feel for what it is like to work together. So we will have a sparring session right now.

Kisame took Chojuro and Sasuke to a training ground that did not have anyone nearby. Sasuke I will remind you that you cannot use anything stronger than your 3 tomoe sharigan in this battle. Yes, Kisame, Chojuro took out his Kabutowari blade, Sasuke took out his Kiba blade, and Kisame took out his Samehada blade. Kisame does hand seals and then says Hidden Mist jutsu. Chojuo took out a defensive stance with his Kabutowari blade since he learned the hidden must jutsu from Zabuza; his senses had gotten much better and he could follow where Kisame was. Sasuke turned on his Sharingan to his 3 tomoe so time would slow against whenever Kisame would attack. Kisame first swung his sword at Chojuo, who stopped the blow, but Kisame’s strength pushed him back. Chojuro moved his sword where the blunt end was on Kisame’s Samehada and then used the sharp end of his sword on the blunt end of his own sword. Chojuro’s sword, the Kabutowari, is known as the sword that can break through any defense with the force of the sword when swung that way. By doing that, he was able to push back Kisame’s attack and jump back. At the same time, Kisame swung at Sasuke, and with Sasuke’s Sharingan, the speed of the attack slowed down enough for him to react, and after hitting Kisame, he dispelled into water. Sasuke said to Chojuro that he must be using water clones. Yes, Sasuke, he is. I can dispel this hidden mist just now. Chojuro did the hand seals for the hidden mist jutsu and dispelled it. Chojuro, we are not going to beat Kisame one-on-one or in taijutsu situations. The only chance we have is you using some of your water ninjutsu and me putting my lightning from my Kiba blades in it. Chojuro made hand signs and said Water Release Great Waterfall Technique. A very big waterfall started moving towards Kisame. Sasuke did hand signs and said Lightning release thunderbolt. A bolt of lightning went into Chojuro’s big waterfall. Chojuro and Sasuke could see that the water was flowing with electricity like they hoped. Sasuke and Chojuro saw Kisame smirk and say, Water Release Great Waterfall Technique. Even though it was the same jutsu as Chojuro's, it was 3 times bigger than Chojuro’s. It completely pushed the electrifying water back at Sasuke and Chojuro. The water completely shocked them, and they both were shocked by the attack from their own jutsu, making them pass out. After that, they floated below the water of Kisame’s great waterfall technique. Kisame, knowing this sparring session was over, saved his genin from drowning and took them both into the wooded area.

Kisame saw Sasuke and Chojuro both wake up. Alright, Sasuke and Chojuro I will talk about the things that you guys need to work on while in this genin team. Firstly, Chojuro, I was told that Zabuza taught you all of his jutsu. Your development with your water ninjutsu is way more far ahead than most people coming out of the academy. I will teach you new jutsu that I know, but the most important thing is to develop your chakra reservers so you can put more power into them. You could have more chakra reserves than Zabuza one day. We will keep on trying to get you to master the element. Also, you need to keep on putting on muscle and keep on working out hard. Your sword, the Kabutowari, is best used in powerful sword strikes. Those are the main things we will work on. The good thing is that these two things that you need to be better at naturally grow with time. So do not start feeling sad about yourself because of your lack of chakra reserves and then develop a feeling of inferiority. Sasuke, you have very developed ninjutsu abilities for your age as well. With your fire and lightning chakra natures and your Sharingan, you are a very powerful fighter. Developing your chakra reserves is going to be huge for you as well. Learning more advanced lighting techniques will be important for you over the next year. I also want you to mix in genjutsu into your fighting style more. You could have had a better chance of hitting me with your combined attack with you and Chojuro if you had put me in a genjutsu beforehand. Your Kenjutsu abilities are not as good as Chojuro's, so sparing only with your swords each day is going to be important for the both of you. You want to be so good with your kenjutsu abilities that nobody would ever want to fight you at close range. Also, I heard that Itachi approved you to make a shadow clone to go practice your ninjutsu. Before each day you come meet us for training or missions, I want you to make a clone and send it away to practice your ninjusutu. Alright, you guys can go ahead and spar for now. Yes, Kisame Sensie, Chojuro, and Sasuke said back.

Zabuza brought Naruto, Shino, and Hinata with him to the field for their first meeting as a team. Alright, you brats. I have been your teacher for the past 2 years so we are not going to waste any time talking about what your guys goals are. We will go ahead and have a sparring session with you guys versus me. Zabuza took out his Kubikiribōchō sword, and Naruto took out his Hiramekarei sword; Hinata took out her Nuibari sword; and Shino took out his Shibuki sword. Alright, let's start the sparring session. Naruto made hand signs. Multi-shadow clone jutsu 10 Naruto shadow clones popped out and started attacking Zabuza. Zabuza was beating the shadow clones easily with his experience and strength difference. Zabuza made a hand sign and said, Water Clone. 2 water clones started attacking Hinata and Shino. Hinata was trying her best to defend from Zabuza’s strikes, but the physical strength difference was giving her issues. Whenever the swords clashed, Hinata was pushed back. She immediately started using her Nuibari sword offensively; with her sword being longer, it made Zubuza’s water clone start jumping back to defend. Zabuza started putting more weight into his defensive movements against Hinata’s sword, which was thin. Zabuza pushed Hinata's attacking sword to the left. Hinata gracefully used that push to the left and spun her body in 360-degree motion and moved to her right, expecting Zabuza to be on the offensive in the opposite direction after pushing her sword in the opposite direction. Her gracefulness and speed were impressive, and with her sword, she stabbed the water clone, making it dispel. Shino saw the Zabuza clone coming his way, and immediately 40 explosive bombs came out of his sword, chasing Zabuza around since his bugs were carrying the paper bombs. This made the Zabuza water clones dispel. Zabuza’s real body had just defeated the Naruto shadow clones, and he felt himself becoming weaker. Zabuza realized that Shino must already have used his chakra-draining bugs on him, which he had no way of stopping. Zabuza jumped back to try to end the fight with his ninjutsu before his chakra drained. Zabzua made hand signs. Water Release Great Waterfall Technique: A massive water wave started to move at Naruto, Hinata, and Shino at very high speeds. Naruto made hand signs. Wind Release: Swift Wind Wall: A swirling storm of wind forming a wall was put up between Zabuza’s Great Waterfall Technique and Nauro, Hinata, and Shino; it was half the size of Zabuza's technique. Hinta and Shino both made hand signs and said, Earth Release: Earth Shore Return. 2 earth walls were put up behind Naruto’s technique, which was half the size of Naruto’s jutsu. This blocked Zabuza's jutsu enough that they did not get hit; the water just flowed outside of their defensive walls.

Hinata and Naruto listen to me. My bugs are draining Zabuzas Chakra, and he cannot stop it. We need to fight as a group so he cannot attack us individually. Naruto fight Zabuza in close range by accessing your 9-tails jinchuriki state. Hinata, stay a few feet behind Naruto the whole time. Try to use your longsword with your gentle fist technique to shut down Zabuza’s chakra points. If he ever jumps back to use his Ninjutsu, I will use my paper bombs. I will stay at a distance and be behind both of you. Naruto and Hinata nodded to Shino. Naruto closed his eyes and focused and drew out two tails of his jinchuriki state; he took on a fox-like appearance and had an orange cloak with two tails coming out of it. Hinata turned on her Byakugan and encased her sword in lightning; they started their attack. Naruto, with much greater speed and power than before, was attacking Zabuza with his Hiramekarei sword. During training, he had figured out how to put his Biju chakra in the sword, so it was 5 times as big as its normal size, and it was pushing Zabuza back. The only reason why Zabuza was not defeated by Naruto was the experience difference in Kenjutsu. Hinata was able to see an opening, and using her longsword encased in lightning chakra, she was able to shut down one of Zabuza’s chakra points by meshing her gentle fist style with her Nuibari sword. Zabuza Jumped back and made hand signs for Water Dragon bullet jutsu. Water bullets moved toward Naruto and Hinata at fast speed. Naruto used the Wind Release: Vacuum Sword, and he was able to swing his sword, and huge gusts of wind came out, cutting the water bullets Zabuza made. Hinata made hand signs. Earth Release: Tunneling Technique. She went underground and tunneled. With her byakugan, she saw Zabuza through the earth, and using her lighting-encased long sword, she threw the sword through the earth, completely piercing through Zabuza’s left foot. Zabuza grunted in pain and said crap. Hinata must be underground. Zabuza moved at very fast speeds backwards to create space. While running away, 50 paper bombs were chasing him that he could not avoid. Due to Shino draining my chakra, I only have one more jutsu. Water Release Great Waterfall Technique: The paper bombs exploded when they touched the waterfall. Zabuza fell asleep due to chakra exahshtiion. Hinata worriedly said, I am out of chakra and I cannot make an earth wall to stop Zabuza’s jutsu. Yeah, Naruto, I am out of chakra as well to stop that. Don’t worry, you two, I got it! Believe it! Naruto made hand signs. Wind Release: Swift Wind Wall: A swirling storm of wind forming a wall was put up between Zabuza and the Great Waterfall. This jutsu was much stronger than his previous one due to him being in the 2 tails Biju state, and he was able to stop Zabuza’s attack.

Naruto disabled his Jinchuriki state. Hinata! You were so graceful fighting Zabuza, and you were the only person that was able to wound him. You did such a good job! Hinata blushed and said back, Thank you, Naruto. Let's go check on Zabuza. Shino said, and they went over and saw him pass out. They took him to the hospital. Shino, Naruto, and Hinata were worried about their Jonin sensei, but they were relieved when the doctor said he would wake up in an hour and he just had a light case of chakra exhaustion. Zabuza woke up in the hospital to see his 3 genin looking at him worriedly. Are you okay, sensei? Naruto said. Yes, I am. You guys did a good job using what you learned in the two years you were training to become ninja swordsmen. You 3 make a very natural team. I will go ahead and explain to you what you guys will be training with for the next year while taking missions before becoming Chunin. Naruto When you are on missions, you can still make 1 shadow clone for your ninjutsu development. Make 2 shadow clones to still study the Hirashan. I know you still talk to your Biju every day; you will have to do that still before every mission. All 3 of you guys will spar every day on your Kenjutsu abilities; you all have a lot of growth to make in that area still. Yes, Zabuza-sensei. Hinata You will spend time after missions growing your Ninjutsu abilities with earth release and lightning release. Yes, Zabuza-sensei. Shino You have developed your earth chakra nature, but you have fire as your secondary chakra nature. Keep an open mind about not having to stick to just Earth. In the next year, adding another defensive jutsu makes sense because your biggest weapon is your bugs, and the better your defensive jutsu, the tougher fighting you will be. But there may be people out there that can counter your bugs, so make sure that you learn an offensive ninjutsu over the next year as well. Yes, Zabuza-sensei. Zabuza got out of the hospital bed, taking out the needles. You guys are dismissed. You guys can go home. Don't you need to stay in bed? Hinata said worriedly. No, I am fine. I am always sparing with that chakra freak, Kisame. I have dealt with way worse than this in spars. Zabuza walked away, and Naruto, Hinata, and Shino body-flickered to their houses.

Rock Lee Come with me to the Ninja Academy; we are going to pick up your genin teammates! Yes, Guy Sensie! Might Guy and Rock Lee ran to the academy at extremely fast speed. Alright, Lee. Wait here; I will go pick up your teammates. Might Guy walked in and went to the room to pick up his genin team. Hi, I am Might Guy! I am here to pick up my genin team! I am here to pick up Haku and Yuuhi! Haku he recognized with all of the years of training her. But Yuuhi was a girl with brown hair and blue eyes. She has a thin nose and a pretty smile. She is very tan. She was wearing a very light blue cotton shirt and tan cotton pants with blue sandals and a seashell necklace. She has hair going down her midback. She shuffled her feet when she walked and moved very slowly. Alright, you two come with me to meet your other Genin for your Genin team. Alright, here are your other genin in your genin team. Rock Lee Haku and Yuuhi. Yosh! Hi Yuuhi, I am Rock Lee. Hi, Rock Lee. Yuuhi said back lazily. Hi Haku, my flower. You look so pretty. Haku turned red from her boyfriend's compliment. Alright, since everyone is here, let's go ahead and do our sparring in the training field. Everyone follows me. Alright, let's have a most youthful sparring session! It will be you three against me.

Rock Lee and Haku took a Taijutsu stance, and Yuuhi brought out Kunai. Start now! Haku made hand signs. Hidden Mist jutsu A Mist surrendered the area, and Might Guy had to dodge Senbon being thrown at him. Rock Lee came out of the mist with incredible speed for a genin and started having a very high-level taijutsu battle with Might Guy. Yuuhi had her mouth open in complete shock that a genin could move that fast; it was unbelievable. Yuuhi! Haku tugged at Yuuhi’s shirt to break her out of shock at the extremely elite taijutsu battle in front of her. Yuuhi finally broke concentration out of a shocked state to see Haku say What are you good at? Yuuhi said back nothing other than sensing chakra. Come with me. Haku Grabbed Yuuhi and went deep into the woods. Can you still sense Mike Guy and Rock Lee? Yuuhi closed her blue eyes. Yes, Guy beat Lee and is over there trying to find us. How far away? Probably about 125 feet. Okay, well, I want you to move your finger as he moves. I am going to try something. Haku said the gate of opening Kai. A green aura surrounded Haku, and she started trowing senbon at incredible speed at Guy and kept on moving her target based on where Yuuhi was pointing. Haku could see the shock on Yuuhi’s expression, and before they could even say anything, Might Guy, with 3 senbon pointing from his arm, knocked Yuuhi unconscious. Haku made hand signs. Mirroring Ice Crystals A dome of glass mirrors surrounded Guy while Haku was in the first gate. She threw the senbon at incredible speed at her Might Guy, hitting him twice, going from one mirror to the next with her afterimages everywhere. Might Guy knocked Haku out of her mirrors with his superior speed.

He then brought his 3 Genin to a tree and waited for all of them to awake. Firstly, that was a most youthful sparring, you three! I will go ahead and talk about your guys training for the next year. Yuuhi, you will join Haku, Rock Lee, and me for our training in Taijutsu. I am going to train with those two speed freaks. Those two are not normal; any Genin would look at them with their eyebrows raised, like, Who made them? Haku would literally lap everyone else in the academy when we would run laps. You're not saying I have to keep up with them, right? No, but you need to develop some offensively focused skills for missions. I know you were last in Taijutsu in the academy, but I am the best Taijutsu teacher. Guy gave Yuuhi a stern face. I heard you love the beach; what if we train there? Yes, sensei, that is a good idea. Yuuhi said, realizing that this would be the most favorable offer these 3 fitness freaks would offer. Yuuhi and Haku, you guys realized in the sparring session that you two have great potential as a long-range fighter combo. That will be focused on for the next year. Rock Lee, we will continue to train your Tiajutsu. Yes, Guy Sensie! Haku I know you feel like you do not have any other Ice Ninjutsu to learn. But over the next year, you will learn water and wind ninjutsu since there are plenty of those to learn that exist. Haku, you will continue your taijutsu training as well. Yes, Guy sensei. All right, we will start our most youthful training tomorrow, but first let's warm down our bodies with a nice, easy run. Rock Lee and Haku were keeping pace with Might Guy. Yuuhi was in a full sprint way behind them, wondering how this could ever be considered a nice, easy run.

Yuuhi is limping back home after her first day with her new Genin team. Her legs were so extremely sore that she could barely move them. She did at least feel peaceful being next to the ocean. Her family lived oceanside, and she always loved it since she was a kid. It was her calming place. The way she developed her ability to see chakra signatures was by imagining fish in the sea as a kid. Eventually she was able to sense their chakra as they swam. She saw a blue-haired boy in the ocean that she thought she recognized. The water was flowing around him like he was training with water ninjutsu with a determined look on his face. On his back, she saw a sword with a hammer and a flat, thin blade attached by a chain. He looked like he was very tired at the end of training. Hello, I think I know you. Yuuhi saw the blue-haired boy with black glasses and black headphones. He was wearing a light blue long-sleeve shirt with a sleeveless dark blue shirt over the top. She saw the boy get nervous and his face turn red. Yes, we used to be in the academy together. My name is Chojuro. Oh yeah, you were a part of the group that moved to the 7 Ninja Swordsmen Academy training. What was that like? It was great! I will be a cool ninja swordsman like Kisame and Zabuza! Yuuhi saw the boy’s facial expression go from his nervousness; he just had back to his determined look before they started talking. What were you doing, Chojuro? I was working on my water ninjutsu. Our village has such a long history of great Water Ninjsutu swordsmen, and I am going to be the next one. I mean, water is so cool, powerful, and peaceful. I love the fact that I am a water ninjutsu user. And now With Itachi as our Mizukage and his dream of an honest ninja village, I feel so lucky to be one of the 7 ninja swordsmen of this village! That's cool. What do you do to relax when you are finished training? I usually do not relax, Yuuhi; I am always trying to reach my goal. Chojuro, you are silly; you do not know the best part of water. Yuuhi said excitedly. And if you have no time to relax, you will get burned out on your goal. Come here. Yuuhi took Chojuro by the hand and went into the water, where it was as high as her chest. Yuuhi lay down on her back and watched the stars. With the waves peacefully moving her up and down as they moved. Chojuro did the same thing with Yuuhi. He could not help but look over and see Yuuhi’s bright blue eyes with the stars in the background and think, Wow, she is so beautiful. Yuuhi was so caught up in looking at the stars with a new friend who liked the water just like her that she did not realize that she was holding Chojuro’s hand. She looked over at Chojuro. I am sorry she took her hand away from Chojuro’s. I just get happy when I am in the water. This is so nice, right, Chojuro? Yeah, I had no clue it could be this peaceful on the water. If there is one thing you can rely on, it is that I will find ways to relax near a body of water. Chojuro giggled at Yuuhi’s comment because of how obvious that was. They both stayed out on the water for about an hour just relaxing with the waves moving them up and down and looking at the sky. Alright, Chojuro, it is time for me to go home. Since you love the water like me, you can join me in my relaxation time if I see you again. Byye. Chojuro waved goodbye with a huge blush on his face and walked back home, hoping he would see that beautiful girl tomorrow.

Anko sprinted through a window in the academy and threw a smoke bomb. She brought a sign that said the sexy, beautiful, and married Anko Hatake. The students and teachers were both shocked. Since becoming a mother, scratching her wild and spontaneous itch had been hard. Naturally, she had been dying to do something fun, and she could not resist this opportunity. There were many kids there with all shocked faces. She could tell from her time living in the leaf that the boy with the long, thick black hair in a ponytail with a green shirt was a copy of his father, Shikaku Nara. She recognized Ino due to her being best friends with Hinata. The last of her obvious genin was a plump boy with brown hair sticking out of both ends with a blue hat that cut off at the middle of his hat. He had red circles on his cheeks with a scarf and green jacket. Outside of the brown hair color, he looked exactly like his father, Choza Akimichi. Alright, Choji, Shikamaru, and Ino, this is your Jonin Sensei, Anko Hatake. They all looked at her like she was crazy, which just egged her on more. Alright, all 3 of you stop. She drew out a kunai and scratched Shikamaru in the face first. Your blood tastes weak. She scratched Ino in the face next. She spit it out immediately. The disgusting taste of a female ninja who takes chasing boys more seriously than training is always disgusting. She scratched Choji in the face next and licked his blood. Hmm, the taste of a boy who is a passive, nervous fighter always tastes empty. Alright, you three weakly, Genin, let's go to our training ground. She turned around as she said in an intimidating tone, I will do my best to show you 3 green Genin the realities of being a shinobi today.

Alright, you three, we will go ahead and spar against each other. Before even allowing them to talk to each other, Anko attacked Choji’s kunai and allowed him to defend it at the last moment because the 3 of them were not ready to spar. When on missions, the opponent does not give you a few seconds to figure out a plan. Choji and Shikamaru go. Ino barked out to her other teammates, afraid and not ready to fight. Choji used his human bullet tank to spin in a ball towards Anko, which she jumped over. Shikamaru made hand signs for his shadow paralysis jutsu, and Anko made hand signs for Hidden Shadow Snake Hands. Big snakes came out of her sleeve and caught Shikamau before he could get away and poisoned him. Ino screamed, EWWW! So creepy! And she did not move and got poisoned by the snake. Anko looked at Choji, who surprised her because when they first met, Choji did not seem that confident, but he was intensely looking at her. It seems like at least you have a backbone when it comes to helping your friends. Anko said to Choji. Choji was about to enter his beast ball mode when a snake came from under his feet and bit him and poisoned him.

All 3 of Anko’s gennin woke up to see that they were tied to a tree upside down. With snakes biting close to their feet. Okay, as you can see, you 3 Genin, I have tied you up to a tree and with snakes below you to make some things very clear. The 3 of you may die for a few different reasons early into your ninja lives due to some serious flaws you all have. Instead of wasting many months of you guys going through missions figuring those things out, I will tell you today. Ino, you gave orders to Choji and Shikamaru when fighting me, correct? Yes, I did. Why? Because Shikamru is lazy and Choji is not super smart. I have by far the highest test scores out of everyone, so I should lead the group. Really, what was your plan, Ino? To to um, I do not remember. Ino you were afraid, and you were stuck in place due to fear. Anko moved at great speed up the tree and all of their hands were bound together but she specifically grabbed Shikimaru’s hands. The only one of you that did not allow his fear or other emotions to affect his judgment was Shikamaru. Even now you are so afraid, Ino, that you cannot even notice Shikamaru was making hand signs to try to get out of the rope behind all of your backs. Even during the fight, he fought behind Choji, trying to find a situation where his shadow could attach to me while I was defending against Choji. Honestly, Shikamaru’s battle intelligence is on a different level than the two of you. Do you know who Shikamaru’s father is, Ino? Shikaku Nara. Yes, Ino, Shikaku Naru was the Jonin commander of the leaf village while I was there. Only someone with extreme intelligence can do a role like that because they assign ninjas' missions. When those missions are assigned, things about intelligence—how a team will work together and how to accomplish a task on a mission—are most important. During the last war, his battle strategy skill was legendary. What do you think Shikaku Nara’s grades were in the Ninja Academy, Ino? The best in his class? No, he had the worst grades you could have without failing. Ino, what were Shikamaru’s grades in the academy? He had the worst grades you could have without failing. Shikamaru scored a 70 every single time on every test with no variation. So what does that mean, Ino? Ino had a look of shock on her face. It means that Shikamaru was so confident in his ability to get exactly a 70 on every test that it meant that he could have gotten a 100 on every test. Yes, Ino, our Shikamaru, like his father, is a lazy genius. Shikamaru the cat is out of the bag; you cannot hide behind the facade of an average Ninja Academy student. And while on this team, you will not act like something you are not. While in battle situations, you will direct your teammates. They are your friends and you will need to work hard to handle that responsibility. Anko cut Shikamaru down from the tree branch, leaving Ino and Choji still up there.

Ino, you're next. Like I referenced earlier, you can have an opinion on things but if Shikamaru disagrees with you, you follow him because he is smarter than you. On top of that, you do not take your training seriously enough. All you think about is Sasuke but you're a ninja now and are responsible for being the best version of yourself so your teammates do not die. On top of that, from personal experience, strong guy ninjas like girls that take being a ninja seriously over fangirls. Anko cut Ino down but put her in the pit of snakes. Ino looked up in horror at Anko from all the snakes around her. Ino, you said EEWW so gross when you saw the snakes. Each time you say something like that, I will put you in a pit of some of my snakes for ten minutes. Anko put her hands together and closed her eyes in prayer. We must purify the fangirl side of you, Ino. So the competent kunoichi can rise. Anko repeated that sentence in prayer for the full 10 minutes while Ino screamed in disgust at the snakes surrounding her body. After the 10 minutes, Ino was taken out of the pit of snakes; her face was stuck in complete shock. Choji gave Anko a worried look. Don’t worry, Choji; her fangirl ways will be purified.

Anko slapped Ino in the face, which took her out of her shocked state. Choji needs your input. Shikamaru and Ino, what was watching Choji in the spar like today? Shikamaru said first. He was the best close-range fighter by far. He took on someone he knew he was not strong enough to beat. Ino talked next, unlike me; he was not overcome with fear and protected us. Choji If I asked you how you felt about the sparring session, you would say something much more negative than what they just said about you, correct? Choji had a sad face and said, Yes, I would not have anything good to say about myself. Okay, well, if you are ever feeling that way about yourself, do not trust it. If you think about what you did and then replace you in that situation with one of your friends, you would be much more positive and supportive of what they did. Just like Shikamaru and Ino were for you just now. Doing this will allow you to overcome your lack of self-confidence. You are much stronger and ready to be a ninja than you realize, Choji. You just need to overcome your lack of self-confidence so you do not freeze up in the field. Anko cut the ropes on Choji and dispelled her snakes.

All right, you three; your training will be hell with a lot of hard work but you will become the best genin you can become because of it. And I will say this just once: I will play dirty if you guys slack off. Anko blew a fire out of her mouth, Choji. I am sure you would not appreciate it if all of your snacks got burned every morning. Choji looked scared and Ino laughed at the threat. Oh, Ino, you think that is funny, huh? Well, if you are lazy, I will write a letter to Sasuke about how you have fallen in love with Shikamaru and are no longer interested in him. Ino looked horrified and Shikamaru grinned. Oh yes, and my lazy genius, if you are lazy training, I will make you join Mighit Guy’s team for a week for his 5am workouts. She could tell that the lazy genius valued his sleep and sanity enough to never be lazy during their workouts. Now that the threats are out of the way, I have to go home and eat dinner with my family. My husband is cooking fish tonight and I can not be late. Anko said with a happy look on her face. Who is your husband? Choji said. Ino butted in and said she is Kakashi’s wife. Choji, do you not remember when Hinata and Naruto were being raised in the same house by Kakashi and Anko? Oh, I forgot my bad. Ino put her palm to her face and shook her head. You are so forgetful, Choji. They have a 1-year-old boy named Minato and he is so cute. He has gray hair like an old person but he is a baby; it's an adorable combination. I know, right? My little Minato is so cute. Are you coming over today, Ino? Yeah, Hinata and I have to talk about how our first day in our new teams went. Shikamaru and Choji, you are welcome to come over as well. Anko saw Choji’s eyes go wide in excitement and Shikamaru had already started walking in that direction. Yes, let's go eat! Choji said with extreme excitement.

Husband I brought my Genin team over for dinner. I hope you made extra. Well, with Naruto, I always make extra. Anko grinned since she knew firsthand the extreme amount of food Naruto had to eat every day. But she knew that Naruto had a 9-tailed beast that needed extra calories. Choji I know that your clan uses excess calories for your family jutsu so do not feel insecure about eating your fill. Choji's face lit up because he was so happy that he did not have to feel insecure about eating a lot. Anko could tell that comment won her some brownie points with Shikamaru. Hinata, Naruto, come downstairs. Shikamaru, Ino, and Choji are here. Hinata was the first one to race gracefully downstairs with Minato in hand. The gray-haired 1-year-old was happily interacting with Hinata. Ino beamed. Hinata, you have Minato; he's so cute. Hinata sat next to Ino and they were playing with Minato, who was happy to see the pretty young ladies. Anko laughed. Kakashi, our son, loves cute young girls. They both started giggling. I know, right? For some reason, he is always so happy when Ino and Hinata are around. Everyone started to giggle and laugh in the room at the energetic and happy Minato. Naruto came downstairs to see Hinata and Ino with Minato. Naruto beamed, Yeah, Minato loves being around those two. How have you guys been, Choji and Shikamaru? Well, Anko is our Jonin Sensie so today was pretty crazy. Choji is right; she is going to be troublesome. I am surprised at how quickly she found out that Shikamaru is smarter than he shows. Naruto grinned because he would not have realized either if he did not spend so much time studying to become smarter in the academy. Yeah, it took me a while to realize it as well, Choji. So how was your first day on your genin team? It was good. Hinata, Shino, and I are all on the same team, with Zabuza as our sensei. We actually beat him in our sparring today. Everyone in the room was shocked at beating Zabuza, an A-ranked Jonin, and one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist on their first day in a genin team. Well yes, we did win but without Shino’s chakra-draining bugs, we would have never had any chance to beat him. He just had no way to defend against them. I entered my jinchuriki state and Hinata fought behind me using her gentle fist style with her sword and Shino stayed at a long range. But Hinata was so elegant and beautiful in her fighting style. She is so light on her feet and good at using her range. I felt so supported with her fighting next to me. Hinata passed out with a huge blush on her face. Yeah, it’s okay. Hinata has fainting issues but they have not happened as much recently as Naruto said to Shikamaru and Choji. Kakashi and Anko looked at each other with a smirk on their faces at the completely oblivious Naruto. Everyone in the room enjoyed their dinner and all went to their homes. Kakashi felt so happy that Anko and he built a warm home that could have other people come over to.

Mei was waiting to go meet her new Genin team; she was happy that she could be her little sister’s Jonin Sensie. Mei walked into the classroom and grinned at her sister. Hi class. For 3 of you, this will be your Jonin sensei, Mei Uchiha. The first person to walk towards Mei was her little sister, Mindy. The next person that got announced for her team was Shunske. He has a buzzcut and a vertical scar on the right side of his face. He has a very tan complexion. He has good muscle development for his age.He wears a brown button-up shirt with black pants and brown sandals. He has brown eyes and black hair. The last person on their team was Akira. She has white eyes, white hair, pale skin, and a pretty smile. She wears a black tank top T-shirt with white shorts and black sandals. Her hair is in a ponytail, which comes to her shoulders. Alright, your 3 I am Mei Uchiha. I will be your sensei; let's go to a training field. Mei took her 3 sensei to a training ground and then sat them down to talk to them.

My name is Mei Uchia. I am Mindy’s older sister. I was the leader of the blood limit resistance force for a while. I just got married to my handsome Itachi Uchiha, the Mizukage. You can go first, Shunske. Well, I am Shunske, and even though I know the reality of the world and I have to be your genin I will not enjoy it! You people won the Civil War; act like you are so much better than the people that lost! We did not know that Yagura was under a genjutsu as well but how are we treated? They are still angry at us and I was not even the one fighting. Yes, my parents were both Chunin fighting against the bloodlines. But now we are supposed to forgive you all due to Yagura being put under a genjutsu. But what about us? What about the people who were manipulated into doing the bloodline purges? Why can they not be forgiven as well? I am a second-class citizen. Every time they get drunk, they come after me without fail. I have been living on edge for years, wondering when the next time the drunk war veterans were going to come find me. I am sorry, Shunsuke, that you had to go through those things. I get that it will take a while for you to trust me as your sensei. Mindy was saddened by what her new genin teammate had been going through all of this time. I am Mindy Terumi. I am Mei Uchiha’s little sister. Mei looked at her last team member. Hi, I am Akira. I am from the Hoziki clan but don’t get your hopes up. I cannot liquify my body. Akira started to nervously laugh and then got quiet.

Alright, you three I want you guys to have a chance to spar as a group against me, so we are going to go ahead and do that now. Mei made hand signs. Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique A dragon shape made out of water started heading at the 3 genin with incredible speed and size. Mindy saw her two teammates with huge, fearful looks on their faces and they froze up and were about to be hit by the water dragon. Mindy made hand signs. Water Release: Water Formation Pillar, a circular water barricade half the size of Mei’s attack, was made, and Shunske and Akiria gave Mindy a surprised look. While we are on a team, I will always protect you guys. Quick, what are you good at? Shunsuke replied, Taijutsu. Akira sadly said back nothing. Do you have Kunia Akira? Yes, okay. On the count of 3, Akira, you will run to the left and throw kunai at Mei continuously; do not get too close. Shunske, follow me, and I will use offensive ninjutsu to get her to jump. That should give you some time to try to hit her with your taijutsu. 3, 2, 1, Go! Mei saw Akaria moving to her right with throwing kunai that was making her dodge. To the right, she heard from Mindy. Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique A water dragon about half the size of the one she had just made was sent in her direction, which she evaded by jumping over it. While falling down, she saw Shunsuke there jumping in the air in a kicking motion. She deflected it but still felt some of the impact. She started to fight Shunske in Taijutsu and was very impressed by the speed and power he had for his age. She thought he definitely had the taijutsu level of high chunin already. Mie delivered a hard kick at Shunske, which sent him back a few feet. Mei jumped back and made hand signs. Hidden mist jutsu. A huge mist encased the area. Mei first got behind Akira and hit the back of her neck, making her go unconscious. She then ran toward Shunske and he attacked back, shocked to see Mei melt into water. Mei hit the back of the neck and Shunsuke went unconscious. Mindy made hand signs dispelling the hidden must jutsu and was shocked to see her two teammates both pass out. Mei made hand signs for Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. Mindy saw the water dragon heading at her at high speeds and was about to make hand signs but she could not due to being out of chakra. Mie saw her little sister pass out due to the jutsu hitting her and brought her 3 genin to a wooded area and waited for them to wake up.

Alright, now that you three are up, we will talk about what you will be doing over the next year. Let's get this out of the way first. Yes, I asked to be the Jonin Sensie of Mindy’s team. She has the potential to learn many bloodline-limit techniques that I did not use against you today. She needs me to be her teacher during this timeframe. And I love my little sister very much. But Shunske and Akira, you were both chosen to be genin by my amazing husband for specific reasons. You see, I have mastered 3 chakra natures. Shunske, your chakra nature is one of the chakra natures I have mastered, which is earth. You have below-average chakra reserves, so you have the potential of using ninjutsu in battle. Akira Your chakra nature is water and you have good chakra reserves, which is common for people that come from a clan like you. You have the potential to be very good with water, Ninjutsu. As you can tell from our fight, I am a ninjutsu specialist with very good chakra reserves who has mastered water ninjutsu. I will be able to teach you these jutsu that you guys need. Mindy will not be my main priority while I am your Jonin sensei; you will all get an equal level of treatment and focus from me. You guys will all grow a lot over the next year, and I am looking forward to being your Jonin sensei. Alright, everyone goes home. I will see you guys tomorrow! Mei got up to go leave and was surprised to see a look on Mindy’s face like she was thinking of something. Actually, Big Sis I will stop by Shikamaru’s house before heading home. Okay, have fun with your friend. Mei walked home feeling bad that people that fought with her against the bloodline purges would attack Shunske when he was just an innocent child.

Knock knock. Shikamru was surprised that someone was at his door but then he realized it was probably Mindy there. They had been friends who played shogi together for years and he really enjoyed playing with her. She was very good and not a huge talker so he did not feel like there was an expectation to keep a conversation going as well. He opened his door and saw the red-haired young teenager at his door again. What do you need? Mindy? Can we play shogi? Shikamaru opened the door and Mindy walked in. Mindy and Shikamaru put up the pieces of shogi and played through one game and Shikamaru won the first round and they were setting up the pieces for the second round. Shikamaru, how was your first day with your genin team? I was really hoping I could extend my lazy lifestyle for another year but I do not think that is going to happen. Mindy got a grin on her face. Are you telling me that you will be working hard in training from her on out? The forever lazy Shikamaru? That's hilarious. I’m going to have to spy on you guys to see this. Yeah, yeah, yeah, ha ha ha so funny so troublesome. If you must know, Mindy, I am going to do it to be strong enough to defend my friends, who in this situation are my teammates. Mindy felt an odd feeling that she could not understand, but she could feel her admiration for Shikamaru and her friendship changing. I actually had a similar moment today. In our sparring with my big sister, I defended my teammates against a jutsu and felt really natural protecting people I just met. Well, I guess we are both changing into responsible shinobi; who would have guessed? Mindy grinned at that. Mindy and Shikamaru played 10 more rounds of shogi, and Mindy went home.

While walking home, Mindy was wondering why she could not stop thinking about Shikamaru. Mindy walked into her house, where Itachi, Sasuke, and Mei were already there eating dinner together. Hi Mindy, come on over; let's eat. Sasuke How was your first day with your Genin teams? Chojuro and I are on a genin team together and we sparred Kisame and then he told us how we can improve big brother Itachi. That’s good. I am proud of you for graduating from the Ninja Academy and working as hard as you have. Thank you, big brother. I will be as strong as you one day! Itachi was happy that Sasuke had grown so much after the Uchiha massacre that he could now just relax and talk about his day. What about you, Mei? How was your day? It was good I took over my new genin team for Mindy, Akiria, and Shunske. They sparred and they did a good job working well as a group. Mindy did a very good job of quickly figuring out how to use everyone's strengths. Which is honestly not a surprise with how smart she is. But one of them made me sad. Did you know, Itachi, that Shunsuke’s parents were Chunin that fought on the side that was trying to purge the bloodlines? Yes, I did see that in his file. Well, sadly, people that fought on our side against the bloodline purges sometimes take their anger out on him. Itachi had a sad look that his country would have people like that. Yeah, I am sure that you know that happens to people that have bloodline limits still as well. Sadly, after a war is finished, there will be a small percentage of people that hold onto their hatred for the other side of the war. And those people are more likely to take out their anger on people like Shunske. We will just have to keep on being firm with trying to police those things so it happens as little as possible. Mei gave Itachi a passionate kiss. I love how much you care for our village. What about you, Mindy? How was your day? I definitely was surprised at how quickly I defended my teammates. Mei, can we talk later about some stuff? Mei had a surprised look on her face since Mindy did not ask for her advice much.

Mindy went upstairs, followed by Mei, and then they closed her door. You know Shikamaru? Yes, your friend. Yes, well, today, after leaving from Shikamaru’s house, I could not stop thinking about him. I heard him talk about wanting to protect his teammates. And the look in his eyes was so sincere. I have always been friends with Shikamaru but today I thought he was cute. I have never thought of Shikamaru that way but I could not stop thinking about him on the way back home. What does this mean, Mei? You have a crush on Shikamaru. Mei said excitedly. You like him. Mindy had a surprised look on her face. Mindy, you are going through puberty so you are starting to see boys in different ways than you used to. But it makes sense because you guys are very good friends and he is a good-looking boy. So when you think a boy is cute, you like them? Yeah, that is true but don't just pursue boys because you think they are cute. Give yourself some time to figure out how much you like him and then, when you are ready, tell him. Mei said with a grin on her face, Okay, but don't tell anyone, promise! I promise, Mindy. I am so excited, though; we can finally have girls talk about boys! Mindy giggled Yeah, I guess, big sis.

Chapter 19: Chapter 19 Chunin Exams part 1

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki, other than Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon and not try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

Only one story at a time.

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. (I do own the amount of time it took to get exact jutsus for our favorite characters.)

Original Characters list

Mindy- She is Mei’s little sister and has been in this fanfiction since chapter 4 and is on Mei’s Genin team.

Yuuhi- She is a sensor-type ninja who is on Might Guy’s Genin team.

Shunske- He is a good taijutsu user and is on Mei’s Genin team.

Akira- She is a Hoziki clan descendant and is on Mei’s Genin team.

Minato Hatake- Kakashi and Anko’s 2-year-old baby boy.

Ch 19

(1-year timeskip)

ANBU, bring Shikaku over here. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Thank you for coming, Shikaku. I know you do not care for small talk so I will get straight to the point. I asked you to come here to advise on the Chunin exams. How do you think we should do them this year? Well, Mizukage-sama, We obviously cannot participate in the joint nation Chunin exams in Konoha. Yes, it is very obvious that we cannot go there. I do think we can take some things we like from the Chunin exams in Konoha. Personally, I like the first test where they either have to get the test right or cheat and gather other people's answers. It is a very good test of their practical abilities to gather information. That makes sense, Shikaku. The second part is where we should do it differently. We just came out of a civil war, and we cannot have anyone die in these exams. Which is different from the ones in Konoha. Obviously, one of the big reasons for the Chunin exams to involve many countries is to show strength to other countries. Because of that, people can die in the second and third rounds of the Chunin exams. Due to that, we cannot exactly copy what the second round of the exams is like in Konoha. We should have two Chunin guarding a water clone that does not fight back in a building. Acting like a normal mission where a Chunin is defending someone and you have to kill the civilian they are defending. And the Genin teams will be graded on if they can kill the water clone. If the team cannot beat two Chunin while they have 3 people on their team, then they do not deserve to be Chunin. That is a good idea, Shikaku, but I think that they have to do it without dealing any serious life-threatening damage to the Chunin as well. And the Chunin will have to not use anything lethal on the Genin as well. That makes sense, Itachi. The third part of the exam should be the one-on-one fights. Obviously, you do not have to win to become a Chunin. We have a very strong group of Genin this year with the 5 ninja swordsmen; this would be a great way to introduce them to our village. But due to it being a very strong crop of Genin, I would recommend at least an A-rank level proctor for parts 2 and 3 of the exams just so people can be safe. I agree, Shikaku, those are good ideas. Thank you for your help; you are dismissed. Thank you, Mizukage.

All the Genin from Mei, Might Guy, Anko, Kisame, and the Zabaza Genin teams, and other hidden Mist Genin, entered the Chunin exam testing room. Inside was a very big room with an extremely high number of chairs. Now that you Genin are here, I will explain the first part of the Chunin exams. Firstly, my name is Ao, and I will be the proctor of the first part of your Chunin exams. You will all receive a sheet of paper with test questions you must answer. You will be seated in places away from your teammates. If you get caught trying to cheat more than 3 times, you will fail the exam. There will be 9 questions, and then I will give you the final question once you have finished. On the board, you will see where you are supposed to be seated. All of the Genin teams went to their assigned seats, and Ao passed out the test questions. Shikamaru from Anko’s Genin team immediately realized that the test questions were going to be way too hard for his teammates Choji and Ino. Since all teammates were seated in different spots in the room, he would have to be creative about how he got them the information needed. Shikamaru made hand signs for his shadow paralysis jutsu behind his back so he would not be noticed. He attached his shadow to Ino and Choji, moving their hands and completing the first 9 questions of the exam. Mindy from Mei’s Genin team opened up the test and immediately knew that her two teammates, Shunske and Akira, would not be able to get these questions right. Luckily for them, she could do this test in her sleep. She made hand signs under the table and started to drop droplets of water on her teammates. Shunsuke and Akira were both confused, but both eventually understood that the droplets of water were a code for what they had to write down. Sasuke from Kisame’s Genin team instantly could tell that these test questions were too hard. Luckily, his sister-in-law, Mindy, was a genius and was in the room. He turned on his Sharingan and copied Mindy’s hand movements. He used the kiba blades on his back to generate electricity for his teammate Chojuro to move his body to write down the answers Sasuke was copying from Mindy. Shino knew that this test was too hard for them. Shino, Hinata, and Naruto could maybe pass, but it would be very close to failing. He used his bugs and he could tell that his teammate Hinata had her Byakugan on him. Shino used his bugs to copy the answers from Mindy, the well-known genius. Hinata copied Shino’s hand movements. Shino used his bugs on Naruto’s arm to move it with the correct answers. When Haku got her test, she realized that only she from her Genin team could possibly get the answer correct on the test. Under the desk, she did her Ice Mirrors Jutsu and put them on her teammates Rock Lee's and Yuuhi's tests. Using a water clone She used these mirrors to flash the answers and then break the mirrors for each test question. All right. It looks like you guys are ready for the 10th question, Genin. Firstly, teams 2, 3, 5, 12, 15, and 16—you were all caught cheating. Get out. There was a look of such sadness and disappointment on the faces of the Genin that got caught. All right, we have 10 Genin teams left. The 10th question has a special condition. If you do not get the 10th question correct, you will never be Chunin! Ao was surprised at how that threat did not faze Anko, Kisame, Zabuza, Mei, and Might Guy’s Genin teams. Ao saw two Genin teams let the fear take over them. They were so scared and left the exam room. Ao waited to see if anyone else would leave but nobody did. All right, you guys, the 10th question was the question in itself. If you guys had left, that would mean you do not have the resolve needed to go on tough missions as Chunin. There will be missions where your enemy is much stronger than expected and you will have to have the resolve needed to see those missions through. You guys have passed the first exam.

All right, there are 8 Genin teams left; your proctor for the next exam will come in now. Kakashi Hatake walked through the door and Naruto and Hinata were happy to see their adoptive father. Thank you for the introduction, Ao. Again, MA MA I am Kakashi Hatake. I will be your proctor for the second stage of the Chunin exams. I will explain what the second stage will be like. There will be two Chunin defending a water clone. Your job will be to dispel the water clone. The water clone will not fight back against you. If you do fight the two Chunin, you must not use lethal force. The Chunin will not use lethal force on any of you either. Each Chunin you guys fight will be different for each of the 8 Genin teams. The Chunin will give the signal when they are ready for you to enter the forest. We have medical ninjas waiting outside to heal any injuries you or the Chunin receive.

Kakashi took the 8 Genin teams to a circular forest of trees with a 2-story building in the middle of the forest. The forest was close to the ocean, so you could feel a nice breeze in the air. Alright, the first team to go into the forest is Team Anko Hatake’s team. Two Chuin ran into the forest. After 30 minutes, they gave the signal that they were ready. Shikamaru, Ino, and Choji all looked at each other and walked to the edge of the tree line. Ino and Choji follow behind me until we get to the house. These are Chunin; there are probably tons of traps in this forest. There is no reason for us to move too fast to our target. Ino and Choji seriously nodded back to Shikamaru and followed their leader. Shikamaru easily led his group through the high quantity of traps the 2 Chunin left in the forest. Alright, you guys, let's stop here. We have been through most of this forest so the water clone must be in that building. Let's have our snakes find a gap in the building and find out where the shadow clone is. After that, we will know how to attack. Choji, you have the most chakra; you summon them. Yes, Shikamaru. Choji used the Hidden Shadow Snake Hands and snakes came out of Choji’s hand, and then they saw the snakes come back out. After it came outside, they told the 3 Genin where the water clone was located. It looks like the water clone is on the second floor, the second door to the right. There was one girl, Chunin, located in front of the water clone. And there was one boy, Chunin, at the main doorway. All right, we will use our shadow hands to attack the guy that is guarding the door. That should give me enough time to attack him with my shadow to bind him. Then Choji and Ino go upstairs to where the water clone is. Choji, when you see the water clone, use your beast ball and destroy it. Ino, support him with your mind transfer. Ino and Choji both nodded seriously to Shikamaru’s plan. Shikamaru said, Hidden Shadow Snake Hands. 8 snakes came out of Shikamau’s sleeves. Shikamaru had the snakes go into the house first and there was a shocked scream from the Chunin guarding the door. Shikamaru came through the door, followed by Ino and Choji. The snakes were attacking the Chunin in such a way that the Chunin was running towards Shikamaru. Shikamaru made hand signs for his Shadow Possession technique. The Chunin had a shocked look on his face; he was frozen. Ino and Choji go upstairs now, and I will stall him. Choji and Ino both ran upstairs and went to the room with the water clone, with the girl Chunin standing in front of it with 2 kunai drawn. Choji used his human bullet tank to move to the Chunin. Ino said, Hidden Shadow Snake Hands and the Chunin jumped back, scared from the snakes. This jump gave enough space for Choji to hit the water clone with his Human Bullet tank, dispersing it. Which meant they passed this level of the Chunin Exams. Shikamaru started walking to the exit, followed by Ino and Choji. While walking outside to the exit of the forest. The Chunin that was a girl was crying, worried about the boy that was poisoned by Shikamaru. Ino and Choji gave Shikamaru a confused look. Yeah, when I had my shadow paralysis on the Chunin and you guys went upstairs, I used my snakes to poison him just in case you guys needed my help upstairs. Shikamaru walked up to the crying girl. Don't worry, the poison will wear off. Thank you. I will stay by his side. If I stay by his side, maybe finally he will choose me to be his girlfriend. The Chunin started freaking out because snakes were coming out of the ground around her. Ino walked through the trees with her hands clasped together, praying about how she would purge the boy-crazy demons in her. Shikamaru and Choji dragged Ino away from the Chunin while Shikamaru was mumbling about troublesome women.

Haku, Rock Lee, and Yuuhi all saw 2 Genin teams come out of the forest with defeated looks on their faces. They had Kunia sticking out of their arms and back. This meant that so far, out of the 8 Genin teams that have made it this far, 1 team has passed and 2 teams have failed. Alright, the next team is Might Guy’s team. The 3 Genin saw the 2 guys that were wearing Chinin vests enter the forest before them and waited for the signal that they were ready for them to enter the forest. They saw the signal and then entered. Rock Lee and Yuuhi wait. They both looked at Haku. We should just use Yuuhi’s ability to sense chakra, and then I will enter the gates and throw the senbon, dispersing the water clone. Rock Lee looked sad that he would not look youthful in front of his girlfriend. Haku put her hand on Rock Lee’s head. I am sure this forest has a ton of traps and I am worried you would get hurt with one. How about this, Lee? I will spar with you later today after this. Lee’s whole facial expression changed to extreme happiness due to how much he loved training with his girlfriend. Haku looked at Yuuhi for her opinion. Hey, the sooner we get done with this, the sooner I get to relax with the waves. Yuuhi sensed the chakra in the area. Haku, we have to run around the treeline for a while to the right. He's standing in front of the water clone right now. We have to run until we have an angle so he will not be hit. Haku and Rock Lee followed Yuuhi for about 30 seconds until she found a good angle to throw the senbon. Yuuhi pointed her finger in the direction of the building. It is about 1,000 feet away. You will have to enter the second gate with all the tree branches it will have to go through. Haku said, The Gate of Opening. A green aura surrounded Haku. The Gate of Healing, Haku said, and the green aura surrounded Haku even more. She threw the senbon at incredible speed and it pierced holes through dozens of branches and went through the building, piercing the water clone in the head and piercing through the other side of the building, going through 20 more branches before falling. The Chunin in the building was in complete shock because the water cone just dispersed. Without warning. Haku, my flower, that was a most youthful throw! Haku blushed at her boyfriend's compliment. Haku, Rock Lee, and Yuuhi all walked out of the forest. All of the Genin teams were completely shocked at the quickness of them defeating that stage. Kakashi, the proctor of the exam, knew that this team was his best friend’s team. But he could not believe that Might Guy, the taijutsu specialist, had cultivated Haku into a long-range specialist like that. Kakashi himself had been on many assassination ANBU missions and seen some very talented people there. But he had never seen someone more talented for ANBU assassination missions than the Haku and Yuuhi combination.

Ma Ma, the next team up is Zabuza’s Genin team. Shino, Hinata, and Naruto all saw the Chunin they were going up against giving the signal that they were ready. They went inside to the edge of the tree line. Alright, Hinata, use your Byakugan to find the two Chunin and the water clone. Hinata nodded to Shino. It looks like one Chunin is on a tree near the building. The other one is in the opposite direction of the water clone in the house. He probably wants us to turn our backs to him in the hallway to get to the water clone so he can attack us. But yeah, the water clone is on the second level. All right, Hinata, you take care of the guy in the tree. Naruto I will take care of the Chunin in the building with my new jutsu. Naruto, you dispel the clone. Hinata, we are going to wait for you to defeat the Chunin to make our move. Hinata nodded and they went to the opposite side of the forest. Hinata snuck up on the Chunin without issue and then, using her Nuibari sword, she sewed the Chunin to the tree and gave the signal to Naruto and Shino to go in the building. Naruto, get behind me, and when I tell you, head to the water clone. Shino had a lot of bugs leaving his body and went upstairs to the Chunin. Shino made hand signs for the Earth Prison Dome of Magnificent Nothingness. The Chunin upstairs screamed in surprise as an earth dome was surrounding him. The Chunin felt weird and then realized that his chakra was being drained. Shino gave the nod to Naruto, who ran upstairs, dispersing the water clone. Shino dropped his jutsu and the Chunin passed out. Naruto walked downstairs and gave a thumbs up to Shino that it was complete. Hinata, you can release the Chunin; we completed the mission. Hinata released her sewing string and jumped down to walk with her teammates out of the arena. Shino, your new jutsu is crazy. Combining the chakra-draining abilities of your bugs with the chakra-draining abilities of that earth dome is such a cool combination. I think I can speak for Hinata and say that we are just trying to keep pace with your growth rate. Naruto grinned. First we become Chunin, and then I will become Mizukage. Believe IT! Shino and Hinata grinned at their teammate's optimistic nature as they left the forest. Kakashi gave Hinata and Naruto a proud thumbs-up as they left the exam area.

3 teams have passed so far and 2 have failed. The next team up is Mei Uchiha’s Genin team. Mindy, Shunske, and Akaria all waited for their Chunin to get ready, and once they saw the signal, Mindy, Shunske, and Akira entered the grounds for the second exam. So far, each team has had to go to the building in the middle to disperse the water clone so we should assume it is over there. Stay behind me and we should avoid traps without issue. Akira and Shunske both nodded at Mindy and they started running through the trees of the forest. Okay, so this is what we will do. I will use the hidden mist jutsu. Then Akiria and I will go on opposite sides of the building. Akira and I will both use the Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique at the same time on the first floor of the building. If our first attack does not pop it, then it means the water clone is upstairs, and we will have to go pop it. Shunske, we will run behind you upstairs since you are the best at Taijutsu. Akira and Shunske both nodded at Mindy. Mindy made hand signs for Hidden Mist Jutsu, and the area was covered in water mist. Mindy and Akira both made hand signs for the Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. Two very big water dragons broke both sides of the walls on the first floor and did a lot of damage. Akira and Mindy both followed Shunske in the building and it was obvious that there was nobody on the first floor so they went upstairs. They all saw Cuinin to the right and started going in her direction. She made an earth wall in between them. The 3 Genin heard water rushing at them and there was a Chunin behind them who just launched Water Release: Wild Water Wave. Mindy realized it was a trap before anyone else and made hand signs. Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. Her water technique was double the size of the Chunin's and easily pushed the Chunin's attack back, struck the Chunin, and knocked the Chunin out. The Chunin had a shocked look on his face while unconscious due to a Genin having that much chakra reserves and mastery over ninjutsu. Mindy looked back through the rooms that were not blocked by the earth wall and could not see a water clone. She quickly realized that using that earth wall to trap them for the other Chunin's water attack was not its only purpose. The wall must have a dual purpose of blocking them from the room the water clone was in. Akira, we will have to launch two more Water Dragon Bullet techniques at the same spot on this earth wall to break it down. Shunsuke, after the wall breaks down, go attack the Chunin with your Taijutsu. Akira and I will dispel the water clone. Shunske nodded to Mindy. Mindy and Akira both made hand signs for the Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. Two very big water dragons pierced the middle of the earth wall at the same time, which broke it down. The Chunin behind the wall jumped back to make more hand signs but had to defend against Shunske’s kick. Mindy and Akira looked in the first room they saw and it had the water clone, which they dispelled. Mindy Akira and Shunsuke all left the forest happy, feeling good after completing the second stage of the exam.

Sasuke was proud of her sister-in-law Mindy’s team passing the exam. Sasuke saw another Genin team enter the forest who came back out and passed out with kunai all on their backs coming out of the forest. This meant so far 4 Genin teams have passed these exams and 3 have failed. He and Chojuro were the last Genin team to take the test. Kakashi said, Team Kisame, please come here and wait for the signal that your Chunin are ready. Sasuke and Chojuro walked to Kakashi and waited for the signal that they were ready, saw it, and entered the forest. Chojuro, we are much stronger than these Chuin so there is no reason to get fancy with being quiet. Let's go around all of the wooded area before getting to the building in the middle, where every water clone has been so far. Chojuro and Sasuke easily avoided all of the traps around the forest and then when they almost did a full circle, Sasuke put his hand on Chojuro. And pointed to a Chunin on a tree branch. Sasuke focused his eyes on his 3-tome sharingan and then ran in front of the Chunin, who surprised him. Sasuke made eye contact with the Chunin to use his genjutsu, Magen: Moeru Karada Kami no Jutsu. The Chunin thought that he was burning to death and jumped backwards. The Chunin felt all of the breath leave his body as Chojuro used his powerful sword to hit him all the way into the ground, making a dent in the ground, which made the Chunin go unconscious. Chojuro, there is nobody else in the forest. That building’s 1st floor is completely destroyed. Let's jump on top of the building and then jump through the glass on the second floor. When we are in the hallway, you look to the left and I will look to the right. Chojuro nodded to Sasuke and then followed Sasuke. Jumping through the window. When he looked to the left, he saw the Chunin there waiting with hand signs ready and said, Fire Release: Dragon Fire Technique. A fireball was headed to Chojuro, who made hand signs for Water Release: Exploding Water Colliding Wave: A big wave of water dispelled the Chunin’s fire jutsu and struck the Chunin, defeating them. Sasuke found the water clone in the room and dispersed it, which meant that Chojuro and he had passed this round of the exams.

Kakashi saw Sasuke and Chojuro walk out of the Chunin exam area and to the group of Genin left. Everyone come over here so I can tell you about what you can expect from the last part of the Chunin exams. So there are 5 Genin teams that passed the second stage of the Chunin exams. Congratulations to Mei’s team, Kisame’s team, Might Guy’s team, Zabuza’s team and Anko’s team. Between you all, there are 14 Genin. The next round will be one-on-one fights. There will be a week break in between each round of these one-on-one fights so you guys can recover from damage and your chakra reserves. You do not have to win these fights to be made Chunin. The Mizukage will watch the fights and give you your ranks after they are all completed. Now, after the 1st round, we will have 7 fighters left so whoever does the best in their fight in the 1st round will get a bye for that next round. I have a cup here with strips of paper. Numbered 1-14. Each person will come up and pick a piece of paper and then we will move on to the next step. Now that everyone has picked a piece of paper, who has number 1? Yosh! It is I, Rock Lee, ready for a most youthful fight! Okay, who has number 2? Naruto raised his hand. That is my number. I will prove that I will be the next Mizukage; believe it! Well, the first fight will be you two, Rock Lee versus Naruto. Who has number 3? Shunske walked forward. I have it. Who has number 4? Sasuke walked forward and said, I have it. I look forward to us showing the people of Kiri our pride for our village. Sasuke nodded his head to Shunske, who did not respond. As I am sure you have figured out, the next fight will be Shunsuke versus Sasuke. Who has number 5? Chojuro walked forward and said proudly, It is me. Who has number 6? Yuuhi had a shocked look on her face and said, It is me. Chojuro felt sad that he was going to have to fight his friend Yuuhi. Yes, the next fight will be Chojuro versus Yuuhi. Who has number 7? Haku walked forward; that is me with a calm look on her face. Who has number 8? Ino walked forward. I have number 8. Ino looked at Haku with a determined look. So the next fight will be Haku versus. Ino. Who has number 9? Hinata raised her hand and said, Me, in a quiet tone. Who has number 10? Akira raised her hand and said to me while making sure not to make eye contact with Hinata. The next fight is Hinata versus Akira. Who has number 11? Shino walked forward and said me. Who has number 12? Shikamaru walked forward and said, Even though it is troublesome, it is me. The next fight is Shino versus Shikamaru. Who has number 13? Mindy walked forward and said me. Who has number 14? Choji walked forward and said me. The next fight is Mindy versus Choji. These will all be your 1st round fights in the Chunin exams.

Chapter 20: Chapter 20 Part 2 of the Chunin Exams

Summary:

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei

There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki, apart from Orochimaru.

This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon; I will try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.

There is only one story at a time.

I will be updating one chapter at a time.

You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. (I do own the amount of time it took to get exact jutsus for our favorite characters.)

Original Characters List

Mindy- She is Mei’s little sister and has been in this fanfiction since chapter 4 and is on Mei’s Genin team.

Yuuhi- She is a sensor-type ninja who is on Might Guy’s Genin team.

Shunske- He is a good taijutsu user and is on Mei’s Genin team.

Akira- She is a Hoziki clan descendant and is on Mei’s Genin team.

Minato Hatake- Kakashi and Anko’s 1-year-old baby boy.

Ch. 20

Rock Lee: Naruto, Sasuke , Hinata, Haku, Mindy, Shikamaru, Yuuhi, Shunsuke, Akira, Ino, Shino, and Choji. They all walked through the entrance of the stadium. Inside were thousands of rows of seats. The grass on the ground had become muddy due to recent rain. All of the Genin were shocked by the large crowd present. There had to be tens of thousands. A chant started in the arena: 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! The Genin could tell that Kiri had pride in their world-famous Seven swordsmen of the mist. For Hinata, Naruto, Shino, Chojuro, and Sasuke It was sinking in how much they, as the 7 swordsmen, meant for their village. Kisame walked forward to the group of 14 Genin. I will be the proctor of these exams. We have some strong fighters here so if I think an attack can kill one of you, I will stop it. When I declare a winner, you must stop your attacks immediately. First in the tournament is Naruto versus Rock Lee. Everyone else, walk upstairs. The crowd was excited to see one of the new 7 swordsmen, Naruto Namikaze. Naruto walked to one side of the arena and Rock Lee walked to the other. Yosh! I am Rock Lee; we will have a most youthful fight! Naruto grinned at the ever-youthful Rock Lee and said, Yes, let's have a good fight!! Kisame signaled to start the fight.

Rock Lee sprinted at Naruto with extreme speed. Naruto was able to use his Hiramekarei sword to stop the taijutsu attack, but it was barely in time. Naruto quickly realized that Rock Lee’s speed is an issue. Knowing this, he pushed chakra to his Hiramekarei sword to extend its length and transform it into massive rectangular blades. Naruto, instead of just having two of his Hiramekarei blades in one hand, he put one sword in each hand. Rock Lee ran to Naruto again, trying to close the distance. The length of one sword stopped Rock Lee, and Naruto used the other sword to attack him, causing Rock Lee to jump back. Kakashi was in the stands with Anko and Hinata to his left and Might Guy, Haku, and Yuuhi to his right. I would say the ever-creative Naruto has figured out a nice counter to your student Guy. Might Guy responds, Seriously, yes, Kakashi. It's a good idea for Naruto to use a longer blade to prevent Rock Lee from getting close with his speed. Using one blade offensively and the other defensively is a strategic approach. Naruto used his blades strategically to maintain distance from Rock Lee, who struggled to find a way past them. Naruto jumped back and made hand signs. Wind Release Pressure Damage. A tornado-like air mass is compressed until it has a very high density and it is then released. The wide-ranging wind attack left Rock Lee hitting the wall and it took him a while to get back up. Rock Lee looked up in the stands at his sensei, Might Guy, who gave him a thumbs up. Yosh! I can finally take my weights off. Everyone in the arena was weirded out at what some small weights could improve. When Rock Lee dropped the weights, there was a big crater in the earth, which shocked all the people in the stadium into silence. Naruto was shocked at how much faster Rock Lee was. Rock Lee easily got past the two swords Naruto was using and kicked him a few feet back in the stomach. Naruto flipped backwards off the ground and made hand signs for the multishadow clone jutsu. Ten Naruto clones appeared and began attacking Rock Lee. Rock Lee expelled each clone, but it took about a minute to get to the original Naruto. Naruto made hand signs again for the multi-shadow clone jutsu. 10 more Narutos popped out of the smoke. Using all the Hiramekarei swords, they formed a circle around Naruto and uttered the command, "Wind Release Vacuum Sword." A circle of wind grew outward at such a rapid pace. Rock Lee was shocked by how wide-ranging the jutsu was and was slammed into the wall at the edge of the Chunin exams arena, making a dent. Blood was coming out of Rock Lee when he woke up. He looked up at his sensei. Might Guy nodded back to him and Rock Lee and said, "The Gate of Opening." Then a green aura surrounded Rock Lee. Naruto was shocked at how fast Rock Lee expelled his shadow clones and then, before he could block Rock Lee’s kick, he was kicked in the chest into the wall of the Chunin exams.

Naruto focused and saw the 9-tailed fox and said, I am going to have to use your power. The 9-tailed fox snarled back at him from behind his cage. You do not have to ask every time, like I am your parent, brat. The more sleep I get, the less time I need to talk to you every day. Every day you talk about how you are going to be Mizukage. Believe it! Every day, over and over, it is so annoying. Naruto grinned and then said, I will be Mizukage, believe it! Naruto then departed from the Midscape, leaving behind the sound of a 9-tailed fox screaming. Naruto focused on bringing out his one tail of 9-tailed chakra mode and put his chakra into the sword, making it 5 times as big. Rock Lee was surprised at how much faster Naruto was. The longer sword made it tough for Rock Lee to get close enough to attack him. Rock Lee risked all and jumped in the air to try to get past the sword. Rock Lee’s eyes were shocked when the sword got bigger and struck him in the chest in the air. His eyes went into shock at his flying body toward the wall. Rock Lee looked up in amazement at how much damage one hit of the sword did; it was abnormal. Rock Lee realized it must have something to do with the orange aura surrounding Naruto that fully encased the Hiramekarei sword in the orange aura as well. Realizing he needed to intensify his efforts, Rock Lee uttered, "The gate of healing." Naruto, seeing that Rock Lee’s green aura got even stronger, prepared to use the Wind Release: Air Bullets technique. Massive air bullets shot out to Rock Lee at speeds he would not normally be able to dodge. The impact they were leaving on the wall or the ground assured him that they could not hit him. It seemed like the air bullets had no end to them. Rock Lee kept on having to dodge; after 15 air bullets, they stopped. Rock Lee dashed towards Naruto, matching him in both speed and power. Each time he kicked Naruto, Naruto defended himself effortlessly using his sword. Rock Lee, knowing that his time frame at this gate had ended, jumped back and got ready to open the fourth gate. Naruto saw Rock Lee and had a grin on his face because he realized that there must be a short time limit on Rock Lee’s gates. Naruto made hand signs for the Shadow Clone Jutsu. 4 Narutos puffed through the smoke. Naruto saw Rock Lee shouted, "The Gate of Pain," and his green aura grew. The four shadow clones and the real Naruto all made hand signs at the same time for wind-release air bullets. Naruto was surprised at how Rock Lee was quick enough to dodge his wind attacks. He knew that he could use this attack 75 times in total, including his shadow clones. Rock Lee was so quick and swift that Naruto knew he would eventually attack after dodging each one. Naruto’s grin came back on his face since Rock Lee was dodging so much that his time frame in the gate where he could attack him would be limited. After the last wind bullet, Naruto took a defensive stance with his sword in hand and tried to block it. Rock Lee delivered a punch to Naruto's stomach, sending him crashing into the wall. Rock Lee jumped back, knowing that he would have to enter the Fifth gate now to try to win. Rock Lee shouted, "The Gate of Limit!" and started sprinting to Naruto. He was surprised to see two tails surrounding Naruto now, and his sword was twice as large. Rock Lee sprinted at Naruto and was going to punch him, but he was not there. He felt something smash into his back, and his body slammed into the wall, which had a hole in it. Kisame was impressed by Naruto's skillful timing of the sword spin, which allowed him to counter Rock Lee's speed and momentum by hitting in the direction he was running. Naruto’s kenjutsu skill had gone up tremendously. He really looked like one of the 7 swordsmen of the mist. Kisame jumped in the middle of Naruto and Rock Lee, seeing as Rock Lee was barely conscious. Kisame screamed to the crowd, "The match is over!" Naruto Namikaze is your winner. The crowd was cheering so loudly after such a wonderful fight between the Genin, with one of their 7 swordsmen fighting. Naruto went over to check on Rock Lee. Rock Lee, with barely any strength left in his body, said, Naruto, you are my rival. Rock Lee’s body was about to hit the ground, but an ice mirror appeared behind him, and Haku came out of it, catching her boyfriend’s body. Haku bowed to Naruto and said thank you for fighting him so honorably. Naruto replied nervously, "You don't have to bow." I also enjoyed fighting him a lot. If he ever wants to spar, just let me know. Haku nodded and then sprinted with enormous speed with Rock Lee to the medical area to heal him. Naruto, walking to the stands, was surprised at the crowd. They were chanting. Naruto Namikaze! 7 swordsmen! Naruto Namikaze! 7 swordsmen! Naruto Namikaze! 7 swordsmen! Naruto realized he must have zoned out the crowd that was screaming so loud. Naruto smiled at the crowd and jumped and waved and walked towards where Hinata, Kakashi, and Anko were sitting. He was so happy that he was at a place where he felt accepted by the whole village.

Kisame shouted: Sasuke and Shunsuke, come down to fight in the Chunin exams! Sasuke glanced at Shunsuke with pity and assumed his fighting stance. Kisasme shouted, Fight! Shunsuke rushed at Sasuke, but Sasuke blocked each of his punches effortlessly with his Kiba Blades. I heard about what you went through in your childhood, Shunske. I am sorry for what happened to you. This village has a lot of love to give and I am sure if you forgive it, you will see how great it is, just like I do. Shunsuke's expression turned angry. The idea that by blocking some punches you would be able to force me to think like you is beyond crazy! Who do you think you are giving me that pitiful look?! I know that people will take their anger out on anyone that they can find. At the age of 5, I tried to run from those people, but I could not get away. They hit me, beat me, and took their anger out on me. You want me to just magically see this village through the rose-tinted glasses you wear. What kind of psychopath are you? Even now, Sasuke, you perceive me as someone deserving of pity; you are not making an effort to fight me. You view yourself as the better person so you are not taking me seriously. With a look of realization on his face, Sasuke's body froze as Shunsuke delivered a powerful punch to his face. Focusing his eyes on his Sharingan, Sasuke placed Shunske in a genjutsu and kicked him against the wall. You are right, Shunsuke. I will fight you like the equal you are. Shunsuke made hand signs and commanded, 'Earth Spear!' Shuske’s arms went black from his elbow down. Sasuke was surprised when he tried blocking Shunsuke’s punch that he was pushed back. Shunsuke used a kick to move the sword to Sasuke's left, then moved to Sasuke's right side of his body and punched him in the gut, sending Sasuke back a few feet. Sasuke, taking Shunkse more seriously, turned on his 3-tomoe Sharingan and pushed lightning through his Kiba blades. Every punch Shunsuke threw, Sasuke dodged effortlessly. He then slashed Shunske through the stomach. Shunske went to the floor in pain. Kisame declared the match over and was glad that Sasuke only gave Shunske a shallow cut on the stomach. Sasuke bowed to Shunsuke. Thank you for showing me that I should not be pitying and forcing my thought process on others. The crowd was roaring… Sasuke! 7 swordsmen! Sasuke! 7 swordsmen! Sasuke had a big smile on his face. But in the crowd full of people, the proud clapping of his brother Itachi with Mei and Mindy next to Itachi made his smile that much more genuine.

Kisame called out, "Yuuhi and Chojuro, come down to fight in the Chunin exams!" Chojuro Chojuro nervously looked at Yuuhi and said, "I really do not want to do this." I could never hurt you, Yuuhi. I appreciate your kindness, she said back. Yuuhi warmly smiled back at Chojuro. Let's just treat this match as a friendly spar. Chojuro brought out his Kabutowari sword. Kisame said, Fight! Chojuro made hand signs and said, Hidden Mist Jutsu. The mist then enveloped the exam. Chojuro was about to start looking for Yuuhi when he heard a gentle whisper in his ear. "My Chojuro," Yuuhi whispered, "you should remember I am a sensor." Yuuhi kicked Chojuro in the back, and Chojuro jumped back, ending the hidden mist jutsu. Yuuhi took off the weights from her legs, and they dropped to the ground. Chojuro was impressed at how much faster Yuuhi had gotten. Yuuhi would kick and punch at Chojuro and be faster than him. However, Yuuhi was taken aback by the strength of Chojuro's sword strikes, enabling him to effortlessly block her punches and kicks, even as they approached him. Chojuro realized that at such a close distance he could use the jutsu Kisame recently taught him to win. Chojuro made hand signs and said, "Water Prison Jutsu." A circular water globe surronded Yuuhi and she started to choke on the water. Kisame, realizing that Yuuhi had no way to get out of the water prison, declared the fight over. Chojuro immediately broke the water prison and caught Yuuhi. He was worriedly slapping her back to get water out of her throat. Yuuhi opened her eyes and kindly grinned at Chojuro. She had a sad, sarcastic look on her face and said, Man, I really wish you would have had to give me mouth-to-mouth. Chojuro reacted nervously to Yuuhi and had no clue what to say in response. to say back. She had been making many jokes like that over the past few months. He honestly thought she just enjoyed seeing his embarrassed face. Chojuro, come here. Yuuhi slowly leaned to Chojuro and gave him a kiss on the lips. Chojuo looked back at her beautiful blue eyes in shock that she wanted to kiss him. I like you, Chojuro. Chojuro, with a very nervous expression, said, "I mean, I like you too, Yuuhi." I just don’t know if I am enough to make you happy. Chojuro saw Yuuhi look at him with caring eyes that he had only observed from his mother. Yuuhi put her hand on Chojuro’s face and said, You are a better person than you give yourself credit for. Then Yuuhi and Chojuro shared a loving hug.

Kisame shouted: Haku and Ino, come down to fight in the Chunin exams! Ino got in her stance and looked seriously at the expressionless Haku. In the crowd, Rock Lee, covered in bandages, exclaimed, "My flower, you have a most youthful match!" Haku! Haku! Haku. Ino looked at Haku and said, Wow, you have a passionate friend. He is not my friend; he is my boyfriend. Ino saw a look on Haku’s face that said, “I dare you to talk bad about my boyfriend.” Ino got out her kunai to make sure not to antagonize her opponent. Haku got out her senbon. Kisame yelled, Fight! Haku threw senbon at Ino at a rapid speed, which Ino dodged. Haku sprinted towards Ino, unleashing a punch and a spinning kick that knocked Ino back a few feet. Ino hurled a smoke bomb and continued to leap backward. Ino was shocked at Haku’s taijutsu skill but now knew that she would just have to keep this fight at long range. She summoned snakes from her sleeves to bite and restrain Haku in place. She placed her hands on her head and declared, "Mind Transfer Jutsu." Surprisingly, the Haku body exploded into a water clone. Haku jumped out of an ice mirror behind Ino and kicked her in the back. As Ino lay on the ground, Haku exclaimed, "Demonic Mirroring Ice Crystals." Ino was awed by the dome of crystals. Haku jumped into the crystals, using her afterimage to make it look like she was at every ice mirror. Haku started throwing senbon and Ino dodged the first few, but a few hit her. Ino grabbed her arm in pain. Those senbon have poison in them; you should give up. Haku said to Ino. Well, I guess I will surprise you because I am immune to poison. Haku returned to the mirrors. She kept throwing the senbon at Ino and hit enough pressure points for her to go to sleep. Kisame called the fight over, with 40 senbon sticking out of Ino. Haku walked over to Kismae. Let me pull them out so nothing else gets hurt. Haku carefully pulled out every senbon. Ino woke back up and thought the fight was still ongoing. Kisame declared the fight over when Ino passed out. Ino's face was filled with sadness as she realized she had lost. Ino walked over to Haku. I had such a wonderful time fighting you, Haku. Your commitment to being such a strong kunoichi is so cool. Can we be friends and spar as well? I think how seriously you take being a shinobi while being so beautiful is so cool! Haku, surprised at how forward Ino was, awkwardly said, Sure.

Kisame shouted: Akira and Hinata, come down to fight in the Chunin exams! The crowd was going wild with cheers. 7 Swordsmen! 7 Swordsmen! 7 Swordsmen! Hinata could also hear Ino, Kakashi, Anko, and Naruto screaming Hinata! in the crowd. All of this made Hinata smile. She saw Akira, her opponent, have a look of sadness on her face, which Hinata was all too familiar with. Akira said to Kisame, I will forfeit the match. Akira ran out of the chunin exams. Hinata was in shock, but Akira’s actions were very odd, so she chased after her. Using her Byakugan, she jumped in front of Akira. Akira, what is wrong? Oh, you know, with you being one of the 7 swordsmen, I was like, Woah, I have no chance! Hinata, having lived with Naruto for a long time, was well aware of when someone was attempting to use humor as a distraction from a topic. This is what Akira was doing right now with her forced fake smile. Akira I know something's wrong because I had the same sad, empty look you had before you forfeited the match with my old clan. Tears streamed uncontrollably from Akira's eyes. My clan should possess the ability to liquefy their bodies. However, I am unable to learn this skill and never will. For that reason, they never wanted me to become a shinobi. They only view me as someone destined for an arranged marriage with another clan member. Hinata ran to Akira, and they both hugged and cried, thinking about how sad and worthless their clans made them feel. Hinata nervously said to Akira, "I think we could be good friends because we've both had bad experiences with our clans." Akira smiled back and said, That sounds good.

Kisame shouted, Shino and Shikamaru, come down to fight in the Chunin exams! The crowd was going wild with cheers. 7 Swordsmen! 7 Swordsmen! 7 Swordsmen! Shino kept his focus on making eye contact with the lazy body-languaged Shikamaru. Shikamaru took out his kunai and Shino took out his Shibuki sword. Kisame yelled, Fight! Shino immediately rushed at Shikamaru and hit him with three sword strikes, which all landed on him. Shikamaru put down a smoke bomb. Luckily, Shino’s instincts to jump back were correct. Coming out of the smoke was Shikamaru’s shadow paralysis jutsu. Shino had to jump back five times, and then the shadow stopped moving. Shino realized that this must be how long Shikamaru’s jutsu can reach. Shino was confused as to how his bugs were not draining Shikamaru’s chakra. Shino’s eyes widened in realization that Shikamaru was somehow preventing his bugs from draining his chakra. Shikamaru had a grin on his face. It seems you've figured it out, Shino. My clan is involved in the trade of medicinal herbs, and we possess herbs that have the ability to induce nausea in insects and cause them to flee. I am currently wearing one of these herbs. Shino replied, "Well, luckily that is not the only way I can use my bugs." Shino used his bugs to move the paper bombs at fast speed at Shikamaru. Shikamaru kept running back and using smoke bombs whenever the paper bombs got close. After running around like this for a minute, Shikamaru ended up with some burn marks. Shikamaru used his Hidden Shadow Snake Hands, causing snakes to burrow into the muddy ground. Shikamaru made his hand signs for his shadow paralysis jutsu. Shino was ready for the snakes to end up behind him to attack him. He figured Shikamaru was using the snakes to force him into the range of his shadow paralysis technique. Shino kept using his Shibuki sword to hit the snakes and paper bombs to blow them up. When Shino turned around, he was confused because the shadow was going farther than before. He used the substitution technique with a rock, which Shikamaru was able to move his shadow to that rock. Now a few feet back, Shino wondered, how was he able to extend the length of the shadow paralysis? Shino pondered internally. Then he realized Shikamaru was using the shadows cast by his paper bombs to extend the reach of his jutsu. On top of that, Shikamaru told him that his bugs would not be able to drain his chakra, so Shino would use his paper bombs, and Shikamaru could trap him. Shino knew right away that Shikamaru was a bona fide genius, and if he had not used the substitution technique, he would have lost. But now he can not use his paper bombs, either. Shino looked at Shikamaru and said, What happens next is nothing but respect for your abilities. Shino made hand signs for Earth Prison Dome of Magnificent Nothingness. This led to Shikamaru becoming trapped inside the dome. I know you will break out of that dome, Shikamaru; but what will you do about this? Shino created a clone that performed hand signs for the Fire Release: Mist Blaze Dance Technique. Gas was coming out of Shino’s mouth and covering the whole exam area. Shikamaru, trapped inside the earth dome, kept kicking it in an attempt to break free. He noticed that, as he kicked the dome, the cracks repaired themselves. And he was feeling weaker, as he was in the dome. He then realized the dome was draining his chakra. Of course the guy with chakra-draining bugs would have an earth jutsu that drains chakra. He kept kicking the wall and finally found what he was looking for: a weak spot. He gave his snakes his 20 paper bombs and they burrowed underground and placed the paper bombs on the weak spot on the outside of the dome. When the paper bombs exploded, they made a hole in the wall, but the last thing Shikamaru smelled before going unconscious was gas. Shino saw the paper bombs explode, creating a hole in the wall. But when that happened, the paper bombs lit all of the gas he had put in the air, making a huge fireball that completely covered the arena in flames. The fire was so big that the people in the stands leaned back in their seats due to its size and heat. This fire blew a hole through the earth dome and shattered it, throwing Shikamaru to the wall with grave burn damage. Kisame immediately declared Shino the winner and sprinted, carrying Shikamaru, to the doctors to treat his burns. The crowd was going wild, screaming: 7 Swordsmen! 7 Swordsmen! 7 Swordsmen!

Kisame shouted: Mindy and Choji, come down to fight in the Chunin exams! Mindy heard Sasuke and Mei cheering for her in the crowd. Mindy took out a kunai, and so did Choji. Kisame yelled, Fight!" Choji immediately used his Human Bullet Tank technique. Mindy saw Choji's Human Bullet Tank technique coming straight at her. She dodged it. Mindy was shocked when the spinning ball bounced off the wall and hit her. Choji stopped spinning and made hand signs. Fire Release: Dragon Fire Technique. Mindy saw Choji spitting fire at her. Mindy made hand signs. Water Release: Water Formation Pillar. A circular barricade of water intercepted Choji’s attack and dispelled it. Mindy leaped backward and executed the Hidden Mist Jutsu technique. Mist enveloped the entire arena, causing Choji to whirl around, unable to discern Mindy's location. Mindy made hand signs. Earth Release: Bottomless Swamp. The ground became even muddier, engulfing Choji from the waist down, rendering him immobile. Mindy made hand signs. Water Dragon Bullet Technique An impressively big water dragon was heading straight for Choji, who could not move. Kisame immediately recognized that the impact could cause serious damage to Choji. Kisame made hand signs for Water Release: Exploding Water Colliding Wave and used the water wave to stop Mindy’s water dragon. Kisame then jumped in front of Choji, whose eyes were wide with fear as a giant attack was about to hit him. Kisame declared this match is over; the winner is Mindy. Sasuke and Mei started cheering very loudly. Itachi was clapping for her as well.

Itachi jumped into the middle of the arena. The crowd roared for their beloved Mizukage. I will announce the schedule for the next round of fights, which will take place next week. Due to us having an odd number of people left, the person who looked the best in round 1 gets a bye in round 2. The person who gets the bye is Naruto Namikaze. The crowd cheered for one of their seven swordsmen to get the bye. The first fight will be Hinata vs. Haku. The second fight will be Shino vs. Mindy. The last fight will be Sasuke vs. Chojuro. Thank you all for rooting for our young shinobi who have fought so well in our first round. I will see you all next week.

(1 week later)

Hinata, Haku, Shino, Mindy, Sasuke, and Chojuro walked into the stadium for the next round of their fights. The crowd was going wild, screaming—seven swordsmen! The crowd exclaimed, "7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen!" They all felt pride in making it to the second round of the exams. Kisame walked towards the group of hopeful Chunin. Congratulations on making it to the second round. Everyone should go upstairs except for Haku and Hinata. Haku heard Rock Lee and Might Guy screaming and cheering for her. She saw her new friend Ino cheering both Hinata and Haku. Hinata grinned at her new friend Akira's cheering and saw Naruto, Kakashi, and Anko all cheering for her as well. The crowd was loudly cheering 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen!

Hinata got into a fighting stance with her Nuibari sword and Haku took out her Senbon. Kisame shouted, Fight!" Haku immediately started throwing senbon at Hinata, which she dodged. Hinata turned on her byakugan to make it easier to see the senbon. Haku made hand signs for the Thousand Flying Water Needles of Death technique. She then directed the water needles toward Hinata. Hinata made hand signs for Earth Release: Earth Shore Return. An earth wall blocked Haku’s needles. Haku waited for Hinata to emerge from behind the wall, ready to attack her with more water needles. Then Haku felt a sword pierce her foot from below, causing her to jump back as blood flowed from the wound. She saw Hinata jump through the ground and she kept trying to hit her with her sword. Haku was impressed by Hinata's agility, which kept her on the defensive. The lightning-encased Nuibari sword pierced Haku, causing her to feel an odd sensation. Her left arm's ability to move correctly seemed to abruptly cease. Haku, realizing the danger she was in, jumped back and made hand signs for Demonic Mirroring Ice Crystals. A dome of mirrors surrounded a confused Hinata. Haku knew that Hinata would just tunnel through the ground to get around her ice mirrors. But it gave her enough time to take off her weights and drop to the ground and make a crater in the earth. Haku took out a senbon and waited for Hinata to attack her through the ground and when she did, Haku threw the senbon at Hinata and hit her. The increased speed surprised Hinata, so she jumped back and made hand signs. Hinata used the Lightning Rat Violent Quake technique. Hinata sent the five lightning disks to Haku. As Haku dodged the first one, she realized that they followed her movements. She managed to avoid the subsequent two, but the final two struck her. She felt an electric shock go through her body. Haku jumped up and looked around for Hinata but couldn't find her. She realized she must be underground again and got Senbon ready. The Nuibari sword came at her from the earth, and while jumping back, Haku realized that Hinata was no longer putting her arm through it either. This meant that Haku had no way to strike Hinata with her poisonous senbon. If I allow Hinata to stay underground, I will eventually make a mistake and be hit by that sword. I have no clue how she does it, but that sword is able to turn off body parts' ability to move with a single hit. If that happens, it's game over. I have no more chakra left. I must use the gates. Hinata was in the earth when she heard Haku say, Gate of opening. Then one of Haku’s senbon pierced the ground a few feet away from Hinata underground. Hinata immediately went to the balls of her feet and kept jumping in the opposite direction of these incredibly rapid attacks. The only reason why she did not get hit was due to her Byakugan's ability to see through the earth. Hinata knew these were Rock Lee's gates, and if she waited underground for them to expire, she'd win. She heard Haku shout, Gate of healing! Then, instead of throwing senbon, she saw Haku jump in the air and punch the earth. The impact made a crack in the earth and brought Haku to the same level below ground that Hinata was hiding at. Hinata struck Haku with her sword. But Haku was not there and all she felt was a severe pain in the back of her head that sent her several feet away. Kisame jumped in between a passed-out Hinata and Haku and declared Haku the winner of the match.

Kisame shouted, "Shino and Mindy, come down to the arena to fight in the Chunin exams!" Mindy walked to the arena and she could hear Mei and Sasuke both cheering very loudly. She was amazed by how much the crowd was cheering for Shino. They were screaming, "Seven Swordsmen! Seven Swordsmen! Seven Swordsmen." Shino got out his shibuki sword, and Mindy got out her two kunai. Kisame shouted, Start the fight! Shino quickly closed the distance between them. And he started to swing his sword at her head, which she blocked with her two kunai. She used two kunai to block his attempt to swing and strike her left stomach. Then Shino started to swing his sword to her left shoulder, and once Mindy moved the kunai to the left shoulder, Shino changed the direction of the sword and hit her in the left chest. Mindy winced in pain; she realized that she would lose in a close-range fight and then jumped back. Mindy made hand signs and said, Hidden Mist Jutsu. Suddenly, an extremely thick mist covered the arena. Kisame was impressed by how thick it was. Mindy then made hand signs. For Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. A massive water dragon charged toward Shino at incredible speeds. Shino created a firewall by using the paper bombs attached to his shibuki sword, causing steam to rise into the sky. Shino made hand signs for Earth Prison Dome of Magnificent Nothingness. An earth dome surrounded Mindy. She remembered that during Shino's fight with Shikamaru, he caused a gas explosion while trapping Shikamaru in the earth dome. Mindy smirked, knowing that she had prepared for this move. She made hand signs for the Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. Water Dragon Bullet Technique. A water dragon exploded out of the dome. It did so at a rapid pace. She made hand signs for Water Release. Water Formation Pillar: A dense pillar of water blocked Shino’s fire attack, and she jumped back. She made hand signs for the Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. A water dragon sprinted at Shino at enormous speed, and he made hand signs for Earth Release: Earth Shore Return. An earth wall stopped the attack but broke most of the earth wall. Mindy made hand signs for Earth Release: Bottomless Swamp. Shino was then waist-deep in mud and could not move. Mindy made hand signs for the Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. A water dragon was rapidly approaching Shino. Shino used the paper bombs attached to his blade to create a firewall in the air that would block the approaching attack. Steam once again blanketed the arena. Shino started breathing heavily; he did not have much chakra left. Mindy had a big smirk on her face. Yes, Shino. I can tell that you are low on chakra. I have been intentionally using a lot of ninjutsu because I know you will run out of chakra reserves before me. And you probably thought that those bugs of yours would drain my chakra but I made a hidden mist jutsu so thick that your precious bugs drowned in the air. Mindy made hand signs for Water Release: Water Dragon Bullet Technique. The water The dragon she produced was only a quarter the size of her normal ones. Shino easily deflected the attack, making a paper bomb wall. Mindy was in shock. Shino took advantage of the situation, closed the distance, and cut Mindy in both the shoulder and the stomach. Mindy tried to jump back but she had no chakra left to jump back with. Shino had his sword swinging to her neck, which Kisame caught and declared the fight over. Mindy was out of breath in shock at how her chakra reserves depleted. Shino calmly looked at her. When bugs are exposed to extreme conditions, they adapt. They reproduce so quickly that I was eventually able to create a strain of bugs that could survive drowning. Mindy was stunned that her perfect plan had been reversed like this. The crowd was going crazy, screaming, "Seven swordsmen! Seven swordsmen!" 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! Naruto ran downstairs to Shino and jumped into his arms. That was crazy, Shino. I can’t believe you won like that! Shino was pleased that he had teammates that cared for him so much.

Kisame shouted, "Sasuke and Chojuro, come down to the arena to fight in the Chunin exams!" The crowd was screaming much more loudly. Seven swordsmen!" 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! The crowd was very loud because it was the first time two of the seven swordsmen of the mist had fought in the chunin exams. Sasuke heard Mei cheering loudly for her and he saw Itachi clapping his hands. Chojuro was red in the face due to his mom sitting next to his new girlfriend, Yuuhi, who was cheering for him. Chojuro took out his Kabutowri sword, while Sasuke drew his Kiba blades and encased them in lightning. Chojuro, let's show our village our pride as ninja swordsmen! Okay, Sasuke! Chojuro said back seriously. Sasuke noticed that Chojuro started to look at Sasuke’s chest. I guess since we're teammates, you at least know not to make eye contact with me, Chojuro. Chojuro grinned back. If not, how would we put on a fantastic show? Kisame shouted, Fight!" Chojuro and Sasuke immediately closed the distance and were making sword strikes at each other. The crowd was in shocked silence at how outstanding the sword fight was. They both had beautiful sword strikes and footwork. There was no wasted movement and no mistakes. Sword fighting held significant cultural value for the Hidden Mist, which has a long history of seven renowned swordsmen. On top of that, they produced the best swords in the world. Therefore, witnessing these Genin display Kenjutsu skills comparable to those of Jonin was truly a beautiful sight. After the 15th strike, Chojuro was able to use the hammer and axe together in a downward swing, which allowed him to cut Sasuke. Sasuke smirked and said, “I guess you still have the edge in kenjutsu, Chojuro.” Then Sasuke jumped back. Sasuke pointed his Kiba blades at Chojuro and shouted, "Thunderbolt!" Sasuke unleashed a lightning bolt at Chojuro. Chojuro dodged the attack and made hand signs. Water Release: Exploding Water Colliding Wave. A water wave was sent at Sasuke. Sasuke made hand signs for Katon: Gokakyu no jutsu, which collided with Chojuro’s water attack, creating steam in the arena. Sasuke was able to see through the mist with his sharingan that Chojuro was going to use an attack that he knew only one thing would beat. Sasuke said, Let's put on a fantastic show, Chojuro! Chojuro smirked at his friend and made hand signs for Water Release: Exploding Water Colliding Wave. The crowd was in shock seeing a Genin using a high-Jonin-level water wave attack to that degree. Sasuke had a smile on his face and made hand signs for "Lightning Release Thunder Gate. Sasuke put the Kiba blades into the ground, which sent an electric charge toward the sky. The crowd was in awe at the lightning bolts coming from the sky. Sasuke used the kawarimi technique to go to the top of the stadium to avoid the lightning strikes and Chojuro’s water wave attack. The lightning bolts hit every part of the stadium floor and it felt like they would never stop. Chojuro managed to evade the initial four lightning strikes, but one still struck him. Kisame jumped to his student and declared Sasuke the winner. The crowd was going crazy, screaming, "Seven swordsmen! Seven swordsmen!" 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! Sasuke saw Mei and Itachi clapping at him and he felt happy that he lived in such a great village.

Itachi jumped to the ground in the arena and the crowd went crazy cheering on their beloved Mizukage. Thank you all for coming for the second round of the Chunin exams! The next round will be next week. The matchups will be Shino vs. Naruto. Next, Sasuke will face off against Haku. The crowd cheered very loudly due to how excellent Naruto, Shino, Haku, and Sasuke had looked so far. Thank you so much for coming and we will see you next week.

(1 week later)

Naruto, Shino, Haku, and Sasuke walked into the stadium for the next round of their fights. The crowd was going wild, screaming, "Seven swordsmen! The crowd exclaimed, "7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen!" They all felt pride in making it to the third round of the exams. Kisame walked towards the group of hopeful Chunin. Congratulations on making it to the third round of the Chunin exams. Sasuke and Haku go upstairs. Naruto and Shino stay downstairs for your fight.

The crowd was still going wild, screaming, "Seven swordsmen! The crowd exclaimed, "7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen!" Naruto heard Hinata, Kakashi, and Anko all cheering for him. We have sparred so much, Shino. I can’t wait to spar with you in front of this crowd. Believe it! Naruto said with a big smile on his face. Yes, I feel that way as well, Naruto. Naruto knew from his time sparring with his teammate that an extended fight would favor Shino. He knew that he would not have to feel him out and his abilities. Naruto took out his Hiramekeri swords and Shino took out his Shibuki sword. Kisame yelled, Fight!" Naruto immediately focused and transformed into his Jinchuriki state, revealing one tail, whiskers, and an orange chakra surrounding the Hiraikeri swords. Naruto made hand signs for Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu. Ten shadow clones of Naruto emerged, and nine of them charged at Shino at high speeds. Shino used the paper bombs from his Shibuki sword and exploded the nine shadow clones in a big blaze of fire. Naruto moved to the left side of the smoke, swung his sword, and shouted, "Wind Release: Vacuum Sword." Shino was directly in the path of a horizontal wind blade. Shino made hand signs for Earth Release: Earth Shore Return. The earth wall was cut clean through. Shino was about to continue running away from Naruto when he noticed that Naruto’s air bullets had blocked his escape route. Shino had to continuously dodge Naruto's air bullets, which were leaving dents in the wall behind him. His concern stemmed from the fact that his back was pressed against the wall, leaving him with no escape route. Shino knew very well that Naruto's growth in intelligence could not be underrated. After the last air bullet, Naruto made hand signs for Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu. Two Narutos popped out. The shadow cone blocked Shino’s escape path to the left again. Naruto closed the distance, struck Shino once with his Hiramekeri sword, and knocked him into the wall unconscious. Kisame got in front of Naruto and declared Naruto the winner. The crowd was going crazy, screaming, "Seven swordsmen! Seven swordsmen!" 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! Naruto heard Hinata, Anko, and Kakashi all cheering so loudly for him. I will be the next Mizukage! Believe IT! The crowd roared with cheers for the boy who had an infectious smile.

Kisame shouted, "Sasuke and Haku, come down to the arena to fight in the Chunin exams!" The crowd was going wild. "7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen!" "7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen!" But that was nothing to the screaming, cheering duo of Might Guy and Rock Lee. Haku put on a most youthful performance! HAKU, MY FLOWER, SHOW THEM YOUR YOUTHFUL BEAUTY!!!! Zabuza was sitting behind them, wondering why he ever allowed these two freaks to teach her. Haku grinned at her funny group of important people. She heard Sasuke getting cheers from Mei and Mindy, who sounded muted compared to Might Guy. Haku took off her weights and there was a crater in the ground. Sasuke saw Haku get two senbons out, and she was looking at Sasuke’s feet. Sasuke was surprised since Haku had never fought him before and was not from the Leaf. So how did she know that she should not look into his eyes? I am sure you are surprised, Sasuke. Might Guy trained me last week on how to fight without looking at your eyes to prepare for you. Well, I guess your sensei is not as dense as he looks. Sasuke took out his Kiba blades and Kisame yelled, Fight!

Sasuke tried closing the distance but Haku jumped and kept on throwing senbon at Sasuke. Sasuke deflected each senbon with his Kiba blade without issue. Haku got into a Taijutsu stance. Sasuke was surprised by how fast she was. She was able to swiftly kick him whenever he got too close with his Kiba blade. He focused on his Sharingan and brought out his two tomoe. Her movements slowed down and he was able to start grazing her skin more. Haku made hand signs for Demonic Mirroring Ice Crystal. There was a crystal dome with a bunch of mirror-like ice crystals around Sasuke. Haku jumped into one of the crystals. Sasuke made hand signs for thunderbolt. The thunderbolt broke through one of the ice mirrors and Sasuke jumped out. Haku disabled her jutsu. Haku performed hand signs to execute the Water Dragon Bullet technique. Haku fired a water dragon bullet at Sasuke at high speeds. Sasuke made hand signs for Katon Gokakyu no jutsu. The fireball intercepted the water dragon, causing it to disperse and sending steam into the air. Haku could tell that in normal close-range fighting they were even. And Sasuke had the edge in ninjutsu. Therefore, she needed to enter the gates and utilize the steam to her advantage. Haku, surrounded by a green aura, said, "Gate of Opening." Haku threw a senbon at Sasuke, who was able to dodge it but was impressed by its speed. Haku threw dozens of senbon at Sasuke, but Sasuke dodged them all due to his Sharingan. Haku's green aura grew larger as Sasuke saw her say Gate of Healing. She kept throwing senbon, and they were much faster and stronger, leaving imprints in the wall. Sasuke activated the third tomoe, and he was able to dodge every senbon that Haku threw. He knew that the only reason he was able to dodge the senbon was due to the time-slowing aspect of the Sharingan. Sasuke saw Haku shout "Gate of Life," and the green aura surrounding her got even bigger. Haku threw a senbon that was inches away from Sasuke’s face. He was in disbelief at how fast and powerful that was. Sasuke focused on his Mangekyo Sharingan and activated his Susanoo. Haku was in shock seeing a purple humanoid figure many times taller than the stadium. The figure possessed wings, clutched Kiba blades in his hands, and carried a bow on his back. The crowd was silent in awe. They had heard stories about Itachi’s Susanoo, which he used to defeat Yagura. But seeing this in person was a moment nobody in the stands would ever forget. Haku tried throwing senbon at Itachi, but they bounced off his Susanoo like it was nothing. Haku sprinted at the Susanoo and attempted to deliver a few punching and kicking combos, but they had no effect. Haku looked up at Susano in awe, and then she felt it. She felt the pain of overstaying at the third gate. Haku hit the floor, shaking in pain from all the muscles and bones that had been broken. Kisame jumped in front of Haku and declared Sasuke the winner. Sasuke turned off his Susanoo and the crowd was still in awe so they did not even cheer him on. Sasuke saw Rock Lee sprint and grab Haku. Thank you for fighting youthfully against my flower, Sasuke! I had fun fighting her as well, Rock Lee.

Itachi jumped to the ground and the crowd went wild, cheering on their beloved Mizukage. Thank you for coming to the third round of the Chunin exams. The last round will be Naruto Namikaze vs. Sasuke Uchiha. The crowd cheered, knowing how unbelievable they both have looked so far. We do expect there to be some high-level jutsu that could damage people in the crowd. Do not worry; I will protect you all in the stands! The crowd cheered! I will see you next week!

(1 week later)

Naruto and Sasuke walked into the stadium for the next round of their fights. The crowd was cheering extremely loudly. The cheering was in anticipation of the final round of the Chunin exams. "Seven swordsmen! Seven swordsmen!" 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen! Seven swordsmen!" 7 swordsmen! 7 swordsmen" Naruto saw Anko, Kakashi, and Hinata all cheering for him. The presence of his important people made him smile. Sasuke saw Mindy and Mei cheering him on and Itachi clapping. Naruto took out his Hiramekeri swords, and Sasuke took out his Kiba blades. Aren't you going to tell me why red eyes are better, Sasuke? No, Naruto, we are not kids anymore. I will fight you with the respect you deserve as an equal. Kisame yelled, Fight!

Naruto and Sasuke ran towards each other, while Sasuke activated the one tomoe of his sharingan. Sasuke was able to block Naruto’s sword swings, but they were much more powerful than Sasuke’s. Sasuke pretended to block Naruto’s next sword swing, then spun around and grazed Naruto’s arm. During his next swing, Naruto applied less power than before. Sasuke faked the block again but was surprised when his counter got blocked as well. Naruto grinned and said, “Did you really think I would fall for the same trick twice?” Knowing they were equal in Kenjutsu, Naruto brought out his one-tailed chakra cloak. An orange aura surrounded Naruto and his facial features took on fox-like characteristics. One tail popped out of his back and the chakra surrounded the Himekari swords, making them two times as long. Naruto swung his sword at Sasuke, who was surprised by how much stronger and faster it was. Sasuke got a cut from the sword strike on his chest. Sasuke immediately turned on his 3-tomoe sharingan and was able to block the next strike. Sasuke used his Kiba Blades and said Thunderbolt, which shot at Naruto. He was impressed at how easily Naruto dodged it from such close range. Naruto focused and brought out two tails in his jinchuriki state. The sword got twice as big and his fox features became more defined. Naruto made hand signs for Wind Release: Great Breakthrough. Naruto blew wind out of his mouth, and Sasuke was stunned at how big and powerful this jutsu was. Sasuke made hand signs for Katon: Gokakyu no jutsu. Sasuke’s fireball only blocked Naruto’s jutsu for 2 seconds, after which Naruto’s jutsu sent Sasuke crashing into the wall, creating a hole in it. Naruto knew that he should not give Sasuke any time to make any hand signs. Naruto made hand signs for Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu. Two clones of Naruto popped out and attacked Sasuke using the Wind Release: Vacuum Sword technique. The two Narutos moved to the left and right of Sasuke, continuously using gusts of air to force him to dodge. Naruto grinned because Sasuke did not have enough time to realize that he used the shadow clones to make Sasuke dodge in the direction where the real Naruto was located. The real Naruto hit him with his sword and threw him 20 feet back into the wall, making a bigger crater in it. Sasuke spat out blood, knowing that Naruto would win if he did not do something different. I am proud of you, Naruto for pushing me this far! Sasuke focused on his eyes, activating his Mangekyo Sharingan, and summoned his full Susanoo. The figure, a purple humanoid, towered over the stadium in height. The figure possessed wings, clutched Kiba blades in his hands, and carried a bow on his back. The crowd was filled with excitement, eager to witness this extraordinary sight for the second time. Naruto felt the nine-tailed fox pull him into his mindscape. This is the first time he has seen fear on the fox's face since he became aware of its presence. The fox growled as it said, This is the jutsu of Madara Uchiha! He growled, expressing his anger at how those red eyes had manipulated him into fighting against Hashirama. Madara Uchiha, is that Susanoo that strong? Yes, you would have to have complete control over 9 tails to fight that. Naruto was in shock at what the fox just said. But the fear the 9-tailed fox had about the susanoo was enough to give his words weight. Be glad, boy, that Sasuke isn't as hateful and dark as Madara Uchiha. Inside their mindscape, they saw Itachi activate his full-body Susanoo. His was reddish orange with a long blade and a giant shield. Itachi included the audience's fans within his Susanoo. Sasuke I will protect the fans; you can go all out. The nine-tailed fox's mouth gaped open, as if he hadn't witnessed it. Two full-body Susanoo-wielding Uchihas without hatred in their hearts. He said in quiet shock, “ It is almost like they are the good Uchiha brothers. Meant to bring peace to centuries of hatred.” Naruto, you must use your full power. I know, thank you for the information, Fox. Naruto left his mindscape, concentrated, and transformed into a three-tailed state. His fox features and red eyes became more defined. His hair turned reddish orange. He pushed his chakra through his Hiramekeri swords, which doubled in size. He ran at the susanoo and hit it with all of his might, but nothing happened. Naruto realized that what the 9-tailed fox said was correct. Naruto jumped back and made hand signs. Multi shadow clone jutsu: 1,000 Naruto clones popped out. All of the Narutos made hand signs for Wind Release: Great Breakthrough. An exponentially huge wind attack was heading right for Sasuke’s susanoo. Sasuke put his Susanoo-encased Kiba Blade into the ground and said, Lightning Release: Thunder Gate. Lightning fell from the sky at incredible speed and size. Thousands of lightning blades kept falling, putting holes in Naruto’s jutsu, dispersing it. The lightning blades left huge circular craters in the earth, completely destroying the stadium. Naruto was able to dodge at first but was eventually hit by the attack, and Kisame jumped in front of Naruto and Shunined away. Kisame declared Sasuke Uchiha has won the final round of the Chunin exams. Itachi and Sasuke both disabled their Susanoos. Sasuke saw the people cheering him and it made him smile. Nothing made him feel better when Itachi put his finger on his forehead and said, “I am proud of you.” Sasuke was so glad that he followed his brother on that day when Itachi was forced to kill his clan. Itachi yelled to the crowd, Thank you all for coming to the final match of the Chunin exams! We will announce the rank of everyone who participated next week! The crowd went to their homes, but the village was buzzing after such an incredible performance.

(1 week later)

Thank you for coming to my office, Might Guy. Anko, Zabuza, Kisame, and Mei, with your Genin teams. Yes, Mizukage-sama. I invited you here to announce the ranks of all the Genin from the Chunin Exams and to provide feedback on areas for improvement. We will start with Team Might Guy. Rock Lee, step forward. You are the only person to receive the rank of tokubetsu jonin. A tokubetsu jonin only needs to possess a single skill set at the jonin level. Your taijutsu skill is clearly of that level. You have earned this rank, Rock Lee. Yosh! Thank you very much, Mizukage-sama! Rock Lee, it would be beneficial for you to focus on enhancing your in-battle intelligence. If you were more intelligent in the way you fought Naruto, you would have had a better chance of beating him. Thank you, Mizukage Sama for the advice. Yuuhi, step forward. Yes, Mizukage-sama. Your rank will still be as a genin. If you keep on working on your taijutsu, I am sure you will eventually reach the rank of chunin. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Haku, step forward. Haku You are receiving the rank of Jonin. Your capability in taijutsu, ninjutsu, and long-range weapons is extremely impressive. On top of that, you are very intelligent. I would say growing your ninjutsu prowess and your usage of the gates will take you far. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Haku and Yuuhi, there is another thing I would like to ask you two. Would you girls like to be in ANBU? Your combination jutsu would be a great fit for assassination missions. Haku looked down and then looked at Rock Lee. She knew that this would mean that they would see each other a lot less. And she remembered from her time with Zabuza doing assassination missions that she felt her humanity leave her every time she killed someone. Now, sure, she could do those missions with her team that she cared about but with strangers in ANBU? She genuinely was worried if Rock Lee would like her anymore if she became emptier and darker. She realized what the answer was. I appreciate the offer, but I would much prefer to go on missions with my team instead. I understand Haku. Yuuhi spoke, “ I will stay with my team as well, Mizukage-sama.” Sounds good, Yuuhi.

Anko, we will give out ranks to your Genin next. Choji, step forward. You will be receiving the rank of Chunin. Your combination of close-range abilities with your ninjutsu and summons is a very good combination. You should work on being more intelligent in the way you fight. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Ino step forward. You will be staying at the rank of Genin. You did well using your snakes to try to set up your mind transfer technique. You are very close to the level of Chunin. Keep on working on your taijutsu and I am sure you will eventually receive the rank. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Shikamaru, step forward. You will receive the rank of Chunin. You showed exceptional intelligence, and the way you used your tools to fight was extremely impressive. Keep on working on your taijutsu. Thank you, Mizukage-sama.

Zabuza, we will now assign ranks to your Genin team. Hinata, step forward. You will be receiving the rank of Jonin. Your kenjutsu and ninjutsu combination is excellent. I believe that developing an attack with greater piercing power, specifically for opponents who can evade your underground attacks, would significantly enhance your strength. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Naruto, step forward. You will be receiving the rank of Jonin. The strength of your kenjutsu and ninjutsu abilities is very great. On top of that, you have already mastered 3 of your tailed jinchuriki state, which is very impressive. Keep on working on your jinchuriki state and researching the flying raijin like you have. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Shino, step forward. You will be receiving the rank of Jonin. The way you have combined your paper bombs with your ninjutsu has been very intriguing to watch. You have grown much in kenjutsu. Keep on finding ninjutsu that fit your fighting style and you will grow immensely. Thank you, Mizukage-sama.

Mei, we will now assign ranks to your Genin team. Akira, step forward. You will stay at the rank of Genin. I can't advise you on your fighting skill since you forfeited. But you must learn how to have more confidence in yourself. I will look forward to seeing you participate in the next exam. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Mindy, step forward. You will receive the rank of Chunin. Your use of ninjutsu was excellent and at the Jonin level. But when your plan did not go your way, you froze up, which would be a negative trait for a Jonin to have. You must be more calm when the fight does not go your way. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Shunske, step forward. You will stay at the rank of Genin. Your taijutsu skills with your earth-hardening jutsu were a good combination. I am sure if you keep on getting better with those skills, you will be able to receive the rank of Chunin. Thank you, Mizukage-sama.

Kisame, we will now assign ranks to your Genin team. Chojuro, step forward. You will be receiving the rank of Jonin. Your ninjutsu ability paired with your kenjutsu ability are both clearly at the Jonin level. Keep on trying to work with Kisame on your Water Ninjutsu abilities to grow your skill. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Sasuke, step forward. You will be receiving the rank of Jonin. Your ninjutsu, kenjutsu, genjutsu, and Susanoo abilities were extremely impressive. Improvement in your Ninjutsu and Genjutsu abilities is where you can grow the most. Thank you, Mizukage-sama. Thank you all for putting on such an amazing Chunin Exams. The door to the Mizukage office flew open and a hard-breathing Ao was there. Mizukage Sama, there is something you must know now. What is it, Ao? The Hidden Sand Village attacked the Leaf. Everyone in the room that came from the Leaf Village got wide-eyed. They all had accepted that they would never see the Leaf Village again. But they still wished the people there were well, so the room had a distressed feel about it. Who won Ao?

Chapter 21: Chapter 21 War in Konoha

Chapter 21 War in Konoha
What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei
There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki, apart from Orochimaru.
This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon; I will try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.
There is only one story at a time.
I will be updating one chapter at a time.
You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.
Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto. (I do own how I have been looking forward to writing this chapter for YEARS!! I am so exited.)
Original Characters List
Mindy- She is Mei’s little sister and has been in this fanfiction since chapter 4 and is on Mei’s Genin team.
Yuuhi- She is a sensor-type ninja who is on Might Guy’s Genin team.
Shunske- He is a good taijutsu user and is on Mei’s Genin team.
Akira- She is a Hoziki clan descendant and is on Mei’s Genin team.
Minato Hatake- Kakashi and Anko’s 1-year-old baby boy.
Ch. 21
The final round of the Chunin Exams was taking place in Konoha. The match was between the prodigy of the Hyuga clan, Neji Hyuga, and the son of Kazekage, Gara. The crowd was in a surprised state since the prodigy of the Hyuga clan could not get around Gara’s sand. In the Kage box were the Hokage and the Kazekage. The Hyuga genius is really having a challenging time getting around his sand. Yes, my son Gara is doing quite well, he said with a crazy grin on his face. They saw Neji have his gentle fist completely neutralized by Gara’s automatic sand defense. It was truly an amazing sight. With the eyes of a madman, Gara said, My mother wants your blood! Gaara shouted "Desert Funeral," causing the sand to rush toward Neji, where it condensed and shattered many of his bones. Blood splattered across the ground. Gaara saw the blood and wore a crazed, happy expression at the sight of it. Mother, look at the blood I got for you! Flowers began to fall from the sky in every direction. Kabuto, wearing an ANBU mask, was in the stands making hand signs to activate the genjutsu. Then he saw the people in the stands go to sleep. With a grin on his face, he said the invasion of Konoha has started.
Kabuto looked up to the Kage box and saw Orochimaru, dressed as the Kazekage, put his kunai on Hiruzen's neck. Then he jumped on top of the building. He was followed by the Sound Four, who went and all made hand signs to make the Four Violet Flames Battle Encampment and a purple wall surrounded Hiruzen and Orochimaru on all sides. An ANBU from Konoha went and tried running through the barrier and was killed instantly. The Sound Four grinned and said, The barrier is complete, Orochimaru-sama. Orochimaru extended his tongue and exclaimed, "KU KU KU, it's been a while, sensei." Did you miss me?"
Kabuto was surrounded by 4 of the Jonin from his village Hidden in the Sound. It's wonderful that you all came over here for our important part of the plan. As we went over, there is one clan that has a lot of high-level ninjas. Since many clans have left, we no longer need to worry about fighting multiple high-level clans. This allows us to focus on killing one of them all, like planned. Kabuto and four Jonins from the Village Hidden in the Sound ran over to their target. Once they arrived at the compound, they observed an endless stream of white-eyed ninjas exiting it. Kabuto looked at the Jonin of his group that had sensory powers. There are 6 people left in this building. Alright, remember we are not killing the ones that do not have seals on their foreheads. Kabuto, followed by the 4 Jonin, ran inside the Hyuga compound. Immediately they could see 3 older Hyuga guarded by 3 Hyuga. Kabuto rushed one of the guards and dodged a gentle fist strike. Then Kabuto took out his chakra scalpel, struck the artery leading to the heart, and cut it, causing the Hyuga to bleed out. He observed that the other two Hyuaga guards had become unconscious. Kabuto looked up and grinned. He saw the three Hyuga elders, who were his targets and had no caged bird seal. The only female elder started yelling, “You have no clue what you have done.” “We will have our clansman hunt you down and give you a most painful death for doing what you have done today.” Kabuto looked at them with a giant grin on his face. If that were true, then how do I know about this? Kabuto pulled one of the books, which opened up a hidden room. The elders' faces showed fear because the hidden room contained all of the backup seals in case the originals were damaged. This would allow them to activate the cage bird seal and kill the Hyugas. Yes, individuals often become very cooperative when they feel constant fear. Of course I told them that I would destroy the activation seals and kill all of you guys. Kabuto, with a giant grin on his face, looked at them and said, "But I am not going to do that." The 3 elders charged at Kabuto very slowly, showing their age. Kabuto easily killed all of them using his chakra scalpel. The last one he killed had such a giant grin on his face, knowing without them being alive, they would not be able to activate the seal. Kabuto dragged one of the elder’s bodies downstairs. Kabuto started talking to the dead elder's body. Well, something you do not do because you do not do enough experiments is that your body shakes after death. Kabuto cut off the elder's thumb that was still shaking and took it to the seal. He saw it light up and said, "Kill all seals." Kabuto yelled at the four Jonin who accompanied him to check the guards' bodies and confirm whether they were dead and if the seals had been removed from their heads. The Jonin returned downstairs and declared, "Yes, both guards are dead, and the seals have vanished." All across the world, every Hyuga with a seal dropped dead immediately, killing 99% of the Hyugas in the world. Well, 50 years from now, they will be going over the Hyuga clan in class, and the teacher will ask them, "What was the lesson learned from this clan?" Someone will raise their hand and say, “Do not make a button that kills 99% of your clan.” And the teacher will nod his head at the correct answer.
Kabuto was feeling pleased that they were successfully able to kill off the Hyugas, who were the strongest clan left in the village. Kabuto saw an Oto Shinobi, who sprinted to him and then got on one knee. Kabuto-san I have an update on the status of the invasion. The Snake summons were killed off by the Konoha Jonin, but 30% of them died in that attack. Gaara was able to bring out the one tails which is rampaging in Konoha right now. The remaining Jonin tried to defeat it, but none of them were able to. The One-Tail has completely smashed all of the buildings around him and just now destroyed the Hokage monument. In the Chunin Exam Arena, we have taken control. We have a few thousand shinobi left, and they only have a few hundred. We should be able to beat them. Kabuto-san. Kabuto had a grin on his face at being able to see Orochimaru’s dream become a reality. Make sure you tell everyone to stay focused on the enemy so that if Jiriya comes, we can stop him. Yes, Kabuto-san. The Oto Shinobi ran off to spread the orders to his fellow shinobi. Kabuto went back-to-back with another Oto Shinobi to fight against Konoha ninja back-to-back. Kabuto got his chakra scalpel out and easily slashed an artery of a Konoha ninja. Then Kabuto felt the person that he had his back to spin twords him and the next thing he knew, his head was falling. Kabuto’s eyes went wide. The person behind him just cut off his head. Kabuto was going to make hand signs to reverse summon with a snake but his hands were cut off. Kabuto saw a bird going down towards him and then his eyes closed for the last time in his life. In the battle, 5 Oto Shinobi all saw Kabuto get killed by another Oto Shinobi who had his hand on his head, not knowing what happened. All they saw was a bird that looked like a drawing going towards Kabuto’s body. They all ran to Kabuto but one of the men on the bird made hand signs and earth spears came from the ground and they all were stabbed through their bodies. They saw three men on the bird. One looked like he just woke up from a nap with orange hair. One man, who appeared to be controlling the bird, had pale skin and brown hair; he wore a cutoff t-shirt and carried a long, thin blade on his back. The last person who made the hand signs had brown, spiky hair, a sword on his back and a silver mask that only covered the outer edge of his face. The bird landed and they picked up Kabuto and put him on the bird and the man with orange hair said, “Do not forget Leader-sama said that we have to burn his body until nothing is left.” “He has similar abilities to escape death like Orochimaru.”

 

Above the kage box surrounded by 4 purple walls were Orochimaru and Hiruzen. Hiruzen had used the Shiki Fuujin to seal Hashirama and Tobirama. Now he was attempting to seal his old pupil using Shiki Fuujin; his body was having an issue sealing Orochimaru. Hiruzen's physical body was aged, which meant he no longer possessed the same pure strength as before. Because of this, Orochimaru was slowly pulling away from his sealing attempt. Then an unexpected event unfolded. A sudden poof sound came from behind them, within the four purple walls. One of the rocks that was on top of the building the whole time within the area poofed. The seasoned ninjas both knew that there must have been a ninja who had been transformed into a rock during their whole fight. The man who emerged from the smoke left Orochimaru and Hiruzen with wide eyes and open mouths. An old man wearing a black robe adorned with red clouds walked out. He had bandages wrapped around his entire right arm. He also had bandages on his face and his right eye. He had a cane in his hand and then grinned at Hiruzen and Orochimaru. I guess I do not have to act like a weak old man with the two of you around. Danzo dropped the cane and walked easily towards Hiruzen, who was trying to seal Orochimaru. Orochimaru had always been the one scheming. Orochimaru had always been the one who was feared. This was because everyone knew that Orochimaru was willing to cross lines that others were not willing to cross. Because of this, nobody in the history of his life had outthought the legendary Sannin. But now looking up in fear, he realized that he had been outthought and outmaneuvered by Danzo. With fear Orochimaru had never felt, he said, How? Danzo had a sly grin on his face and made hand signs. There was a puff of smoke and Orochimaru’s eyes went wide and then he realized that Danzo had killed and was impersonating one of the elders in the sand village who was there for every war meeting. Which is why he knew that he could just wait here until they put up the barrier. Orochimaru still looked in disbelief that Danzo was there. How did you know I killed the Kazekage and was impersonating him? Danzo’s sly grin widened even more as he leaned closer to Orochimaru. I had one of my Root agents use his bird to fly in the air while you headed to the Hidden Sand Village and watched the whole fight. I saw you don the Mizukage's robes. You thought that nobody would ever be able to outscheme you. He looked at Orochimaru with craziness in his eyes. He said to Orochimaru, “I have been running an organization in the darkness, keeping it secret for decades. You outmaneuvered me then when you were able to live in the light. Then Danzo chuckled. But now that we are both playing in the light. Danzo laughed even harder now. Now that we are both in the light, nobody will ever be able to outmaneuver me again. Orochimaru, you are nothing but a child who could not take it when you were not made Hokage. Your conviction is weak. You waste your power only thinking about one thing: defeating the village and becoming Hokage. Danzo looked annoyed at Orochimaru. Danzo looked at Hiruzen and said, It seems you need some help, old friend.” Danzo performed hand signs to create a wind sword. He cut off all of Orochimaru's limbs and his head. Hiruzen felt that the pull on Orochimaru was becoming easier, so he sealed Orochimaru's entire body and soul forever. Hiruzen felt the Shiki Fuujin seal end.
Danzo walked over to his dying old friend Hiruzen. You did all of this so that you can take over the Leaf, Danzo? I could see how you would think that Hiruzen but I am no longer interested in the Leaf. The roots of the tree of the village hidden in the leaves have been poisoned. Danzo glanced at Hiruzen and uttered, "I am indifferent to the fate of this village." The Hidden Sand will probably take it over. Danzo looked away from Hiruzen at the sun. I have realized how narrow-minded I have been for decades, Hiruzen. Instead of focusing on the roots of the village. Hiruzen saw a crazed look on Danzo’s face return. Hiruzen I only care about the birth of a new world tree. Hiruzen had a look of horror on his face. He knew exactly what Danzo meant. Danzo was going to burn the world to build a new one. Well, Danzo, Jiraiya was informed of the invasion so the Leaf will not fall. The will of fire will never burn out. Danzo walked over to the dying Hiruzen with a huge, sly grin. Jiraiya is busy. Hiruzen, with a look of shock, took his last breath. Danzo walked away from a dead Orochimaru and Hiruzen. Now that I have finally achieved my revenge on the Hidden Leaf, Itachi Uchiha, I will show you how naive your hope for a truthful ninja village truly is. A bird came from the sky and landed in front of Danzo. One of the three ninjas with orange hair jumped down from the bird and knelt in front of Danzo. Danzo Sama, we have killed and burned Kabuto’s body. Good Fu, death will always be painful for anyone who ever betrays Root. It is something Itachi will realize one day. Sai, like we went over in the meetings, let's go to each of Orochimaru’s bases to steal all of the power Orochimaru accumulated all this time. Yes, Leader-sama.
(24 hours earlier)
Jiraiya, the legendary toad sage, was absolutely excited. As he conducted research for his books in this village, someone handed him a flyer. The flyer said, Icha Icha Paradise Book Fan Club Meeting. This was the first time in his whole life he had ever heard of a fan club for his amazing book. The even better part was the meeting, started in 10 minutes. What kind of author would he be if he did not show up to his own fan club meeting? If he was lucky, he could bring these people to look at women in the bathtubs to help with his research. He walked into the fan club meeting, and his eyes bulged with heart-shaped expressions. The publisher had told him that 100% of the people who bought his book were men. But there were two stunning women sitting next to each other in the meeting. Their giggling indicated that they were friends. One of the women had wavy black hair that went down to her neckline, a defined jawline, a narrow nose, and brown eyes. She had D-cup breasts with a slim waist and luscious curves. She looked to be 24. Her friend had straight blond hair that went down to her mid-back and blue eyes. She had a defined jawline with breasts the size of Tsunade’s and long legs and was taller than her other friend with luscious curves as well. She looked to be 23. Jiraiya had his mouth open, staring at the two other-worldly beauties. Then those two girls both looked at him and instead of giving him a foul look back for staring at them,. They both gave excited and shocked looks. Both girls sprinted at Jiraiya and both held both of his arms, putting well-endowed boobs on his arms. They both said exactly the same thing excitedly at the same time. "You are Jiraiya, the author of Icha Icha Paradise, correct?” Yes, I am the author of Icha Icha Paradise. The two girls grinned seductively and bit their lips at the same time. You know we have fantasized about roleplaying all of the scenes with the author of the story. Where is your room? Jiraiya roleplayed all the scenes in his book with these women over a few days. Jiriya woke up and wondered what god he was in the good graces of to experience heaven over the past few days. Then Jiraiya's eyes widened, recalling his role in repelling the invaders during Konoha's attack. Jiraiya knew that he was late, but the hero always showed up at the perfect moment. Jiraiya did hand signs and reverse summoned one of his toads; he left Konoha for moments like this. He emerged from the smoke, looked at Konoha, and saw something that would haunt him for years to come.

Chapter 22: Chapter 22 Jiraiya’s Decision

Chapter 22 Jiraiya’s decision
What if Itachi uses his good heart to try to change the world with Sasuke? They are on the run after the massacre. They will be a good version of Madara and Izuna. Will Naruto and other main characters join? How will they shape their world with the Akatsuki and the hidden villages trying to stop them? Itachi x Mei
There will be three Konoha ninjas to join the Akatsuki, apart from Orochimaru.
This story will have many shocking turns and twists. I will not just stick to Canon; I will try to shake things up. This will be a completely different ninja villages.
There is only one story at a time.
I will be updating one chapter at a time.
You will be amazed at how many of the main characters will power up.
Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or any of the characters in Naruto.
Original Characters List
Mindy- She is Mei’s little sister and has been in this fanfiction since chapter 4 and is on Mei’s Genin team.
Yuuhi- She is a sensor-type ninja who is on Might Guy’s Genin team.
Shunske- He is a good taijutsu user and is on Mei’s Genin team.
Akira- She is a Hoziki clan descendant and is on Mei’s Genin team.
Minato Hatake- Kakashi and Anko’s 1-year-old baby boy.

Jiraiya had been in the last shinobi war. He had witnessed the aftermath of a village's devastation. He remembered how all the buildings became rubble, and great monuments were destroyed. The air was filled with the stench of death. However, he never expected to look at Konoha and see that same scene. The destruction of all the buildings was total. The village's symbol, the Hokage Monument, also suffered destruction. As someone who was taught by a Hokage and taught a Hokage. He felt extreme sadness at the monument being completely destroyed. Now nobody would know that this monument with the Hokage faces on it ever existed. This realization deeply saddened him. He saw the Hidden Sand Village flag flying in the air and knew that they must have won the invasion. They must have released the one tail in the village to cause such grave destruction. He was a Sannin, but he was not unreasonable in thinking he could defeat the Hidden Sand Village alone. He ascended to the top of the Chunin exam area, the designated starting point for the fighting. His eyes widened on seeing Orochimaru dead next to Hiruzen. He knew that Orochimaru was capable of trying to kill Hiruzen. But it still hurt that someone he had once considered a friend was the one who actually killed Hiruzen. He felt pain in his stomach and realized that if he had arrived on time for the invasion, Hirzuen would be alive. His village would not be in rubble. Now he did not even have a village. This was all a result of him getting swept up in a sexual encounter with those girls. Jiraiya put his arms around his chest and stomach and bent over; the guilt of his actions was driving him crazy. His heart would not stop beating; he felt pain everywhere. He felt a lifetime of regret build up in one single moment. He went to Hizuzen’s dead body. He went to the destroyed Hokage monument. He dug a grave for Hiruzen where his face on the monument would have been and put a rock on top of it. He prayed for his sensei to have a peaceful life in the next life. He was upset about his blind faith in the prophecy that he would teach a student who could potentially change the world. He believed that the kid would naturally find Jiriya, who would then teach him. The only other students he had ever had were dead long ago in the hidden rain village. The other student died while protecting the village from the Nine-Tails. Jiraiya walked away from the village, knowing that a life filled with regret and him questioning what if he was there to save his village was all he had left for this life.
It took Jiraiya a few weeks for him to find the person he was looking for. He saw someone being thrown through a wall in a bar, and he knew he was in the right place. He walked inside and saw a blond-haired, blue-eyed, big-boobed woman who looked to be in her 30s. He was aware that her appearance was deceptive. Jiraiya, why are you here? I am not coming back to the village! Tsunade screamed at Jiraiya. Jiraiya had a dark and depressed look on his face. Tsunade, the Hidden Leaf is no longer. Tsunade’s eyes went wide and tried to throw a punch at Jiraiya, who dodged it. Why would you joke about something that is not funny? I am not lying; I wanted to tell you about it first before you heard the rumors. Orochimaru created a village hidden in the sound. They attacked with the Hidden sand and they defeated our village. Shock was on Tsunade’s face; she could not believe it. Hiruzen and Orochimaru are dead. Tsunade started crying with tears streaming down her face. WHY?! WHY?! Tsunade felt incredible pain and regret in her chest. Why did I not realize how childish I have been for decades with tears streaming down her face? They needed me; I could have done something. Why did the village have to be defeated for me to realize how much it meant to me? I could have made a difference. I am the granddaughter of the first Hokage and now his dreams for his village are gone. Tsunade grabbed her chest, crying for hours, realizing how weak and childish she had been for so long. Jiraiya grabbed her shoulder. I have incredible guilt as well, Tsunade. I got distracted and came to the invasion late. When I got there, it was in complete rubble. Tsunade looked up at Jiraiya, who was crying as well. Well, I can’t be mad at you since I have not been to the village in decades. You were just a few days late. The two sannin had incredible tears streaming down each of their faces. They hugged each other for hours and walked together to a lake. A green Venus flytrap creature had green hair, black skin on one half of its face, and white skin on the other half. He had yellow eyes, and a black robe with red clouds came out of the ground.

Jiraiya and Tsunade both got Kunai out in case the Venus flytrap being attacked them. The Venus flytrap-looking creature with his raspy old voice started talking to Jiraiya and Tsunade. “I am Zetsu. I am not here to attack you. You must be sad after Konoha’s fall. But what if everything awful that ever happened to you disappeared? The goal of our group is to put everyone in the world into a dreamlike state. Everyone in this world would live out their ideal life without anything undesirable ever happening to them. In your dream world, Jiraiya, you would be dating Tsunade, who would assist you in writing your perverted books. She would never complain about your habit of looking at naked women for your books. Minato would have defeated the Nine Tails and would still be alive. Kushina, Minato’s wife, would still be alive. The village would have never been destroyed. And Naruto would grow up wanting to learn everything from his godfather. Tsunade, in your dream world, you would have married Dan. Konoha would have listened to you when you said that they needed to make medic nin a requirement for every team. And Nawaki would still be alive. We already have 8 S-rank Shinobi in our group. We will capture all of the Jinchuriki to create this dream world for everyone. You both have the strength to help with our goals. You guys can finally fight for something you know is right. Imagine taking away the guilt, sadness, and regret you both have for everyone in the world. Join our group and use your power for a goal that will help the world.” Tsunade and Jiraiya both had amazed smiles on their faces. Both of their eyes resembled those of a child receiving their favorite toy. Jiraiya turned to Zetsu and asked, “Are you saying that we can create a world where everyone can live out their dreams?” Yes, Jiraiya. Jiraiya looked at Tsunade with a crazed look in his eye and a smile on his face. Tsunade, you should come with me; let's build a dream world together. Tsunade was shocked to see Jiraiya with such a crazy look on his face. But she wanted to be a medic to heal as many people as possible. But what if she could make sure nobody ever got hurt again? She looked at Jiraiya’s crazed look in his eye and knew that he would do whatever it took to make their plan of the dreamworld work. She knew that it must have been their destiny to be working together now for the dreamworld. She realized that there was meaning in the fall of Konoha. She and Jiraiya would feel regret if they failed to save the world from it. As a medic, saving the world from regret was her new goal and she would cross any line to do it. Jiraiya saw Tsunade’s eyes change into a crazed look and knew that she was going to go with him. Zetsu was surprised when he saw two of the legendary Sannin look at him with crazed looks in their eyes. At that moment, he realized that they would do anything to support their cause. It looks like you two are joining. Is that correct? At the same time, Jiraiya and Tsunade both replied to Zetsu, saying, "Yes, we will join you. For the dreamworld." Their expressions were filled with insanity. Shizue ran at Tsunade. Tsunade, please reconsider going with them; you might be feeling emotional right now due to Konoha's fall. Shizune saw a look she had never witnessed in her master's eyes. Tsunade tilted her head and asked, "Shizune, are you not going to help me with the plan for the dreamworld?" No, it is a crazy idea. For years Shizune had been telling Tsunade that she was wrong and disagreeing with her. She knew that Tsunade would never hurt her because she's her former lover's niece. But why was Tsunade’s fist coming towards her? Shizune felt the impact of Tsunade’s fist, which sent her flying hundreds of feet through four buildings. As a medic nin she knew that multiple bones were broken. She could not move at all. She was barely breathing. She saw her master Tsunade with a crazed look in her eye. Don’t worry, Shizune; in the dreamworld you will be alive. So killing you now does not even count. Shizune saw Tsunade punch her in the chest. And made a huge dent in the floor around Shizune’s body. Tsunade Looked down at a lifeless Shizue and then walked away and waved and said, “See you in the dreamworld, Shizune.”

Jiraiya and Tsunade both followed Zetsu into a building in the hidden rain village. They all walked upstairs, where they encountered a man with orange hair and ringed purple eyes. He wore a forehead protector from the Hidden Rain Village, adorned with a horizontal slash. There were 3 metal rods coming out of his nose. And there were two piercings below his lips. He also had 6 ear piercings in each ear. He had a black robe with red clouds on it. Next to him was a woman with blue hair, adorned with a rose that matched the shade of her hair. She had a piercing below her lip. She also wore a black robe decorated with red clouds. Jiraiya’s eyes went wide as he looked at the two people in front of him, who were Konan and Yahiko, whom he had taught during the war. He whispered, "I thought you were dead." No, sensei, we are not dead. We are glad that you have joined our cause. Konan said. Yahiko looked at Jiraiya with a serious expression and said, “I am glad you have joined our cause as well, sensei.” Jiraiya turned to Tsunade and spoke. “Those are the war orphans I trained for a few years.” Oh yeah, I thought they looked familiar. Tsunade replied with a crazed smile. Jiraiya thought to himself, "The prophecy stating that I would train the world's savior has proven to be accurate." Either Yahiko or Konan will be the world's savior. Judging by the fact that Yahiko has Nagato’s eyes, it probably will be him. Jiraiya looked at Konan and asked, What happened to Nagato? Konan spoke to her old sensei; we are about to have a meeting, and we will talk more after. Konan handed Jiraiya and Tsunade black robes with red clouds. This is the robe we all wear. Our group is called the Akatsuki.
Konan motioned for Jiraiya and Tsunade to follow her into a room. Inside the room were six individuals wearing black robes adorned with red clouds, and Jiraiya recognized some of them from his time being a spy. One was a blonde-haired man with a ponytail and blue eyes. He had an Iwagakure headband with a horizontal slash through it. He recognized the man as Deidera, an S-rank explosion specialist. The next person he recognized was a man with green eyes who wore cloth over his head. He had a Takigakure headband with a horizontal slash through it. Jiraiya recognized the S-rank shinobi Kakuzu, the only person to have ever attacked the first Hokage and survived. The only other person Jiraiya recognized was Danzo from the Hidden Leaf. He did not recognize three of the members. One of the members had a short, massively wide, and oddly round body frame. He appeared to be an elderly person with five thin strands of black hair. A triangle-shaped face covering concealed his jaw and mouth. He had no forehead protector to keep his identity unknown. There was a man with whitish-grey hair that was slicked back. He had a long, 3-pronged scythe on his back. He wore a headband from Yugakure around his neck, which had a horizontal slash going through it. Then there was a man with an orange circular mask on his face with one eyehole. The man had spiky dark hair but was not wearing a headband. Jiraiya saw Yahiko enter the room, and everyone turned their attention to him. This observation led Jiraiya to conclude that Yahiko must be the leader of the group. Since we have reached our goal of gathering 10 members, we will go ahead and pair you guys with another person who you will be working with forever. For the next two years, we will be taking missions and gathering information on the nine Jinchuriki. After the two-year period, we will begin implementing our plan to capture every jinchuriki. Konan and I will be a pair. Tsunade and Jiraiya will be a pairing. Deidara and Sasori will be a pairing. Kakazu and Tobi will be a pairing. Hidan and Danzo will be a pairing. Zetsu will give you all your orders; you are dismissed.

Konan made a hand-waving motion to Jiraiya and Tsunade, prompting them to follow her. She took them inside a room. Inside the darkly lit room was a man with red hair and purple-ringed eyes. He had 20 spikes coming out of his back. He looked like a sickly thin man. He was restrained in a metal device that covered his hands and legs. Jiraiya’s eyes went wide at seeing his former student Nagato in such a sickly state. I ascended to being a god. Nagato spoke to Jiraiya in a deep voice. Yahiko was forced to kill himself in a fight due to Hanzo. After witnessing that, I tapped into my godly potential and killed Hanzo. Jiraiya, confused, told Nagato that he had just seen Yahiko with Nagato’s Rinnegan eyes. I can transfer my visual prowess to the dead. It's very much like a puppet that I can transfer my jutsu and eyes to. I can also communicate through them. Jiraiya’s mouth was hanging open, surprised at what he just heard his student can do. It is clear that using such power drains your body significantly. Jiraiya turned to Tsunade and asked, “Can you see if you can heal him?” Tsunade walked over to Nagato and put her hand on him. She tried to send out a pulse, and she was amazed at how much life force was draining from him through those rods. Tsunade said to Nagato, “I will not be able to fix you, but I can make the pain easier in between our missions.“ Thank you, Tsunade. Zetsu came from the ground in front of Jiraiya and Tsunade. I am sure you are enjoying the reunion, but here is a mission for the two of you. Zetsu handed the mission documents to Jiraiya and Tsunade. Alright, we will talk later. Konan and Nagato waved back to Jiraiya and Tsunade, telling them goodbye.
Danzo did not know what Hidan’s abilities were, which was very odd considering how much his Root specialized in information gathering. What were the chances that someone from as small of a village as Yugakure was strong enough to make it in the Akatsuki but was not well known? Danzo put on his kindest grandfather smile, turned to Hidan, and asked him a question. What are your abilities, Hidan? With Jashin's love, I have reached immortality! Danzo’s eyes went wide and acted super interested. Do you have an example of your immortality, Hidan? Do you know how to use medical ninjutsu, old man? No, but one of my Root members was among the best in Konoha. Danzo looked at one of his Root members who followed him at all times. The root member came down from the tree. Yes, Danzo-sama. Bring Rika here. Yes, Danzo-sama. Hidan looked confused at Danzo. Danzo saw the confused look his new teammate had. He figured he wanted to know why someone came to him like that. In Konoha I ran a spy organization of shinobi. They will help us on our missions. I may not be an S-rank shinobi, but I have multiple high-level ninjas at my disposal. Hidan was going to respond but then a brown-haired woman with a root mask came in front of Danzo. You called, Danzo-sama? This is Hidan, my new partner in the Akatsuki. He said he was immortal from his religion and needed a medical ninja after giving us an example of his skill. You can show your example now, Hidan. I will show you the power of Jashin love; hopefully you will all join my religion! Hidan took the 3-pronged scythe off his back and cut his head off at the neck. He caught his head with his hands. And then his detached head started talking to Danzo and the Root member like nothing happened. This is what happens when you accept Jashin-sama into your heart. I need your medical ninja to reattach my head, though. Danzo looked at his root member, who walked to Hidan. She placed Hidan's head back onto his body, and her hand glowed green. She reattached the skin where it was cut off. Hidan moved his head around, making sure it was back to normal. See what I told you? When you accept Jashin into your heart, you can become immortal like me if he feels your love as much as I love him.
Hidan Were you born with these abilities? No, Danzo. I was not. Did you acquire these abilities as a result of praising Jashin? Yes, that is correct. Danzo was getting super intrigued. He had no clue how to obtain the power Hidan had. But he knew that he needed to see if he could get those powers. Hidan How do you praise Jashin? Hidan’s facial expression became childlike and filled with so much joy. You get them by killing people! You do a ritual, and you praise Jashin-sama’s name every time you kill a person! Hidan Where did you learn about the Jashin religion? It is in my home village. Do you want to come see? Yes, I think that I would like to praise Jashin as well. Hidan had such a joyful look on his face. Man, I am so glad we are teammates! I will go show you Jashin's statue! Danzo followed Hidan to a cave and then followed a pathway for a few minutes, where he saw an incredible statue. The statue, which was hundreds of feet high, depicted a man wearing a cloak. He had two horns coming out of his head. He had a black circle on his forehead. He had a 3-pronged scythe in his right hand. He wore a long necklace that featured a huge circular pendant with an upside-down triangle design. This is Jashin in all of his glory!!! Danzo, what do you think? It is incredible, Hidan. Is this where you brought people to kill them, Hidan? Of course, we must always show Jashin our love at all times! How many people have you killed here? Hidan thought about it. Hidan estimated the number at approximately a thousand. Interesting. Danzo’s eyes went wide. How had he not realized it? The statue was in the middle of a giant circle. The lines in the ground within the circle were strangely shaped. Then Danzo realized what was happening, and a huge sly grin spread across his face. This circle was oddly shaped like a seal. Danzo immediately called his ANBU. Bring 1,000 people here unconscious. We will kill them all in front of this statue. Hidan was jumping up and down. I am so happy that you will show Jashin your love like this, Danzo!!!! Yes, Hidan. I have found my religion and I am so excited to always show Jashin my love.